A3D MAX Function Guide

Computer And Design Services Ltd.
CADS Software India (P) Ltd.
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Program Version 3.0
Function Guide Issue 3.0
Date of Issue July 2003
Upgrade Notes Record

For future reference, please record the details of Upgrade Notes as you receive them in the
table below:
Upgrade Note No.
Date Received
Received by
Important Notice
Please read this Due care has been taken to ensure that the data
produced by this program is accurate. However, it
remains the responsibility of the user to verify that any
design based upon this data meets all applicable
standards.
Computer and Design Services Ltd.,

Arrowsmith Court,
Broadstone,
Dorset,
UK
BH18 8AX
Tel. (Sales): +44 (0) 1202 603031

Tel. (Support): +44 (0) 1202 603733
Fax: +44 (0) 1202 658549
Email (Sales): sales@cads.co.uk
Email (Support): support@cads.co.uk
Website: www.cads.co.uk
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Contents
1.0 File Menu ..................................................................................11
1.1
New...........................................................................................................11
1.2
Open.....................................................................................................12
1.3
Open Recovery File ...............................................................................12
1.4
Save ..........................................................................................................12
1.5
Save As .................................................................................................13
1.6
Save Special............................................................................................13
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.6.1
Save Bitmap ..............................................................................13
1.6.2
Save Template ..........................................................................13
1.6.3
Save Metafile ............................................................................13
Import .......................................................................................................14
1.7.1
DXF...........................................................................................14
1.7.2
CSV/Text .................................................................................14
1.7.3
StruCAD...................................................................................15
1.7.4
HyperSteel ..............................................................................15
Export........................................................................................................16
1.8.1
StruCAD...................................................................................16
1.8.2
HyperSTEEL .................................................................................17
Export to Designers.................................................................................17
1.9.1
RC Beam Designer ...................................................................18
1.9.2
RC Column Designer................................................................18
1.9.3
RC Base Designer .....................................................................18
1.9.4
RC Pile Cap Designer...............................................................18
1.9.5
SW Member Designer ..............................................................18
1.9.6
SW Moment Connections .......................................................19
1.10 Audit Database ......................................................................................19

1.11 View Error Log.. .......................................................................................19
1.12 Configure .................................................................................................20
1.12.1 Preferences ............................................................................20
1.12.2 Default A3D MAX Template................................................26
1.12.3 Default SWMD Template .....................................................26
1.12.4 Hardware ...............................................................................26
1.12.5 Reset Dialog Positions ..............................................................28
1
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
1.13 Print....................................................................................................28
1.13.1 Overview of printing.................................................................29
1.13.2 Diagram panel..........................................................................29
1.13.3 Data panel ................................................................................30
1.13.4 Print order panel .......................................................................41
1.13.5 Selection to print panel ........................................................41
1.13.6 Combination results to print panel .....................................41
1.13.7 Edit Header ................................................................................41
1.13.8 Save RTF......................................................................................43
1.13.9 Output Methods .......................................................................43
1.13.10 Text Output ................................................................................43
1.14 Print Preview ........................................................................................44
1.15 Print Setup ............................................................................................44
1.16 Modify Protection...................................................................................44
1.17 Send To.....................................................................................................45
1.18 Recent Files..............................................................................................45
1.19 Exit .....................................................................................................45
2.0 Edit Menu ..................................................................................46

2.1
Undo .........................................................................................................46
2.2
Cut.............................................................................................................46
2.3
Copy .........................................................................................................46
2.4
Paste .........................................................................................................46
2.4.1
Dragging the objects...............................................................47
2.4.2
Placing in position.....................................................................48
2.4.3
Attaching to model..................................................................49
2.4.4
Incorporating the objects.......................................................49
2.4.5
Copying across jobs.................................................................49
2.5
Delete.......................................................................................................50
2.6
Copy Bitmap ...........................................................................................50
2.7
Properties .............................................................................................50
2.7.1
Member Properties...................................................................50
2.7.2
Joint Properties..........................................................................55
2.7.3
Panel Properties ........................................................................57
2.7.4
Overhang Properties................................................................63
2.7.5
Load Properties .........................................................................64

2
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
3.0 View Menu................................................................................66

3.1
Toolbars ....................................................................................................66
3.2
Status bar .................................................................................................67
3.3
Explorer Window.....................................................................................68
3.4
3.3.1
Explorer control .........................................................................68
3.3.2
Object menu .............................................................................69
Zoom.........................................................................................................70
3.4.1
Zoom window............................................................................71
3.4.2
Zoom Extents .............................................................................71
3.4.3
Zoom Manual ............................................................................71
3.4.4
Zoom Previous ...........................................................................71
3.5
Rotate.......................................................................................................71
3.6
Pan ............................................................................................................72
3.7
Info Mode ................................................................................................72
3.8
Render ......................................................................................................72
3.9
3.8.1
Stick model ................................................................................72
3.8.2
High quality full render.............................................................73
3.8.3
Low quality full render..............................................................73
3.8.4
High quality full wire frame .....................................................74
3.8.5
Low quality full wire frame ......................................................74
3.8.6
High quality hidden wire frame .............................................74
3.8.7
Low quality hidden wire frame ..............................................75
Partial views.............................................................................................75
3.10 Restore Full view .....................................................................................75

3.11 View .....................................................................................................76
3.12 Preset Views.............................................................................................76
3.12.1 Preset Views...............................................................................76
3.12.2 Capture Preset View ................................................................77
3.13 Toggles .....................................................................................................77
3.13.1 Toggle Objects..........................................................................77
3.13.2 Toggle Labels.............................................................................78
3.13.3 Toggle Tool-tips .........................................................................78
3.14 Refresh All Windows ...............................................................................78
3.15 Sort by .. 79
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
4.0 Selection Menu ........................................................................80

4.1
Normal ......................................................................................................80
4.1.1
Picking.........................................................................................80
4.1.2
Selection box.............................................................................80
4.1.3
Clearing the selection .............................................................81
4.2
Move.........................................................................................................81
4.3
Move By ...................................................................................................81
4.4
Stretch ......................................................................................................82
4.5
Stretch By .................................................................................................82
4.6
More......................................................................................................82
4.6.1
Rotate .........................................................................................83
4.6.2
Rotate By....................................................................................83
4.6.3
Scale ...........................................................................................84
4.6.4
Scale By ......................................................................................84
4.6.5
Detach on Transform ...............................................................84
4.7
Lock Selection.........................................................................................84
4.8
Restrict to .................................................................................................84
4.9
Toggle Snaps ...........................................................................................85

4.9.1
Set snaps ....................................................................................85
5.0 Model Menu .............................................................................86

5.1
5.2
Outline of the model .............................................................................86

5.1.1
Joints ...........................................................................................86
5.1.2
Members ....................................................................................87
5.1.3
Panels and Overhangs ............................................................87
5.1.4
Loads and Moments ................................................................88
5.1.5
Load combinations ..................................................................88
Create Frame......................................................................................88
5.2.1
3D Building Frame Generator.................................................89
5.2.2
Girder Frame Generator .........................................................91
5.2.3
2D Grillage Generator .............................................................95
5.2.4
2D Truss Frame Generator.......................................................97
5.2.5
Portal Frame Generator ..........................................................100
5.3
Automatic Panels...................................................................................106
5.4
Create Portal.......................................................................................107
5.5
Joints .....................................................................................................107
4
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.5.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Joint Editor .................................................................................107
5.6
Support Types ......................................................................................108
5.7
Members ..............................................................................................108
5.7.1
5.8
Panels....................................................................................................110
5.8.1
5.9
Member Editor ..........................................................................108

Panel editor ...............................................................................111
Create Panel .......................................................................................111
5.10 Overhangs ...........................................................................................112

5.11 Member Types.....................................................................................113
5.11.1 Member Type Editor.................................................................113
5.11.2 SW Library member type.........................................................116
5.11.3 Timber Library member type ..................................................120
5.11.4 Non-prismatic Member Type..................................................120
5.11.5 Properties member type .........................................................122
5.11.6 Elements Member Type...........................................................123
5.11.7 RC Member, member type ....................................................124
5.11.8 SW Haunch Member Type ......................................................126
5.12 Sections ................................................................................................129
5.12.1 Section Editor.............................................................................130
5.13 Materials...............................................................................................130
5.13.1 Steel materials library ...............................................................131
5.13.2 Materials Editor..........................................................................131
5.14 Load and Moments ...........................................................................132
5.14.1 Type.............................................................................................133
5.14.2 Direction .....................................................................................135
5.14.3 Category ....................................................................................135
5.14.4 Load values ...............................................................................135
5.14.5 Load Options .............................................................................136
5.14.6 Load Controls ............................................................................137
5.14.7 Applying Load Types to Member and Joints ......................137
5.15 Panel Loads .............................................................................................138
5.15.1 Area Loads.................................................................................138
5.15.2 Point Load ..................................................................................139
5.15.3 Line Load....................................................................................139
5.15.4 Patch Load ................................................................................140
5.15.5 Area loads shading scheme ..................................................141
5.16 Load Combinations and Categories .................................................142
5
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
5.16.1 Load combinations ..................................................................142

5.16.2 Load Categories.......................................................................143
6.0 Tools Menu................................................................................145

6.1
Mirror Selection .......................................................................................145
6.2
Quick Member........................................................................................145
6.3
Quick Panel .............................................................................................147
6.4
Quick Support .........................................................................................148
6.5
Split Selected Members ........................................................................149
6.6
Remove Selected Loads.......................................................................151
6.7
Old Grouping .....................................................................................151
6.8
Layout Grouping wizard .......................................................................151
6.9
6.8.1
Create Layout Group ..............................................................151
6.8.2
Grid line and dimension settings ...........................................153
6.8.3
Layer and file information .......................................................153
6.8.4
End Layout Grouping Wizard .................................................154
Layout Group Editor...............................................................................155

6.9.1
Results Panel ..............................................................................156
6.9.2
Sort...............................................................................................156
6.9.3
Property ......................................................................................156
6.9.4
Creating DXF files......................................................................158
6.10 Layer Information File ............................................................................158
7.0 Analysis Menu ..........................................................................161

7.1
Calculate.................................................................................................161
7.2
Analysis Options......................................................................................162
7.3
7.4
7.2.1
Note.............................................................................................163
7.2.2
Options .......................................................................................163
Tabular Results.........................................................................................165
7.3.1
Displacements...........................................................................165
7.3.2
Reactions ...................................................................................166
7.3.3
Hinge Formation .......................................................................167
7.3.4
Collapse Analysis ......................................................................168
7.3.5
Effects .........................................................................................169
7.3.6
Deflections .................................................................................171
Graphical Results....................................................................................172
6
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
7.4.1
Graph Type ................................................................................173
7.4.2
Graph Plane ..............................................................................174
7.4.3
Options .......................................................................................175
7.4.4
Controls.......................................................................................176
7.4.5
Elastic critical load analysis ....................................................176
8.0 Design Menu ............................................................................178

8.1
8.2
Overview of Grouping...........................................................................178
8.1.1
Purpose of Grouping................................................................178
8.1.2
Designing with Groups.............................................................179
8.1.3
Assigning Groups ......................................................................179
Create Group .........................................................................................179

8.2.1
Page 1 Grouping Wizard......................................................180
8.2.2
Page 2 Design Information ..................................................181
8.2.3
Page 3 Member Joining.......................................................183
8.2.4
Page 4 Common Design......................................................184
8.2.5
Page 5 Finished! .....................................................................186
8.3
Edit Group................................................................................................188
8.4
Design Results..........................................................................................188
8.4.1
Results Panel ..............................................................................188
8.4.2
Steel design deflection checks..............................................191
8.4.3
Overall status messages ..........................................................191
8.4.4
Show............................................................................................192
8.4.5
Group Editing Tools...................................................................192
8.4.6
Selection.....................................................................................193
8.4.7
Settings .......................................................................................196
8.4.8
Update Analysis Model............................................................197
8.4.9
Design Results menu ................................................................198
8.4.10 Viewing tools .............................................................................200
9.0 Window Menu ..........................................................................202

9.1
New window ...........................................................................................202
9.2
Cascade ..................................................................................................202
9.3
Tile..............................................................................................................202
9.4
Arrange icons..........................................................................................202
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
10.0 Help Menu ................................................................................203

Appendix A Analysis Methods .....................................................204
A.1 Elastic Analysis.............................................................................................204
A.1.1 Overview of the stiffness method..............................................204
A.1.2 Bandwidth .....................................................................................204
A.1.3 Assumptions ...................................................................................204
A.1.4 Operation ......................................................................................205
A.2 Torsionless Analysis......................................................................................205
A.2.1 Torsionless method .......................................................................205
A.2.2 Recommendations ......................................................................205
A.2.3 Operation ......................................................................................206
A.3 P-Delta Analysis...........................................................................................206
A.3.1 Overview........................................................................................206
A.3.2 P-Delta Method ............................................................................206
A.3.3 Operation ......................................................................................207
A.3.4 Limitations ......................................................................................207
A.4 Plastic Analysis.............................................................................................208
A.4.1 Overview........................................................................................208
A.4.2 Operation ......................................................................................208
A.4.3 Limitations ......................................................................................212
A.5 Elastic Critical Load Analysis ....................................................................213
A.6 Rigid Constraints in Analysis......................................................................213
A.6.1 Rigid plane.....................................................................................213
A.6.2 Limitations ......................................................................................214
A.7 Panel Local Coordinate System ..............................................................214
A.8 Panel Loads Distribution ............................................................................215
A.8.1 Bisection method for area loads...............................................216
A.8.2 Grid method..................................................................................216
A.8.3 Distributed member load............................................................217
Appendix B Design Grouping.......................................................219

B.1 Design Process.............................................................................................219
B.1.1 Analysis............................................................................................219
B.1.2 Check..............................................................................................220
B.1.3 Design .............................................................................................220
8
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
B.1.4 Details option and Aspects ...................................................221

B.1.5 Update model ...............................................................................222
B.1.6 Re-analysis......................................................................................223
B.1.7 Re-check ........................................................................................223
B.1.8 Solution............................................................................................223
B.1.9 Optimising points to watch......................................................224
B.2 How SWMD handles A3D MAX members...............................................225
B.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................225
B.2.2 Making alterations........................................................................226
B.2.3 Reviewing the Results...................................................................226
B.3 Creating SWMD templates .......................................................................227
B.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................227
B.3.2 Restraints.........................................................................................227
B.3.3 Saving template files....................................................................228
B.4 Old Grouping Method ............................................................................229
B.4.1 Introduction ...................................................................................229
B.4.2 Member Grouping........................................................................229
B.4.3 The Grouping dialog ....................................................................230
B.4.4 Creating a group ..........................................................................232
B.4.5 Calculating member checks .....................................................233
B.4.6 Reviewing design Results.............................................................233
B.4.7 Making changes ...........................................................................234
Appendix C Using DXF...................................................................................235
C.1 Importing DXF files...........................................................................235
C.2 Printing the DXF file .........................................................................235
C.3 Creating a drawing ........................................................................235
C.4 Setting up the drawing ..................................................................235
C.5 Getting The DXF files.......................................................................236
C.6 Hints and tips....................................................................................237
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Introduction
This guide describes the functions provided by CADS A3D MAX. It is set out according to
the menu structure of the application as this gives access to all functions. In many cases
there are tool button equivalents and these are indicated by the presence of their
button image alongside the description. This guide describes the actual tools provided by
the application.
10
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
1.0 File Menu
Figure 1.1
The File menu contains the standard Windows tools for creating, opening and saving jobs
together with import, export and printing options alongwith a few further options for
setting the working environment.
1.1
New
This creates a new job with the default name untitled.a3m. This job uses the default
settings saved in the defaults.cct file in the \A3Dmax\data folder.
If an existing job is open and has been changed since it was last saved you will be
offered the opportunity to save it before creating a new job.
11
A3D MAX
Function Guide
1.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Open
This opens a standard Windows file browser for you to select an existing job.
includes a preview facility that shows a thumbnail view of the model with members.
It
A preview button is provided to switch the preview OFF.

Analyse3D only reads files with an .a3d extension. Analyse3D uses a later file format than
version1 or version2 and will automatically update any files saved under these versions.
This means the files can no longer be read by earlier versions of Analyse3D. Please bear
this in mind if you need to send the job to other users. It may be wise to make a backup
copy of the old version file first if this is likely. However, everyone should be encouraged
to upgrade to Analyse3D version3.
Figure 1.2
A3D MAX can read files with both .a3d and .a3m extensions. By default it shows the
latter. If you wish to load any Analyse3D job you need to change the file type. A3D MAX
will automatically convert the job to .a3m format and save it by default using the same
job name. This does not overwrite the original .a3d job file.
1.3
Open Recovery File
The program automatically backs up a job whenever it is saved. It renames the current
job file with an .a3k extension and then writes out the latest job data. Should there be
any problem while the file is being written, you may recover the job at least in its previous
state.
To recover a job, pick File>Open recovery file from the menu and choose the job to
recover. You should then save the job using Save As so that you can rename it. The
program does not allow you to save jobs as back ups using the .a3k extension.
1.4
Save
This saves the current job. If the job has not been saved already, the standard
Windows Save As browser will be opened for you to name and place the file.
12
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
A3D MAX only saves files in its file format and with an .a3m file extension.
If a job has already been saved once then Save will update the file in its current
location without further confirmation. If you wish to save with a new file name then use
the Save As option.
1.5
Save As
This opens the Windows standard file Save As browser so that you can give the file a
new name. The existing job name is used as the default. Having changed the name and
saved the file this now becomes the current job name. The files are saved with extensions
as noted under Save above.
1.6
Save Special
Figure 1.3
This offers two additional methods of saving particular data.
1.6.1
Save Bitmap
This saves the current view as a bit map (.bmp) image in the location specified using the
standard Windows Save As browser. These images can be incorporated in reports and
other word-processed documents etc.
1.6.2
Save Template
This saves the current job as a template to a file specified in the standard Windows Save
As browser. Templates are (usually) blank files with particular settings that you wish to use
in many jobs. They are identical to a job file in format and will contain modelling objects if
any are present when saved.
These files have a .cct extension and when opened set up a job according to the
content of the file but as a New job named untitled.
1.6.3
Save Metafile
This saves the current view as a metafile (.wmf) in the location specified using the
standard Windows Save As browser. These images can be incorporated in reports and
other word-processed documents etc. It occupies much less disk space than the bitmap
image.
13
A3D MAX
Function Guide
1.7
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Import
Figure 1.4
The program can import data from other sources. Generally, the content is limited to
geometry. The currently available options are:
1.7.1
DXF
This imports drawings in the standard Drawing Exchange File format (file extension .dxf)
used by many vector drawing applications such as AutoCAD. It imports Line, Polyline
and 3DFace entities, which are decomposed into members, and adds joints at their ends.
The DXF Import is only expected to create a simple stick model of the geometry. Hence
when importing from a drawing it is important to ensure that you include only data
relevant to the creation of that stick model. You are recommended to copy the essential
elements of the geometry of the drawn model into its own layer if the drawing
application supports layers, and create a DXF file from that data alone.
The program assumes the drawing is created in metric drawing units and interprets the
extent of the DXF import to determine if mm or m units have been used.
Before the Import is placed, you are asked whether you want to Map co-ordinate from
AutoCAD system to A3D system. If you pick Yes the XY plane in AutoCAD (usually the
plan view) will be mapped to the XZ plane in A3D MAX to maintain a plan view. Picking
No maintains the AutoCAD axes references and the model is therefore transformed to a
different view in A3D MAX.
Finally, the Imported objects are dragged into position and may be attached to existing
joints or placed to particular co-ordinates in the usual manner. (See Edit>Pasting
objects for details).
1.7.2
CSV/Text
CADS A3D MAX can import joint and member geometry from comma or tab separated
files. This enables you to create frames from files exported by other analysis packages or
databases, or create your own frame generators using a spreadsheet application.
The facility is available from the File > Import > CSV/Txt menu which opens a file
browser from which you choose the file to import. If there are no objects in the A3D MAX
model already then the imported objects will be placed with the first joint in the file
placed at 0,0,0. Otherwise, they will be ghosted for you to drag into position similar to the
normal placing methods.
The input for the above files should be specified in a particular format. For comma
separated, each field should be separated by a comma and for tab delimited by a tab.
14
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Example
JOINTS
Joint
Ref
1
2
Xpos
(m)
7
7
Ypos
(m)
0
0
Zpos
(m)
0
3.5
Start
joint
1
2
Start
fixity
Fixed
Fixed
MEMBERS
Mem
ref
1
2
Mem
type
M1
M1
End
joint
5
6
End
fixity
Fixed
Fixed
Orient
0
0
Direc
behav
Normal
Normal
Len
Slope
10.0 0.0
10.0 90.0
Main title JOINTS and MEMBERS are essential. Other sub titles can be omitted. Directional
behaviour, Length and Slope can be omitted. Member type, Start fixity, End fixity and
Orientation can be skipped by an extra comma or tab. For example:1
is a valid input with extra tab inserted for missing fields.
1.7.3
StruCAD
This imports model geometry from StruCAD Neutral Files format (.snf) files using the
standard Windows file browser. The data includes the members and the member types if
corresponding sections can be found in the A3D MAX SW Library. Eventhough the
orientation of the members is also imported, you are advised to check vertical columns in
particular.
Members that have been processed in StruCAD by the application of connections etc.
may not connect to others at rational node points when imported. Some editing may be
necessary to produce a satisfactory model for analysis. Loads in StruCAD are not
imported, as these are effectively end effects used for the calculation of connections.
There is a corresponding Export function that does include end effect loads. (See
File>Export below for details).
1.7.4
HyperSteel
Models created in the Hypersteel steelwork detailing package can be exported to A3D
MAX. Briefly, the method is to create a transfer file in Hypersteel which can be read by
A3D MAX. The procedure is as follows:
To export the model from Hypersteel you need to have the Hypersteel application
running and the required job loaded. Pick Cads>Export frame to A3D MAX from the
menu which will ask you to select objects. Select the members you wish to export in the
usual manner and when completed a file browser will open for you to save the file. This
file is in comma separated value format. Pick Save and the program will show its
progress and confirm that it has saved the file.
15
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
To import the transfer file into A3D MAX, start A3D MAX and pick File > Import >
Hypersteel from the menu which will open a file browser showing a list of .csv files.
Choose the one you require and pick Open. The file will be loaded and the job
displayed. Note that the import assumes that the Hypersteel Z axis represents the vertical
axis of the frame.
Note that only the basic member geometry and serial size data are imported, no
haunches or connections etc are included. The members are also assumed to lie along
their centres of gravity for the purpose of analysis and design. The orientation and
handing of the members are preserved.
The program endeavours to find the serial size specified. Otherwise, it reports the number
of sections not found, assigns them the default member type and marks them Not found
(CSV) in the Member Type editor.
The Import searches the current section library table and this can be set by picking
File>Configure>Preferences>Defaults and entering the table reference under Default
Import SW section table. The default is UK6 and at present the choice is from the UK
tables UK3, UK5 and UK6.
1.8
Export
Figure 1.5
The program can export data to two popular Steelwork fabrication detailing
applications.
1.8.1
StruCAD
This option enables model geometry to be written in StruCAD Neutral File format (.snf)
files. The data includes the members and the member types, and end effect loads if the
frame has been calculated. It opens a dialog for you to select the items to output.
Figure 1.6
16
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
If a selection of members has been made in the model view, then you can choose
whether to output all members or only those selected. If the model has been analysed,
you may export the end forces that become Load effects in StruCAD.
Having made your choices, a standard Windows file Save As dialog is opened, by
which you can specify the name and location of the .snf file.
Members are exported, as running between joint positions and the member type
maintained wherever possible. Eventhough the member orientation is exported, you are
advised to check the orientation in StruCAD, particularly for columns.
If load effects are exported, StruCAD requires two load combinations. When the A3D
MAX model contains only one load combination, a second combination with zero
factors is added. Only the first two combinations are output if there are more than two.
1.8.2
HyperSTEEL
This option exports the member data as a PSS file, which can be read by DSCs
Hypersteel 3D steelwork detailing application. The file is in a format similar to the PSS
protocol published by the Deutscher Stahlbau-Verband (DSTV) for steel construction and
manufacture. The file is written to the directory specified under Hypersteel export folder
in the configuration and it is given the job name and a .stp extension.
The Read PSS File tool in Hypersteel can be used to read this file and the corresponding
geometry will be created.
Figure 1.7
1.9
Export to Designers
Once the analysis has been carried out on a job you can export selected members
to various CADS Design Applications. Selecting members or joints will enable appropriate
options on the menu. Picking the required option will launch the application with the
data from that member or joint read for designing.
17
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 1.8
You should, of course, carefully check the data and any default settings used by the
design application before proceeding with the design.
1.9.1
RC Beam Designer
CADS RC Beam Designer can design simple or continuous beams and sub frames. It
supports BS, ACI and IS codes.
Full geometric data and analysis effects are transferred if the members selected are of
RC Member type. LLoads and load combinations may also be transferred optionally.
Members must be horizontal, in a continuous straight line and run in the same direction.
1.9.2
RC Column Designer
CADS RC Column Designer can design single rectangular, circular or elliptical columns. It
supports BS, ACI and IS codes.
Full geometric data, loads and load combinations are transferred if the member selected
is of RC Column member type.
1.9.3
RC Base Designer
CADS RC Base Designer can design isolated pad bases. It provides full stability checks
and reinforcement details if required. It supports BS, ACI and IS codes.
When you select the required joint and full load, the load combination data is
transferred. This application only designs a single pad base at a time.
1.9.4
RC Pile Cap Designer
CADS RC Base Designer can design pile caps for 2 to 9 piles. It determines the number of
piles required and can provide reinforcement details if required. It does not calculate the
pile itself. It supports BS, ACI and IS codes.
When you select the required joint and full load, the load combination data is
transferred. This application only designs a single pile cap at a time.
1.9.5
SW Member Designer
CADS SW Member Designer can design any SW Member type or beam, column, strut, or
tie. It is currently available for BS5950 Part1:1990 and BS5950:2000.
18
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
A single member or a series of analysis members in a continuous straight line and same
direction can be selected for export and will be designed as a single steel member.
1.9.6
SW Moment Connections
CADS SW Moment Connection program designs individual moment connections

between SW library member types. It principally deals with beam to column flange,
splice/metre, and approximately symmetrical beam to column web connections plus
base plates. Most of the connections can also include haunches if required. It is currently
only available to BS5950 Part 1:1990.
If a single joint is selected, the program will examine the adjoining members and offer a
choice of connections according to the situation. Alternatively, the joint and appropriate
members may be selected. In this case, the type of connection, or a choice if there is
one will be shown for confirmation or selection.
1.10 Audit Database

This function causes the program to check its database to ensure its data is consistent
and there are no un-referenced objects. You should not normally use this facility as the
program carries out its own auditing when certain operations are performed. It is largely
provided in case old jobs saved under earlier versions of the program prove prone to
errors. If so, this utility may be able to effect a repair, or indicate where data may need to
be re-entered.
1.11 View Error Log..

Error log reports, errors related to invalid panel (and overhang) geometry and invalid
panel load co-ordinates. You can run the Audit Database, View Error Log and then
proceed with calculations. The log will be cleared and updated each time we run
calculations or audit database.
Panels are deleted when:
Orphans - the panel does not belong to any panel group in a plane
Panel not in plane
Overlapping panel
Invalid Shape - internal angles exceed 180
Invalid Edges - adjacent edges are empty
Panel attributes corrected when:
Invalid Rigidity - rigidity set to 'None'
Invalid Distribution Type (both inplane & normal) - Distribution Type set to 2-way
Panel Loads deleted when:
Invalid load coordinates - Coordinates not valid for panel
Panel Overhang deleted when:
Invalid Members - Members do not lie in the outer boundary of the panel group or
are not continuous
Invalid panel group - Cannot find panel group to associate with the overhang
19
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
1.12 Configure
Figure 1.9
A3D MAX is highly configurable and most of its settings use the Preferences option.
The other two items set the path to the template files used by A3D MAX and SW Member
Designer (SWMD).
1.12.1
Preferences
Picking Preferences opens the Configuration dialog, which contains a number of tabbed
pages of settings. Most are fairly self-explanatory.
1.12.1.1
Factors
Factors are arbitrary scale factors that control the size of many of the objects in the main
view. They include the scale to which loads are drawn and the scale of the results
graphs. The values shown initially are the defaults used. The graphical results dialog allows
them to be altered temporarily during an editing session.
Figure 1.10
20
A3D MAX
Function Guide
1.12.1.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Colours
The colour swatches modify the colours used by most objects in the main view. Clicking
on the menu arrow opens a small palette and picking More opens the full Windows
colour picker.
Figure 1.11
1.12.1.3
Sizes
These items determine the size of the other facilities and may need a little explanation.
Figure 1.12
Text Height This is the height of the labels etc. that appear in the main view.
21
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Moment Circle Points this determines how points are used to show the applied (load)
moments. The more points there are, the smoother the arc, but the slower the drawing.
This is only likely to be an issue with many applied moments.
Picking Radius this is an arbitrary value which determines the pick size when making a
selection. A small value makes the picking more selective, but more accuracy is needed
when picking an object. Large values make picking easier but increases the risk of
picking the wrong object.
Member End Fixity Label Offset this value adjusts the distance of the labels that are used
to indicate member end fixity, offset from the end of members. The labels need to be
offset, otherwise they risk being overwritten by the joint labels.
HyperSteel export column tolerance tolerance for HyperSteel export.
Maximum utilisation for overdesign report This value is the level of over design
expressed as a percentage. When the utilisation ratios for the members are less than one
minus this value they are regarded as over designed.
Graphical Results Intervals This value determines the default setting of the number of
intervals shown in the graphical results. It does not take effect until a new editing session is
started. By default the value is 20.
Tabular Results Intervals This value determines the default setting of the number of
intervals shown in the effects and deflections pages of the tabular results. It does not take
effect until a new editing session is started. By default the value is 4. This setting also
controls the number of intervals included in the printed tables where member intervals
are shown. In this case it has an effect in the next output.
Result Graph Labels Precision This value controls the number of decimal places shown
by the labels in the Graphical Results display. This value also controls the precision shown
in the tool tips.
No. of Divisions for Panel Load Distribution This value determines the size of the mesh to
be generated for panel point, patch and line load distribution. The more the number, the
finer the mesh but the time required for analysis varies appropriately. The default value is
10.
1.12.1.4
Messages
These items determine whether certain warning messages should be issued or not. In
some circumstances you may find that the persistent issuing of a warning, which you may
be content to ignore, will be irksome if it happens frequently.
22
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 1.13
Clearing the tick box beside an item turns off its warning. Be careful when using this, as
you may overlook a problem if you fail to turn the warning on during a later editing
session.
1.12.1.5
Options
These options control how certain aspects of the program behave. They merit a little
explanation.
Figure 1.14
Tool-tips a number of objects support tool-tips in the main view, so that you can easily
find their references or, in the case of the results graphics, values at certain points.
23
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
There is a button on the Display toolbar to toggle tool-tips on or off generally.

However, these options allow you to choose as to which objects should show tool-tips
when the toggle is on.
Transparency effects sets the shading fill applied to supports, results graphs and other
objects to be semi-transparent so that other objects show through. If it is solid, it obscures
other objects. Solid fill is quicker to draw, so it may be beneficial to turn this off on slower
systems.
Analyse 3D compatible selection sets A3D MAX to the Analyse3D v1.xx main view
selection methods (where each pick adds to the selection), rather than Windows style
selection (where each pick replaces the selection and CTRL pick is used to add).
Show Axes Triad this is set to determine whether the triad is to be shown or not. When
set, the A3D MAX global axis triad will appear in the main view. For a particular editing
session the triad can be enabled using right click > Show triad even if not set in
configuration.
Dock Axes Triad if this is set then the triad will appear near the lower left corner of the
main view. If it is not set then the triad will appear near the centre of the current
selection. In this case, if there is no selection the triad will not be shown. This will work only
if the Show Axes Triad is enabled.
Print Engine Enabled this allows the user to choose either the old print method or the
new print engine based print out. The Print engine solves some problems that are
encountered with certain printer drivers on some machines. The table widths have been
rationalised and the outer borders thickened to improve appearance. The Margins and
Fonts for this output are fixed but you can choose A4 or US letter paper size from the Print
Layout > Edit Header dialog.
Auto Edge Fixity Update this setting updates the edge continuity of a new panel
created and existing panels based on the adjacent panels and overhangs. By default all
edges of a panel are simply supported but when another panel or overhang shares a
common edge it becomes restrained. If one or more edges of a panel are not fully
populated with members, it becomes a free edge. It is also updated when model
changes take place (e.g. Deletion, Creation of adjacent panel or overhang). If this
setting is not checked then the default edge fixity setting will remain. Please note this will
be used in the distribution of loads using the grid method.
1.12.1.6
Folders
These items store the locations and names of the applications that A3D MAX links to, and
the location of its own and other application data files. Most of these are obtained from
their registered or default locations. If you install some of the applications after A3D MAX
to locations other than the defaults offered, then you will probably have to amend these
fields to the appropriate paths before A3D MAX will link to or find the correct data.
24
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 1.15
The paths can be amended directly or by using an Explorer window, by picking on
the small down arrow that appears to the right of the current field.
1.12.1.7
Units
This allows you to choose between the use of the Metric (SI) or British (Imperial) units. Note
that the British units are entered and displayed in decimal format and not in feet and
inches or pounds and ounces.
Figure 1.16
When you change the setting, the program will need to be re-started for the change to
take effect. The units setting will stay in force on subsequent starts until it is again reset.
25
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Jobs may be viewed or entered in either units, depending on the current setting.
However, it may be noted that values are converted to base units of N and mm for
calculation purposes and hence there may be some slight rounding errors in the
conversions.
1.12.1.8
Defaults
This allows you to set the default steel grade, SW section library table that will be used for
any new member type created there on. It also allows to set the default import SW
section table.
Figure 1.17
Clicking on the value cell for default steel grade opens the standard steel materials
library for you to choose the default steel grade.
Clicking on the value cell for default steel table displays a list of section table names to
choose from.
1.12.2
Default A3D MAX Template
This option opens a standard Windows file browser for you to locate an A3D MAX
template file (.cct) to become the default for subsequent jobs.
1.12.3
Default SWMD Template
This option opens a standard Windows file browser for you to locate a SWMD template
file (.smd) to become the default for any steelwork designs using the Grouping method in
subsequent jobs.
1.12.4
Hardware
26
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
A3D MAX uses OpenGL to drive the graphical display. This can be quite demanding on
some systems and some users have had to turn down hardware acceleration in the
Windows Control Panel for the program to run properly. If you have not had to do this
then you can ignore this section.
The program is enhanced so that it can determine the optimum OpenGL settings for your
system. Normally A3D MAX will use the default settings applied at installation and you do
not have to do anything. However, on some systems problems can arise with the objects
being difficult to pick or the program becoming unstable after printing or previewing.
The problem seems to be dependent on the combination of the graphics card and the
computer system that makes it difficult to be more specific.
If you are finding problems or you have already been advised to turn down hardware
acceleration, then this new facility may help. Pick File > Configure > Hardware which
opens a wizard to take you through the process.
Figure 1.18
It first checks your system and then asks you to identify a problem if you have
encountered one.
It then shows one or two slider bars set according to your system. Best makes the
greatest use of OpenGL features and Worst the least. If you are experiencing a problem
set the slider one step towards worst and proceed to the end of the wizard.
27
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 1.19
You will need to close and re-start A3D MAX for the new settings to take effect. If the
problem persists, turn the setting down a further notch until it runs successfully. It will
remember that setting and continue to use it thereafter.
If you change your graphics card then you may find that you need to run the wizard
again.
1.12.5
Reset Dialog Positions
This command resets all dialogs that appear in A3D MAX to their default positions. This is
particularly useful when a particular dialog goes out of the view or off the side of the
screen for some peculiar reason.
1.13 Print
The input and results can be printed to A4 or similar sized headed sheets. The data
to be printed can be chosen by type and the range of members and load combinations
to be included can be specified. A diagram of the model can also be included in the
printout.
There are two options for printing - using the Print Engine or using the old print method.
With the print engine enabled (from File > Configure > Preferences > Options dialog) by
default, the new print method is used. Note that the Margins and Fonts for this output are
fixed but you can choose an A4 or US letter paper size from the Print Layout > Edit Header
dialog.
28
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 1.20
In addition to the printout, the data can be exported to Microsoft Word in a fully
formatted and tabulated document by means of the CADS Word Macro or Save RTF. The
output can also be saved as text or comma separated value files that may be used by
word processors, spreadsheets and other applications.
1.13.1
Overview of printing
The printout consists of sets of data as shown in the Data panel and these are Added
to the Print Order panel which determines what data is to be printed and its order. The
Selection to Print and the Combination results to print panels can control the amount
of data.
The other controls allow you to set up the page and headers and control the text and
Word Macro output, which has otherwise the same content as the main printout.
A more detailed explanation follows.
1.13.2
Diagram panel
This panel controls the Diagram options in the Print layout dialog. You can print multiple
diagrams based on the Preset views saved. If both diagrams and data are to be printed
together then the diagrams are printed first.
Note that diagrams are no longer available if the Print Engine is disabled.
Print selected diagrams This enables the printing of diagrams. If the option is not
selected then no diagrams are printed.
Quality There are two qualities of diagrams:
29
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Metafile This is a vector-based output which means that regardless of scale, all lines are
smooth. It has the further advantage of not requiring much memory to draw upon prior to
printing and is quite fast. The disadvantage is that it does not support shaded
representation and hence the output is always either stick or wire frame depending on
the render setting of the view to be output.
Bitmap This outputs the view as a bitmap and supports the full range of render modes
and shading. The disadvantage is that diagonal lines may be a little jagged and it
requires a fair amount of memory particularly for an A3 output and is slower to draw. This
may be a problem with some base model computers or older machines. The
approximate memory requirement is shown alongside the option.
Diagram Size This enables you to control the output size. There are two options:
Full size prints the diagram on one page maximising the size of the image according to
the original view settings.
Custom allows you to specify the depth of the diagram. This feature is not implemented
in this version.
Orientation this enables you to choose the format in which the diagrams are to be
printed.
Portrait this is the normal upright page layout with the header block printed along the
top of the page for an A4 output. An A3 output uses a similar header block but it is
aligned to the top right side of the page.
Landscape this aligns the paper lengthwise. Both the A4 and A3 sizes position the
header block in the lower right corner of the page.
Paper size this enables you to choose the paper size.
Default this is the standard size as set in the Header dialog. Normally this will be an A4 or
US letter. The default is the size the main data pages are printed to.
A3 this size is enabled if the Windows Print Manager default printer supports the A3
paper size.
View list The panel in the lower right of the dialog lists the views, which have been
saved together with an item called Current view, which represents the current view in the
active window. This is always present and its title cannot be changed. It does not have a
caption. However you do not have to print it.
Tick the tick alongside each view indicates whether that view is to be included in any
diagram printout.
Ordering output the arrows to the right of the list allow highlighted views to be moved
up or down the list to change the order of the output. The top and bottom arrows move
the views to the top or bottom of the list respectively.
1.13.3
Data panel
Geometry lists the members placed in the model with their start and end joints and
fixities together with their orientation, length and slope.
30
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Members
Mbr
Member
Start
Start
End
End
Orient
Directional
Length
Slope
ref
type
joint
fixity
joint
fixity
()
behaviour
(m)
()
305x165 UB40
Fixed
Fixed
0.0
Normal
10.000
90.0
305x165 UB40
Fixed
Fixed
0.0
Normal
10.000
90.0
305x165 UB40
Fixed
Fixed
0.0
Normal
10.000
90.0
305x165 UB40
Fixed
Fixed
0.0
Normal
10.000
90.0
Joints lists the joints with their co-ordinates and supports with their fixity constraints.
Joints
Joint
X pos
Y pos
Z pos
Joint
X pos
Y pos
Z pos
ref
(m)
(m)
(m)
ref
(m)
(m)
(m)
Join
t
ref
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.000
0.000
0.000
10.000
10.00
0
0.000
10.000
0.000
10.00
0
0.000
10.000
0.000
10.000
10.000
10.000
20.000
0.000
0.000
20.000
10.000
10.00
0
0.000
11
12
20.000
10.000
10.000
10.000
10.000
10
20.000
0.000
10.00
0
X pos
Y pos
Z pos
(m)
(m)
(m)
Panels
Alignment
Ref.
Vertex
Thickness
&
joints
(mm)
Offset
Restraint data for edges

Rigidity
Material
type
(mm)
SS-Simply supported
Res.-Restrained
Edge1
Edge2
Edge3
P2
9,18,17,8
150
Centre
Plane
ConcG35
Res.
Res.
Res.
Res.
P6
27,36,35,26
150
Bottom
Plane
ConcG35
Res.
Res.
Res.
Res.
P8
15,24,23,14
150
-50
Plane
ConcG30
SS
Res.
Res.
Res.
P12
23,32,31,22
150
Top
ConcG35
Res.
SS
SS
Res.
Overhangs
Overhang ref.
Associated panel edge
Overhang4
Overhang type
P2 - Edge 1
Start width
End width
(mm)
(mm)
Rectangular
1000
P4 - Edge 1
Overhang6
P13 - Edge 3
Rectangular
1000
Overhang7
P6 - Edge 2
Circular
1000
Trapezoidal
1000
2000
P5 - Edge 2
Overhang8
P5 - Edge 3
Supports
Jnt
Support
X Trans.
Y Trans.
Z Trans.
X Rot.
Y Rot.
Z Rot.
Direction
Ref
type
(kN/mm)
(kN/mm)
(kN/mm)
(kNm/Rad)
(kNm/Rad)
(kNm/Rad)
control
Support2
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Free
Free
Free
Normal
Support3
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Free
Free
Free
Normal
31
Edge4
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Sections lists the sections defined explicitly (i.e. SW Library, Elements and Properties) with
separate tables for those defined implicitly as part of composite member types (i.e. RC
Members and SW Haunch).
Sections
Section
Area
Ixx
Iyy
Elements (mm)
Reference
(cm)
(cm4)
(cm4)
(cm4)
No
305x165 UB40
51.6
8551
766
14.9
120x80x5.0 RHS
18.9
370
195
401
80x40x3.0 RHS
6.8
55
18.2
43.7
50x30x2.5 RHS
3.72
12
5.3
11.7
Width
Height
Vertical off Lateral off
Materials lists the materials used by the member types and not the complete list of
materials available.
Materials
Material
Elastic
Poisson
reference
modulus
ratio
SteelG43
205.00
Density
Thermal
expansion
(kN/mm)
0.30
(kN/m3)
(/Cx10-6)
77.00
12.00
Member types lists the member types defined including segment length and depth
data for non-prismatic member types. RC Member and SW Haunch types are listed in
separate tables.
Member Types
Reference
Shape
Material
Seg
Start
End
Length
Depth
Placing
no
section
section
(m)
(mm)
rule
top1
SW Library
SteelG43
80x40x4.0 RHS
end1
SW Library
SteelG43
50x30x4.0 RHS
Lacer1
SW Library
SteelG43
50x30x2.5 RHS
btm1
SW Library
SteelG43
50x30x5.0 RHS
Member loads lists the loads as applied to each member.

Member Loads
Load Reference
Load
Start
Start intensity End
type
pos'n (m) (kN) & (m)
End intensity
Direction
Category
pos'n (m) (kN) & (m)
Loads on member 7 (Length 1.500m)

UniDead
UL
2.000
Vertical
Dead
UniImp
UL
1.000
Vertical
Imposed
Loads on member 8 (Length 1.500m)

UniDead
UL
2.000
Vertical
Dead
UniImp
UL
1.000
Vertical
Imposed
32
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Joint Loads
Load
Load
Intensity
Direction
Category
reference
Type
(kN ) & (m )
JntDead
JL
6.000
Vertical
Dead (Dead)
JntImp
JL
4.000
Vertical
Imposed (Imposed)
JntDead
JL
6.000
Vertical
Dead (Dead)
JntImp
JL
4.000
Vertical
Imposed (Imposed)
(type)
Loads on Joint 8
Loads on Joint 9
Area Loads on Panels

Load reference
Category
Distribution scheme
Direction
Intensity
(kN/m2)
Loads on P1 (Area 100.00 m2)

PanelLoad4
Dead
Twoway
Normal
5.0
PanelLoad10
Imposed
Twoway
Normal
3.0

PanelLoad5
Dead
Twoway
Normal
5.0
PanelLoad11
Imposed
Twoway
Normal
3.0

PanelLoad9
Dead
Twoway
Normal
5.0
PanelLoad15
Imposed
Twoway
Normal
3.0
Other
Twoway
Horizontal
1.0
Other
Twoway
Transverse
2.0

PanelLoad28
PanelLoad63
Area Loads on Overhangs

Load reference
Category
Direction
Intensity
(kN/m2)
Loads on Overhang4
PanelLoad31
Imposed
Vertical
1.5
Other
Horizontal
1.0
Imposed
Vertical
1.5
Loads on Overhang5
PanelLoad32
Loads on Overhang6
PanelLoad33
33
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Other Panel Loads

Load
reference
Category
Distribution
Load
scheme
type
Direction
Load
Start
End
position
intensity
intensity
kN & m
kN & m

PanelLoad47
Imposed
Twoway
Point
Normal
(4.0 , 8.0)
4.5
PanelLoad34
Dead
Twoway
Line
Normal
(2.0 , 5.0), (0.0 ,

1.0)
10.0
-5.0

PanelLoad49
Imposed
Oneway
RibbedEdge 2
Point
Normal
(4.0 , 8.0)
4.5
PanelLoad36
Dead
Oneway
RibbedEdge 2
Line
Normal
(2.0 , 5.0), (0.0 ,

1.0)
10.0
-5.0
PanelLoad59
Dead
Oneway
RibbedEdge 2
Patch
Normal
(2.0 , 3.0), (3.0 ,

8.0), (10.0 , 0.0)
10.0

PanelLoad50
Imposed
Oneway
SolidEdge 1 & 3
Point
Normal
(4.0 , 8.0)
4.5
PanelLoad1
Dead
Oneway
SolidEdge 1 & 3
Line
Normal
(5.0 , 5.0), (0.0 ,

0.0)
10.0
10.0
Combinations lists the load combinations defined.

Load Combinations
Load Category
No
Name
Type
Combination
Partial Safety Factors
Data/No
Ref.
Comb1
Limit State
ULS
Elastic Analysis
Linear
Plastic Analysis
No
Dead
Dead
1.40
Imposed
Imposed
1.60
Wind
Other
0.00
The above data is available once it is defined. The following items are only available
once analysis calculations have been carried out.
Automatic self weights lists the weights of members if the Auto Self weight option has
been set in the Load Editor. Any member which does not have the value overridden by a
specified Self Weight load type will appear. The data cannot be printed until the analysis
calculations are done as the member weights are calculated during this process.
34
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Self Weights
Mem
Self weight
Mem
Self weight
Mem
Self weight
Ref
( kN )
Ref
( kN )
ref
( kN )
0.079
0.079
0.079
0.079
0.079
0.079
0.103
0.103
0.103
10
0.103
11
0.103
12
0.103
13
0.052
14
0.034
15
0.034
16
0.034
17
0.034
18
0.034
19
0.052
20
0.055
21
0.055
22
0.055
23
0.055
24
0.055
25
0.055
Total self weight for selected members : 1.699 kN
Joint displacements shows the translational and rotational displacements of the joints
by combination.
Joint Displacements For Combination Comb1
Analysis Type : Linear elastic
Effects Load factor : 1.0
Joint
Displacements (mm)
Rotations ()
reference
Dx
Dy
Dz
Rx
Ry
Rz
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.000
-0.337
-0.63
-8.19
0.00
0.000
0.000
-0.279
-0.53
-14.21
0.00
0.000
0.000
-0.173
0.00
-16.68
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.53
-14.21
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.173
Support reactions shows the reactions and resisting moments at the supported joints by
combination.
Support Reactions For Combination Comb1
Joint
Support reactions (kN)
reference
Px
Py
Pz
Support moments (kNm)

Mx
My
Mz
59.374
72.789
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-59.374
72.789
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Member effects shows the axial, shear and moment effects at intervals along the
members by combination. The number of intervals may be changed in the configuration.
35
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Member Effects For Combination Comb1

Interval
Interval
Axial
Shear force (kN)
Moment effects(kNm)
no
pos. (m)
force (kN)
Normal
Lateral
Torsion
Normal
Lateral
0.000
59.374
0.073
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.375
59.374
0.045
0.000
0.000
0.022
0.000
0.750
59.374
0.017
0.000
0.000
0.034
0.000
1.125
59.374
-0.011
0.000
0.000
0.035
0.000
1.500
59.374
-0.038
0.000
0.000
0.026
0.000
0.000
-9.387
0.068
0.000
0.000
0.026
0.000
0.375
-9.387
0.041
0.000
0.000
0.046
0.000
0.750
-9.387
0.013
0.000
0.000
0.056
0.000
1.125
-9.387
-0.015
0.000
0.000
0.056
0.000
1.500
-9.387
-0.043
0.000
0.000
0.045
0.000
Member 1
Member 2
Member deflections shows the displacements and slopes at intervals along the
members by combination. The number of intervals may be changed in the configuration.
Member Deflections For Combination Comb1
Interval
Interval
Displacements (mm)
Slopes ()
no
pos. (m)
Axial
Normal
Lateral
Torsion
Normal
Lateral
0.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
-0.337
0.000
0.375
-0.16
-2.19
0.00
0.000
-0.331
0.000
0.750
-0.32
-4.31
0.00
0.000
-0.315
0.000
1.125
-0.47
-6.31
0.00
0.000
-0.296
0.000
1.500
-0.63
-8.19
0.00
0.000
-0.279
0.000
0.000
-0.63
-8.19
0.00
0.000
-0.279
0.000
0.375
-0.61
-9.96
0.00
0.000
-0.260
0.000
0.750
-0.58
-11.57
0.00
0.000
-0.232
0.000
1.125
-0.56
-12.98
0.00
0.000
-0.201
0.000
1.500
-0.53
-14.21
0.00
0.000
-0.173
0.000
Member 1
Member 2
Shear envelopes produces a shear and axial effects envelope table at the configured
number of intervals on specified members.
36
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Member Axial And Shear Effect Envelopes

Interval
Interval
Maximum
Maximum shear (kN)
Minimum
Minimum shear (kN)
no
pos. (m)
Axial (kN)
Normal
Lateral
Axial (kN)
Normal
Lateral
0.000
59.374
0.073
0.000
59.374
0.073
0.000
0.375
59.374
0.045
0.000
59.374
0.045
0.000
0.750
59.374
0.017
0.000
59.374
0.017
0.000
1.125
59.374
-0.011
0.000
59.374
-0.011
0.000
1.500
59.374
-0.038
0.000
59.374
-0.038
0.000
Member 1
Moment envelopes produces a moment effects envelope table at the configured

number of intervals on specified members.
Member Moment Effect Envelopes
Interval
Interval
Maximum (kNm)
Minimum (kNm)
no
pos. (m)
Torsion
Normal
Lateral
Torsion
Normal
Lateral
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.375
0.000
0.022
0.000
0.000
0.022
0.000
0.750
0.000
0.034
0.000
0.000
0.034
0.000
1.125
0.000
0.035
0.000
0.000
0.035
0.000
1.500
0.000
0.026
0.000
0.000
0.026
0.000
Member 1
Max axial shr & def produces a summary of maximum axial, shear and deflection
effects on specified members.
Maximum Axial, Shear And Deflection Effects For Combination Comb1
Member
Axial Effects
Shear Effects
Deflection Effects
Ref
Compr'n
Normal
Axial
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
(mm)
59.374
0.000
0.073
0.000
-0.63
0.000
-9.387
0.068
0.000
-0.63
0.000
-49.986
0.085
0.000
0.000
-49.986
-0.085
0.000
0.000
-9.387
-0.068
0.000
Tension
Lateral
Pos
Normal
Pos
Lateral
Pos
(m)
(mm)
(m)
(mm)
(m)
1.500
-8.19
1.500
0.00
0.000
0.000
-14.21
1.500
0.00
0.000
-0.53
0.000
-16.68
1.500
0.00
0.000
0.53
1.500
-16.68
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.63
1.500
-14.21
0.000
0.00
0.000
Max moment effects produces a summary of maximum moment effects on specified

members.
37
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Max Moment Effects For Combination Comb1

Membe Torsion
r
Ref
Anticlk
Normal
(kNm)
Positio
n
(m)
0.000
0.000
3
4
5
Clkwise
(kNm)
Positio
n
(m)
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Max+ve
Lateral
(kNm)
Positio
n
(m)
0.000
0.036
0.000
0.057
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Max-ve
(kNm)
Positio
n
(m)
0.982
0.000
0.923
0.026
0.093
1.139
0.093
0.361
0.057
0.577
Max+ve
(kNm)
Positio
n
(m)
Max-ve
(kNm)
Positio
n
(m)
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.045
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.045
1.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.026
1.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Max member stresses produces a list of maximum axial and bending stresses in each
member. The values are simply based on the maximum forces divided by the area or
elastic modulus as appropriate. They are only an approximate guide and not intended as
a substitute for a proper design. They are not reported for non-prismatic or haunched
member types.
Max Member Stresses For Combination Comb1
Member
Load
Axial Stresses (N/mm)
Bending Stresses (N/mm)
Combination
Normal
Compression
Tension
Lateral
Positive
Negative
Positive
Negative
Comb1
86.3
0.0
4.6
-0.0
0.0
0.0
Comb1
0.0
13.6
7.4
-3.3
0.0
0.0
Comb1
0.0
72.7
12.0
-5.8
0.0
0.0
Comb1
0.0
72.7
12.0
-5.8
0.0
0.0
Comb1
0.0
13.6
7.4
-3.3
0.0
0.0
Summation check This produces a check on the total applied forces and moments
against the total support moments and reactions to ensure a summation to 0.0. It acts a
further QA check on the validity of the results. Of course it cannot guarantee that the
model itself is appropriate to the structure. This is for the engineer and any independent
checker to determine.
Summation Check For Combination Comb1
Load Summation (kN)
Moment Summation (kNm)
Loads
Px
Py
Pz
Mx
My
Mz
Member loads
0.0
-42.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-188.9
Joint loads
0.0
-103.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
-466.2
Total loads
0.0
-145.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
-655.1
Reactions
0.0
145.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
655.1
Summations
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
The following results are available in A3D MAX only when a plastic analysis has been
carried out.
Plastic analysis res. Opt1 This gives the plastic hinge formation history for each plastic
load combination.
38
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Plastic Analysis Results for Combination Comb2

Hinge
Load
Member
Hinge
Local buckling
no
factor
ref
position
classification
Not Avail
0.770
End 1
Unhinge
0.791
End 1
0.923
End 2
Not Avail
Notes: Frame collapses with 2 hinges formed at load factor of 0.923
Plastic analysis res. Opt2 This gives the plastic analysis results in terms of each hinge and
is an alternative way of presenting the above data.
Plastic Analysis Results
Ultimate load
Comb2
No.of hinges at Lf = 1.0
Hinge 1 - load factor
0.770
- member
- position (m)
End 1
- local buckling class.
Not Avail
- unloaded factor
0.791
0.791
- member
- position (m)
7.485
Not Avail
- unloaded factor
Not Applicable
0.923
- member
- position (m)
End 2
Not Avail
- unloaded factor
Not Applicable
The following results options are available if the CADS SW Member Designer is installed.
SWMD Result Summary This allows the summary of results obtained from CADS Steelwork
Member Designer for jobs designed under Analyse3D verion2 and early A3D MAX version
of the Grouping method.
Steel Group Results Summary
Design
Group
Reference
Template
Reference
Analysis
Section
Design
Section
Top
leftcolspan1
305x165 UB40
305x165 UB46
Btm
default
305x165 UB40
Utilisation Factors
Torsion
Buckling
Deflection
Design
Status
Local
Capacity
Lateral
Buckling
0.521
0.981
0.521
n/a
Passed
0.520
0.675
0.325
n/a
Passed
Design Results Summary This shows a summary of all the Design objects giving their type,
status and any other messages that may be relevant. If you want more detailed
39
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
information choose the table for the particular type of Design Object required. In this
version only SW members are supported.
Design Results Summary
Group
reference
Top
Btm
Comments
Design object
Referenc
Type
Design
Code
status
SW Design
BS5950:2000
Failed
SW Design
BS5950:2000
Passed
SW Design
BS5950:2000
Passed
SW Design
BS5950:2000
Passed
Steelwork Results This shows the Design Results for SW Member types of Design Objects.
It includes the status and utilisation factors for the Design object.
Steelwork Design Results
Design
Member
Template
Analysis
Design
Utilisation Factors
Object
Reference
Reference
Section
Section
Local
Lateral
Torsion
capacity
buckling
buckling
Reference
Deflection
Status
Group Reference - Top

1
7-12
Ex3-1
80x40x4.0 RHS
0.503
7.510
7.575
n/a
Failed
Ex3-2
50x30x5.0 RHS
0.314
> 10
> 10
n/a
Failed
Group Reference Btm

2
1-6
Group Reference end

3
13
defaults
50x30x4.0 RHS
0.466
0.888
n/a
n/a
Passed
19
defaults
50x30x4.0 RHS
0.466
0.888
n/a
n/a
Passed
Group Reference - Lacer

5
14
defaults
50x30x2.5 RHS
0.536
0.948
n/a
n/a
Passed
15
defaults
50x30x2.5 RHS
0.316
0.558
n/a
n/a
Passed
16
defaults
50x30x2.5 RHS
0.210
0.371
n/a
n/a
Passed
40
A3D MAX
Function Guide
1.13.4
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Print order panel
This is where you list the items of data you wish to output.
Highlight the required items in the Data panel and use the ADD button to place the items
in the Print order list.
Figure 1.21
You can use the up and down arrow buttons to change the order of the highlighted
item.
If you no longer wish to output an item, select it in the Print Order list and pick the remove
button.
You can now select more than one item or a block of items in the Print Order list and they
can be moved as one group using the arrow buttons alongside.
Add All adds the entire list of items in the data panel to the print order. Remove All
removes all items from the print order.
1.13.5
Selection to print panel
You can choose Print all, which will output the data items in the Print Order list for all the
objects in the model, or Use diagram selection to only output the data for those objects
selected in the main view.
1.13.6
Combination results to print panel
This list allows you to choose which combinations to include in the output. Highlight the
combinations required by toggling them on or off.
1.13.7
Edit Header
This option allows you to set up the page header that is divided into three panels. The left
panel is reserved for your company logo, the middle panel for the Header Text data and
the right panel for references, page information and authorship details. It also allows you
to choose paper size and the start page no.
41
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 1.22
Header Text The Header Block Layout dialog contains the Project description input
field into which you may place any text you require for the Project description panel.
Using the default font, this is up to 8 rows of 34 characters in width.
References The fields on the right correspond to the fixed printed items. Again with the
default font, they allow up to 20 characters. More can be entered but this may overflow
the box when printing.
Figure 1.23
Logo filename Your company logo can be any .bmp (Windows bit map) file and the
program scales to fit a rectangle 55 x 30 mm. To maintain the correct measure, your logo
should be drawn to the same proportions.
To specify the file to be used, type the path and filename in the Filename panel or click
on the Browse button and locate the file you require. The location of the file is saved with
the job so that different logos can be used with each job, if desired.
If the logo fails to appear on the printout or print preview, then it is probably because the
logo file has been moved or erased.
42
A3D MAX
Function Guide
1.13.8
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Save RTF
Rich Text File format outputs in the same format as the current print settings. This option is
not available if the Print Engine is disabled.
1.13.9
Output Methods
The program offers several methods of outputting the data. The normal Windows Preview
and Print methods plus some text output methods described in the next section. Since the
program has to calculate the job before printing it, there is sometimes a slight delay
before the output is started.
1.13.9.1
Preview
This is the normal Windows Print Preview display which replaces the main view. Not only
does this show how the printout will look it is also a useful way of producing selected
results as an alternative to the Tabular Results dialog provided for reviewing the job.
1.13.9.2
Print
Print initiates the normal Windows printer output to the current printer attached to your
system.
1.13.10
Text Output
In addition to printed output the program can create a text file or a special file for
reading by the CAD Word Macro utility.
1.13.10.1
Word Macro
The CADS Word Macro is specially written for the Microsoft Word word processor and
imports the data from CADS Applications in a similar format to the printed output. The
utility is provided on the Windows Support application that accompanies every CADS
Design application. You will need Word Version 6 or later.
If this option is chosen then picking the SAVE Text button will create an .aft file which is a
text file including format and diagram information to enable the Macro to create the
document.
1.13.10.2
CADS Font Settings
By default the Word Macro creates the document using Arial font. However, picking this
setting forces the use of the currently specified output font. As this is also Arial by default
you will not notice any difference unless the output font is changed. See Pick Font above
for details.
1.13.10.3
Export the Macro file
Having specified the output you require pick the Save Text button to create the output
.aft file. A standard Windows file browser will open where you can place the file. By
default it is the same folder as the current job data.
43
A3D MAX
Function Guide
1.13.10.4
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Importing into Word
To create the output document in Word you should carry out the following operation
from within Word:
1. Start a New document pick New from the File menu which opens the New
dialog and choose the General tab. One of the templates shown should be called
CadsWordMacro.dot. Choose that and ensure the Create New option is set to
Document. Pick OK. This opens a new instance of Word with the Macro loaded.
Alternatively you can open the new document using the CADS Word Macro
template shortcut set up when the Macro was installed.
2. Pick CADS Tool button this opens a standard windows file browser where you can
choose the CADS Macro .aft file to import. By default the browser will open on the
directory where the last .aft file was saved. A new document is created and the file
imported. The program then formats the data and informs you when it is complete.
The new document may be edited and added to any normal Word document.
Note that any subsequent change in the job is NOT reflected in this document. You will
need to create a new document in that event.
1.13.10.5
Comma and Tab Separated text
The data can be saved as a comma separated (.csv) or plain text (.txt) file. The former is
useful for reading by database or spreadsheet applications and the latter is useful for
reading into any word processor or text editor. No diagrams are included with the file.
Choose the required option and pick Save Text to open a standard Windows file
browser for you to place the file. By default it is the same folder as the current job data.
1.14 Print Preview

This shows the normal Windows Print Preview display, which replaces the main view. It
opens the Print Layout dialog for you to set up the output as described under the section
Print above. Not only does this show how the printout will look but it is also a useful
way of producing selected results as an alternative to the Tabular Results dialog provided
for reviewing the job.
If you have a large job with many load combinations and request full data then this can
take some time to prepare before displaying.
1.15 Print Setup

This opens the Windows Print Manager Print Setup dialog. This enables you to specify the
settings appropriate to your printer. The dialog options will depend on the printer and
drivers you have installed. See your printer manual for details.
1.16 Modify Protection

This dialog allows you to modify the protection on your system. The options available vary
according to the nature of your installation.
44
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
1.17 Send To
This option enables you to send the job directly to an e-mail recipient. If you have an email application available on your machine then this will start a new e-mail with the
current job attached ready for you to send. See your e-mail software manual for details
of using that application.
1.18 Recent Files

The penultimate part of the menu lists the most recent files opened by A3D MAX.
Normally this shows four names but the number may vary according to your system
settings. This is a useful facility for finding frequently opened jobs.
1.19 Exit
This closes the application. If a job has been changed since you last saved you will be
asked if you wish to save it. In common with normal Windows practice the small cross at
the top right of the main title bar also closes the application.
45
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
2.0 Edit Menu
Figure 2.1
This menu allows access to the usual Windows editing functions. It also enables you to
edit the properties of the objects in the model, which is a powerful feature of the
program.
2.1
Undo
This allows previous steps to be undone. The menu item reports the last step
carried out and picking that or the toolbar button will undo that step. Picking the little
arrow next to the toolbar button opens a list of steps and you can undo several in one
go.
Use Undo with caution as many actions apply several steps at once. Generally it is easier
to control if you undo one step at a time particularly if you are uncertain as to the exact
point you wish to return to.
2.2
Cut
This removes selected objects from the model and places them in the clipboard.
Note that loads applied to members or joints, which are cut but not selected themselves
will be cut also and placed in the clipboard. These objects are not available to other
applications.
2.3
Copy
This copies selected objects from the model and places them in the clipboard. Note
that loads cannot be copied on their own. They need to be copied with the members or
joints to which they are applied. Panels which need to be copied should be selected
along with supporting members, at least on two opposite edges. Panel loads will be
copied if selected in the view. The objects copied are not available to other
applications.
2.4
Paste
46
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
This allows objects in the clipboard to be placed in the model. The objects are
shown in the main view ghosted and can be dragged into position. The objects can be
attached to an existing joint in the model or if dropped on the main view background
can be placed at specified co-ordinates.
2.4.1
Dragging the objects
Figure 2.2
When the clipboard objects are to be pasted they appear in ghosted form in the main
view with the pointer (in crosshair form) over one of the joints. This is called the Anchor
Joint and is the joint by which the objects are attached to the model or placed at
specified co-ordinates. Note that if a member is placed on the clipboard without end
joints they will be added automatically when it is pasted.
While the objects are being dragged you can rotate the objects and change the Anchor
Joint using the Pop up menu (right mouse click).
2.4.1.1
Pick Anchor joint
This option allows you to change the anchor joint, which is chosen by the program, to
any other as required for attaching or placing the objects. The objects to be pasted are
temporarily suspended while you pick the required joint.
Figure 2.3
47
A3D MAX
Function Guide
2.4.1.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Rotating the objects
There are a number of options that allow you to rotate the objects so they may be
placed as required.
Rotate opens a Transform dialog in which you may specify the degree of rotation in
three axes about the anchor joint. The axes are parallel to the global axis system. While
you may enter a rotation about more than one axis it is easier to predict the behaviour if
rotations about more than one axis are done one at a time.
Figure 2.4
Set rotate Snaps this opens the dialog in which a preset degree of rotation can be
specified. By default it is 90. This is particularly useful when copying radial members in a
circular structure.
Figure 2.5
Rotate X, Y, Z these three options apply the preset rotation about the particular axis
chosen.
2.4.1.3
Cancel Pasting
This option cancels the current pasting operation but leaves the objects on the
clipboard.
2.4.2
Placing in position
If the pasted objects being dragged are dropped over the main view background, then
the Transformation dialog is opened so that the location of the anchor joint may be
specified.
48
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 2.6
2.4.2.1
Relative
This option offsets the anchor joint relative to its original position by the amount specified
for each direction parallel to the global axes. This option is currently disabled.
2.4.2.2
Absolute
Absolute places the anchor joint at the specified global co-ordinates.

Picking the Tick places the objects whereas picking the Cross resumes the dragging.
2.4.3
Attaching to model
If the anchor joint of the pasted objects being dragged is dropped over an existing joint
then the objects are attached to the existing model at that point.
2.4.4
Incorporating the objects
Once the pasted objects have been placed the program incorporates their data into
the model. For instance joints that are coincident within 1 mm are merged retaining the
original joint and support data. Members that lie exactly over existing members and are
of identical length replace the originals, as do any loads that they carry.
You are advised to be careful when copying that a series of members does not overlay
existing members accidentally. Although members of identical length cannot overlay, it is
possible to lay one member over two which sum to an equal length. This condition is not
easy to see. However the program does detect this as part of its pre-calculation checks
and reports the error.
2.4.5
Copying across jobs
The clipboard can also be used to copy geometric data (i.e. joints and member data)
between different jobs. If you copy members etc. from one job into the clipboard they
can be pasted into another job running in a different instance of A3D MAX. This is very
useful for handling standard components such as trusses and other repeating elements.
49
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Note this does not transfer loads and the object references may change to avoid conflict
with existing objects.
2.5
Delete
This option deletes selected objects from the model. Generally deletion removes the
instances of an object not the types. Hence deleting members does not delete the
member type, and deleting loads does not delete the load type. If you wish to delete
those you can delete them explicitly from there Editors. Normally all instances of their use
have to be removed first. Not noted in the menu but the Delete key is the hot key for
this operation.
2.6
Copy Bitmap
This copies the current view as a Windows bit map .bmp image to the clipboard. This
image is then available to paste into other applications that can read .bmp file such as
word processors. This is particularly useful for adding additional diagrams to reports
prepared using the CADS word Macro (see the File Menu text output above).
2.7
Properties
This option opens the properties dialogs for any selected objects. Properties can
also be accessed by picking objects when in Info mode using the toolbar button.
Object properties can be accessed from the pop up menu when the right mouse button
is clicked over an object.
If more than one object type is selected the dialog will show the data in common or
varies or multiple where the data is different across the objects. This is a very powerful
feature as the setting can be changed so that all the selected objects can have the
same attributes applied.
2.7.1
Member Properties
Every member has a number of attributes that determine its behaviour. The term
attributes is used because they extend beyond the normal physical properties of the
member. Some affect how it is placed in the model, some its stiffness and some its
behaviour under plastic analysis.
Although a limited number of the most frequently changed attributes can be set in the
Member Editor, the Member Attributes dialog offers control over all of them.
The Member Attributes dialog shows an illustration of the member and its reference and
member type. You can change the reference in the top left field and assign another
member type from the list below it. In addition, there are four 'property pages' containing
the additional attributes:
2.7.1.1
Properties
The Properties page (as illustrated above) shows the basic properties of the member,
such as its length, slope and location. You can change the member handing, orientation
50
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
and end fixity details here but other pages allow greater control, details of which are
given below.
Figure 2.7
To the right of the properties data is an explorer window that shows the selected
members. Expanding this tree allows you to get information about the various objects
associated with those members.
2.7.1.2
General
This page shows placing information, i.e. orientation and handing together with
summaries of end fixity and plastic limits, details of which are given below. You can also
control the directional behaviour of the member.
Orientation this controls the rotation of the member about its longitudinal axis. 0 is the
default, where the member cross section is 'vertical' about the major axis. 90 is the minor
axis orientation with the rotation being anticlockwise viewed from end 1 (start) of the
member. Any other angle can be entered from -180 to +180.
Handing this controls the orientation in which asymmetrical sections are placed. The
default is Right handing and this corresponds to the way members' cross sections are
shown in the structural section tables or their elements definition. This is mainly to assist
design and detailing applications, as the handing is not relevant to the analysis in this
program version.
The buttons below these fields offer some useful preset orientation and handing
combinations, which vary according to the member type symmetry.
51
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 2.8
Directional Behaviour members can be constrained to only act in one direction using
this attribute. There are three options:
Normal (reversible) - is the normal behaviour whereby a member can sustain
both compression and tension.
Compression only - set this option if the member can only sustain compression.
Tension only - set this option if the member can only sustain tension.
The compression or tension only settings can be temporarily suspended by clearing the
Tension/compression tick box in the Analysis Options dialog. This is useful in examining
the structure, if it is unstable, without having to change the individual member settings
before an analysis.
2.7.1.3
Partial fixity
When members are added to the model they are assumed to be connected to the joints
at their ends.
There are four options that control the degree of rotational fixity of the member end to
the joint. These are:
Fixed in which the member is considered to be rigidly fixed to the joint. This means that
any moment at the member ends can be transmitted to any other similarly fixed member
or support.
Pinned in this case the end connection is assumed to be free to rotate in the member
major and minor axes but not twist about the longitudinal axis. This implies torsional rigidity
in the connection.
Ball in this case the member is free to rotate in both major and minor axes and about
the longitudinal. Be careful when using this option as it is easy to produce an unstable
model. Take particular care to only have a ball fixity at one end of a member because if
52
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
both ends are specified as ball then the member is theoretically able to spin. The
program detects this condition and issues a warning as part of the Analysis calculation
pre-check.
Figure 2.9
Partial fixity enables you to specify any degree of fixity about the major or minor axes for
the ends of the member. This option has particular relevance to steelwork design for
which BS5950 and other codes and design authorities now provide guidance for frames
with connections offering partial fixity as well as fully rigid and `simple types. Partial fixity
can be expressed in one of three ways chosen by setting the appropriate radio button:
Proportion of full fixity - is a factor in the range from 0.01 to 0.99. A factor of 1.0
would represent a fully rigid connection. This is usually the most convenient and
intuitive option for beams.
Proportion of member stiffness - is a factor in the range from 0.01 to 100. The
spring stiffness is derived from the member stiffness when the analysis is carried
out. The actual stiffness value used will therefore change if the member or its
length is changed. The member proportional stiffness of a fully rigid connection
would be infinite.
This option is useful for modeling partially fixed bases, which in BS 5950 clause
5.1.2.4 are related to the stiffness of the supported column. In this application
you would specify the support as fully fixed but apply partial fixity to the column
member.
Absolute stiffness - is a stiffness value from 10 to 1e20 kNm/radian. This allows a
fixed value, which will not vary even if the member or its length is changed.
The values at the lower end of the range are effectively 'free' rotations and the upper
end effectively 'fixed'. If you change the option settings, the program will attempt to offer
a default based on a conversion of the existing value but in the case of multiple
selections, this is not possible for the proportion of member stiffness option.
53
A3D MAX
Function Guide
2.7.1.4
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Plastic Limits
With A3D MAX you can carry out a plastic analysis and this page enables you to specify
member constraints relevant to that analysis.
Figure 2.10
It would normally only need to be accessed if a plastic analysis is to be undertaken. You
are advised to consult the section 'Plastic Analysis' for more details but the data required
is described below.
Each End panel has settings for member and connection limits.
These limits relate to the member local section axes only and are requested in terms of
hogging, sagging and lateral resistance moments. Hogging moments are entered in
absolute terms, i.e. it is not necessary for the conventional negative sign to be entered.
Lateral resistance moments are assumed to be the same in both directions.
Member plastic limit option for members the plastic limit options are
Unlimited, Auto Mpr, Auto Mp and Specified.
Unlimited This is the default setting for members other than those selected from
the CADS steelwork section library (SW members) and is effectively the same as
applied to all members for normal elastic analysis. Note that SW haunched and
tapered members are forced into this option. If you require plastic analysis of a
steel structure with haunched members you should specify the haunched
lengths as separate tapered SW haunch members and the uniform portions as
normal SW members.
Auto Mpr This carries out the automatic calculation of the reduced plastic
resistance moments allowing for coexistent axial and shear forces for steel I, box
and circular hollow sections from the SW Library in grade 43, 50 or 55 steel. Other
shapes and steel grades may be included in future versions.
Auto Mp This carries out the automatic calculation of the simple plastic
resistance moments without axial/shear reduction for steel I, channel, box and
54
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
circular hollow sections from the SW Library. Other shapes may be included in
future versions. This option is included to allow testing against text book
examples which usually do not include for axial and shear reductions. It is of
limited practical use because any members containing plastic hinges and axial
force will fail the local capacity check in CADS SWMD.
Specified This option allows you to define the limiting resistance moments for a
member. It is normally used where the resistance moments and their
dependency on coexisting axial and shear forces cannot be calculated
automatically from the current library data, e.g. other metal and RC sections.
The local member inputs are enabled under this setting. The initial default value
is 1.0E20 i.e. unlimited. The range is 0.0 to 1.0E20 kNm. Tick the Constant box if
you require one resistance moment to be applied throughout the member. Untick the box if you wish to input different moments for different zones and for
sagging and hogging modes.
Validity checks are not applied to ensure that any standard steel sections or
other types chosen are in fact suitable for plastic analysis. This is the responsibility
of the user. However if steel members containing hinges are calculated under
the AutoMpr option, the collapse analysis results will report the local buckling
classification of the section where each hinge forms as plastic, compact,
semi-compact or slender as defined in BS5950 pt 1. A judgement may then
be made as to whether there is sufficient rotational capacity to develop the full
mechanism.
Connection Limiting Moment - The connection plastic limit is similar to the
member specified limit but is intended to represent the plastic moment capacity
of the connection attached to the member end rather than the member itself.
Tick the Specify box if you wish to apply connection resistance moments in a
plastic analysis. Un-ticking the box has the effect of applying unlimited
connection resistance moments. This is the default condition.
The initial default value is 1.0E20 i.e. unlimited. The range is 0.0 to 1.0E20 kNm. This
option enables you to specify partial strength moment connections.
2.7.2
Joint Properties
The Joint Properties dialog shows both objects associated with the joint and its support
condition.
55
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Figure 2.11
2.7.2.1
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 2.12
General
The data associated with the joint is shown as follows:

Reference alongside the joint symbol is the name of the joint.
Position is the co-ordinate location of the joint.
Support summary shows the support type or free if it is un-supported.
Joint tree the panel near the middle of the dialog shows an explorer view of
the joint and can be expanded to show the objects associated with the joint.
Common applied load types this lists the loads applied to the joint.
2.7.2.2
Support
This shows details of the support condition for a joint.

Reference alongside the joint symbol is the name of the joint
Restraint type shows the support type or free if it is un-supported. The panel also
contains settings for the support restraints as described below. You can also
select the predefined support types or others you have created in the job.
New Support this button allows you to create a new support type. Once
picked it will offer a default name in the restraint type field which you can
amend and you can then set the restraints as required.
Translation defines the restraint against movement in the three global axes.
There are three options Fixed, Free and Spring. Fixed applies a very high
56
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
stiffness to model a rigid restraint. Free applies no restraint in that direction, it is

equivalent to a roller. Spring allows you to specify a resistance in kN/mm.
Rotation defines the restraint against rotation about the three global axes.
There are three options Fixed, Free and Spring. Fixed applies a very high
stiffness to model a rigid restraint. Free applies no restraint in that direction, it is
equivalent to a pin. Spring allows you to specify a resistance in kNm/radian.
Lift off this is to allow the joint to lift off if subject to uplift forces but still retain its
restraint under downward ones. This could be useful in situations where you are
modelling a bearing which does not have significant holding down capacity.
There is an option in the Analysis Options to temporarily disable this setting which
can be of help in assessing instabilities in the structure without having to turn the
Lift off options individually.
Edit Allows you to modify the spring values if specified.
2.7.3
Panel Properties
Panel properties dialog shows the panel view on the top in the panel local coordinate system. It contains four property pages that are described below.
2.7.3.1
General
This page contains the basic properties of the panel.

Panel reference This is a name given to each panel to identify it.
Panel thickness as the name suggests, is the thickness of the panel. A panel has a
constant thickness. This property is used in point, line and patch load disribution.
Alignment a panel may be aligned relative to its top or bottom surfaces, its mid
thickness, or offset by a specified amount. This alignment is relative to a plane through
the defining joints.
If the User defined option is set, then the Offset field is enabled so that it may be
specified. Note that the top and bottom faces are +ve and ve offsets of half the panel
thickness respectively. Further offsets can be defined so as to represent finishes in addition
to this.
Rigidity panels can be ascribed a rigidity which affects how the joints displace relative
to each other. The main use for this is to allow a panel to act as a rigid diaphragm, which
is how many slabs do in practice. There are two states:
Non-rigid in this condition the panels joints are free to move (unless they are
supports themselves) under the influence of the loading so that the panel can
deform in any way. This is the default setting.
Rigid plane in this condition the panel joints cannot displace relative to each
other in the plane of the panel. This means the panel always maintains its original
shape. The panel can however deform normal to its plane. The panel can also be
displaced and rotated bodily in respect of the whole structure.
57
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
There are some limitations in the use of the rigid panels (i.e. panels that are not nonrigid) to avoid conflicts within the mathematical model.
1. A rigid panel cannot have a supported joint.
2. Rigid panels in different planes cannot share a common joint. For instance, you can
have layers of rigid slabs but you cannot intersect them with a rigid wall.
Figure 2.13
Material type panels may be constructed with any material as specified in the materials
library.
Edge fixity The edges of a panel may be regarded as Simply supported, Restrained or
Free.
The proportion of load reactions at the panel edges is dependent on the distribution and
fixity conditions of the edges. By default all edges of a panel are assigned simply
supported. Actual edge fixity depends on continuity of the panel, which is defined by
panels / overhang adjacent to the panel under consideration within its plane. If one or
more edges of a panel are not fully populated with members it becomes a free edge.
In order to automatically update edge fixity on model changes, you need to enable
the Auto Edge Fixity Update configuration item. This will update edge fixity of all panels
when a new panel or overhang is created or deleted. The user can change edge fixity
from simply supported to restrained and vice versa. This property will be used in panel
load distribution using the grid method.
58
A3D MAX
Function Guide
2.7.3.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Load distribution scheme
Load distribution scheme page allows you to specify how loads applied to the panel
are distributed to its supports. The scheme can be set individually for loads acting normal
to the panel and loads acting in the plane of the panel.
Figure 2.14
2.7.3.2.1
Normal
These loads are normal to the local x-z plane of the panel (positive load acts in local y
towards the panel). Normal distribution scheme deals with loads normal to the panel e.g.
most surface loads.
The options are:Two way where the load is assumed to distribute in two perpendicular directions
towards all edges of the panel.
One-way Solid where the load is distributed in a specified direction to opposite edges
of the panel. In this case you can specify the direction. This represents load distribution in
most RC slabs with isotropic properties.
One-way distribution axis If One-way Solid distribution is set then this option is
enabled. In general there are two choices of load distribution to edge1 and 3 or
59
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
edge2 and 4. If one of the edges is free (no members or partially populated edge)
then only the valid option is available.
One-way Ribbed where the load is distributed in a specified direction to opposite
edges of the panel. In this case you can specify the direction of ribs. This represents load
distribution in most one-way systems with minimal transverse stiffness.
Ribs perpendicular to If One-way Ribbed option is set then this option is enabled.
In general there are four options to choose edge1, edge2, edge3, edge4, but if
one of the edges is free then only two options are available. For example if edge 2
is free then edge1 and edge3 are the possible options available to choose.
The ribs can be viewed in the main view in rendered model.
Triangular panels have only One-way Ribbed and Two way options available.
2.7.3.2.2
In-plane
In-plane loads are those that act in the local x-z plane of the panel.
In-plane distribution scheme deals with loads in the plane of the panel e.g. bearing loads
on a wall. The options are:Two way where the load is assumed to distribute in two perpendicular directions
One-way where the load is distributed in a specified direction to opposite edges of the
panel. This option is available only for quadrilateral panels.
One-way distribution axis If One-way distribution is set then this option is enabled.
There are two choices of load distribution to edge1 and 3 or edge2 and 4. If one of
the edges is free then only one option is present.
Bearing Load is transferred in bearing. For example, the program finds the members
that are perpendicular or inclined less than 90 deg., to the loads and transfers to them,
i.e. the load is assumed to distribute in compression to the edge.
Hanging is opposite to bearing, where the load is assumed to distribute in tension to the
edge.
Please note the proportion of load reactions at the panel edges is dependant on the
distribution and fixity conditions of the edges.
2.7.3.3
Loads
Loads page in panel properties allows you to create, edit and delete variety of panel
loads. The spreadsheet lists are the applied loads to selected panels and is non editable.
Panel point, line and patch loads are new loads and explicitly intended for application to
panels. These loads may be placed anywhere on a panel and is applied normal to the
panel. The load is then distributed to the panel supports according to the load distribution
defined.
The old method of defining area loads is no longer valid. Area loads now need to be
applied to panels. It can be applied in both local and global directions.
60
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The directions are normal, in the plane of the panel (local X and Z directions), vertical,
horizontal and transverse.
Area loads in old jobs will be converted to panel area loads.
Figure 2.15
To create a panel load pick the load type from the palette, which has four icons of point
load, line load, patch load and area load. Picking load type opens an individual dialog
where the required data is entered. Clicking on Create in the individual dialog creates
the load on the selected panels after load position validation. Please note the dialog
allows to create multiple loads (stays open after load creation until) without having to
open for each load definition.
Loads as created are shown both in the main view and the view above in panel
properties dialog.
Area loads are defined, edited and deleted from Load editor dialog. It can also be
applied and deleted from Loads page of panel properties dialog.
Area Load is a constant load applied to the whole surface of the panel. Load direction,
category and intensity are specified.
An area load can also be applied to an overhang, which is then transferred to the
supporting member.
61
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Point Load - is a concentrated load applied at a particular position in the panel. A

positive panel point load acts in the normal direction away from it. The category,
intensity, and location in the plane of the panel are specified.
Line Load - is a linear load applied along the panel in normal direction. In this case the
category, start and end intensities and locations are specified.
Patch is a uniform load applied to a specified triangular or quadrilateral area normal to
the panel. Any other shape needs to be defined with multiple patch loads. In this case
the load category, intensity and each corner location of the load are specified.
Patch defined should be such that the internal angles of the quadrilateral are not more
than 180 degrees. If it is so then the last point will be omitted and the patch would be
considered as a triangular one.
Point, Line and Patch Loads need the load position to be specified. The location can be
entered either through the edit fields or by picking graphically. The location is with
respect to the local panel axis. Please see topic on Panel local co-ordinate system for
axis definition.
2.7.3.3.1
Graphical entry of load co-ordinates
Panel Graphics Tool aids input of panel load co-ordinates. This is placed in the top view
of panel properties dialog. Choosing the option
from individual load
creation dialog (point, line, patch) transfers the control to the tool. The status bar just
below the diagram in the tool prompts the user with appropriate messages. During a
graphical session load co-ordinates can be entered through the box below the panel
view adjacent to the snap button. Double clicking on the graphic tools view ends the
current session.
To enable picking, click on "Pick graphically" option button. Once it is clicked the edit
fields for load position will be emptied. They will be subsequently filled with the points
picked.
Point load The status bar below the tool prompts Pick point 1 of 1 for point load.
Once the point is clicked it is marked in red with a + sign. Click on Create to create the
load. Point load created is represented with a dot .
Line load The status bar prompts Pick point 1 of 2 for line load. Once picked you will
notice a dashed rubber-band line in red from the picked point to the current cursor
position. The message then says Pick point 2 for line load. Picking the second point
positions the dashed line. The co-ordinates can be adjusted to the required decimal
place if desired. Clicking Create creates the line load.
Patch load The status bar prompts Pick point 1 of 4 for patch load. Spreadsheet gets
filled on picking the points. If you want to create a 3-sided patch after picking the third
point double click on the tools view. You will notice a four-sided figure in the view but the
spreadsheet shows only 3 points, which confirms triangular patch.
Double clicking any time in between will cancel the picking operation.
62
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Loads are shown in the colour of load category. Load created is also shown in the main
view if the appropriate load toggle is ON.
2.7.3.3.2
Editing panel loads
All panel loads created except for area loads can be edited from the loads page of the
panel properties dialog.
To edit a load created select the load from the spreadsheet and click on the Edit
button. This opens the appropriate loads page. Load co-ordinates, intensity and
category can be edited.
2.7.3.4
Overhangs
This page lists all the overhangs applied to selected panels. It also lists the loads applied
to the overhang. Overhang type and width can be edited for trapezoidal and circular
overhang. For rectangular overhang only the width field is editable.
Figure 2.16
2.7.4
Overhang Properties
The overhang properties can be edited through the Overhang Editor dialog.
63
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 2.17
For rectangular overhang only the width field is editable. For circular and trapezoidal
overhang both overhang type and width can be changed. Changes are validated and
set on pressing OK.
2.7.5
Load Properties
Figure 2.18
The Load properties dialog shows the load and its related objects with an option to show
the load type definition.
2.7.5.1
General
This shows the load reference and below that an explorer panel which can be expanded
to show the object related to the load. By setting the tick box below the panel the load
type properties are displayed.
2.7.5.2
Load type properties
This shows details of the load as specified in the Load Editor. More details of properties
are described under the Load Editor.
Load reference this is the name given to the load.
64
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 2.19
Type is the generic type of load i.e. Joint, Uniform, Trapezoidal etc.
Direction is the specified direction of the load. The range of possibilities depend on the
type of load.
Category is a description of its nature as a dead, imposed, or wind load etc. and is
used to assist in the analysis and design of the model.
Start and End size are the intensities of the load at its start and in cases where it can
vary its end.
End 1 Position and Loaded Length are the position of the start of the load and its length
where applicable.
65
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
3.0 View Menu
Figure 3.1
This menu allows you to view the model in various ways and to set up the toolbars as you
wish.
3.1
Toolbars
This opens the standard Windows Customize dialog where you can choose which
toolbars to display and edit their content. You can also create your own. Set the tick
boxes to turn the tool bars on or off. From the Commands page you can drag buttons
onto the tool bar.
The toolbars provide a quick means of accessing the most common functions. They are
arranged in a logical order.
66
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 3.2
The top row contains the Standard, Geometry, Loads and Results toolbars. By working left
to right along them you follow a natural order for creating and analysis a frame. These
are described in other sections of this guide.
Figure 3.3
The second row contains the View, Preset views and Display toolbars. These are
described in this section.
Figure 3.4
Below the main view are the Tree, Selection, and Tools toolbars for manipulating the
model. They are described elsewhere in this guide.
3.2
Status bar
Figure 3.5
The Status bar is located below the main view. It is used mainly to report the status of the
selection lock, used when transforming the model, and offsets when moving objects or
stretching the model. The co-ordinate fields expand to show the appropriate values.
67
A3D MAX
Function Guide
3.3
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Explorer Window
Figure 3.6
The Explorer Window alongside the main view shows the objects in the model and can
be toggled on and off. By default it lists the members. The objects can be expanded to
show the other objects associated with them. This can be a useful way of interrogating
the model. There are a number of options available from the Explorer by clicking the right
mouse button over different objects.
3.3.1
Explorer control
Figure 3.7
Clicking the right mouse button over the background of the Explorer window can control
the appearance of the object tree. The explorer tree now has some controls to make it
68
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
easier to use. The controls are placed on a new Tree Operation toolbar that is located
below the explorer tree by default.
Allow docking causes the window to be incorporated with the main window rather
than as a separate window.
Hide closes the explorer window. You can re-open it by picking Explorer Window in the
view menu. See above.
Expand all - expands all the objects completely.
Expand one level expands all objects by one level. Picking successively will
produce a complete expansion of all the objects.
Collapse all - closes all the expanded objects down to the basic list.
Collapse one level closes all the expanded objects down to the preceding object
in the list.
3.3.2
Object menu
If you click the right mouse button over an object the pop up menu shows various options
depending on the state of the model.
Figure 3.8
Draw object as allows you to choose stick or render mode of display (see below for
details).
Properties open the properties dialog for the object (see the previous section).
Add to Group allows you to add an object that is not already part of a group, to any
existing group. Objects may be members, joints, loads etc. This opens with a submenu of
Simple, Design and Layout group objects from which the user can select which group to
add on.
Remove from Group allows to take a particular member or object out of the group. The
object still exists but it is no longer associated with the group. A pop up menu similar to
69
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
add to group helps to choose which group to remove it from. Choosing the all option
removes the member/object from all groups.
Figure 3.9
Rename Group allows editing the name of group defined earlier.
Remove Group completely deletes the group along with its objects. This merely causes
removal of group references.
Figure 3.10
Remove Design Object deletes the selected design object. Only the design object is
deleted while the member still exists.
3.4
Zoom
There are a number of zoom functions available.
Figure 3.11
Note that you can also use a wheel mouse whereby rotating the wheel zoom in and out.
For non-wheel mouse users if you press the Z key while dragging the pointer up and
down this also zooms in and out.
70
A3D MAX
Function Guide
3.4.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Zoom window
This zooms to the area defined by a box that you drag out in the main view.
3.4.2
Zoom Extents
This forces the view to zoom to the extents of the model. The Advanced sub menu
has some particular extents controls, which are also available from the sub toolbar
attached to the arrow adjoining the Extents tool button.
Figure 3.12
Extents Selected zooms to the extent of selected objects in the main view.
Extents All Windows zoom extents the view in all open windows. Useful for multiple
views.
Extents Selected All Windows zooms to the selected objects in all open windows.
Extents Exclude Grid not available.
3.4.3
Zoom Manual
This allows you to zoom in and out by dragging the pointer up and down the view.
The option is cancelled immediately you release the mouse button.
3.4.4
Zoom Previous
This restores the previous zoom setting. It can also be used to toggle between the
last two zoom settings.
3.5
Rotate
This control allows you to rotate the view by dragging the pointer. It is cancelled
immediately the button is released. You can also use the R key as a hot key. Note that
vertical members are always constrained to remain vertical even if foreshortened. This
avoids the confusion that can arise if the model can be rotated about all of its axes.
71
A3D MAX
Function Guide
3.6
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Pan
This control allows you to slide the model around the view. It is cancelled
immediately the button is released. For wheel-mouse users keeping the button pressed
while dragging the pointer also operates the pan. In addition you can use the P key as
a hot key. If the model extends beyond the main view you can also use the scroll bars to
pan the view.
3.7
Info Mode
While in this mode if you click on an object in the main view its properties dialog will
open. This gives you detailed information about the object as described under Edit >
Properties in the previous section.
3.8
Render
The model can be displayed in seven ways. The toggle alternates between the Stick
model and whichever Rendered model is currently set. The options can be accessed
from a sub menu or through the sub toolbar attached to the arrow adjoining the render
tool button.
Figure 3.13
3.8.1
Stick model
Figure 3.14
The members are displayed as lines and the labels are also simple characters drawn over
the model. This is the quickest to draw and the recommended mode for most purposes.
72
A3D MAX
Function Guide
3.8.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
High quality full render
Figure 3.15
This shows members in full detail with shading and thickness to flanges etc. The labels
are also presented within a filled background so they maintain clarity. This is set by
picking the High quality full render option.
3.8.3
Low quality full render
Figure 3.16
This shows member shapes but details such as thickness are suppressed and the
shading is limited. The labels are plain characters similar to the stick model. This is useful for
obtaining an adequate view of the model for confirming orientations etc., and also
quicker to draw than the high quality render. This can be useful in large jobs on slower
machines.
73
A3D MAX
Function Guide
3.8.4
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
High quality full wire frame
Figure 3.17
This option shows wire frames with member thickness.
3.8.5
Low quality full wire frame
This option shows wire frames without thickness. This is the quickest render mode.
Figure 3.18
3.8.6
High quality hidden wire frame
This shows wire frames with hidden line removal and member thickness.
74
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 3.19
3.8.7
Low quality hidden wire frame
Figure 3.20
This shows wire frames with hidden line removal without thickness.
3.9
Partial views
Large and complex models can often be confusing to view from whatever the
angle or the size zoomed. Partial view allows you to show just the selected objects
effectively filtering out extraneous information. You can clear the selection and process
the object in a partial view just like a full view. However, if you add objects or operate the
toggles (see below) you may find some stray additional objects being drawn as they
have been added to the internal view list.
This feature can be useful when used in conjunction with multiple views.
3.10 Restore Full view

This restores the current partial view to a full view.
75
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
3.11 View
A number of standard views are set up so that you can view the model in the principal
planes together with an isometric view. The direction of view should be self-explanatory.
In each case the model is viewed to its extents.
Figure 3.21
3.12 Preset Views
Figure 3.22
In addition to the standard views you can set up your own views and save them as part
of the job so that they can be used during subsequent editing sessions. These views retain
their zoom settings and also partial view characteristics if appropriate. This enables you to
easily look at particular parts of the model repeatedly without having to set up the view
each time.
A major new feature has been introduced which allows views to be saved and output to
the printer as a series of diagrams in various formats. Note that these new features are not
available when the Print Engine is disabled.
3.12.1
Preset Views
This shows a list of preset views from which you can choose the one to view. The
preset button opens a dialog, which lists the views already created. It will be blank in the
first instance. This dialog offers three controls.
3.12.1.1
Capture
This button will capture the existing selection including the results settings and view angle
and zoom etc which you then name so that it can be retrieved later.
In addition to the name, which appears above the diagram when printed, you can also
add a caption. This appears centred below the diagram and can be up to 255
characters long. The caption will wrap around to fit the width of the output available.
76
A3D MAX
Function Guide
3.12.1.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Edit
This allows you to change the name of an existing preset view or edit its caption. Click on
one to select it first.
3.12.1.3
Delete
This allows you to delete an existing view. Click on one to select it first.
3.12.2
Capture Preset View
This open the same dialog to capture the existing selection including the results settings
and view angle and zoom etc which you then name so that it can be retrieved later.
These Preset Views are saved with the job so that they can be used on subsequent
editing sessions.
3.13 Toggles
Display toggles control all objects that appear in the model. They can be turned on or
off. This can simplify the display of complex models.
3.13.1
Toggle Objects
The Object toggles control the display of the

physical objects in the model such as joints, members, panels, overhangs loads and
panel loads, and also the results. The graphical results have separate controls for the
particular results. The design objects only change the display if there are design results
available.
Figure 3.23
77
A3D MAX
Function Guide
3.13.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Toggle Labels
The Labels toggles control the display of object labels. The labels
only appear if the objects are displayed. The appearance of the labels depends on the
render settings (see below) and the size setting in the Configuration.
Figure 3.24
3.13.3
Toggle Tool-tips
This toggle controls the display of tool-tips in the main view. The tool-tips give basic
information about the objects they pass over.
Joints & Supports this shows the joint reference, and co-ordinates. If it is a support the
support type is also shown.
Members shows the member reference, member type, and its orientation.
Loads shows the load reference, types and intensity and position values.
Results Graphics This shows the joint displacements when the deflection graph is shown.
Otherwise, it shows the key values for the other effects if poised near the curve or the
ordinate value if over an ordinate.
3.14 Refresh All Windows

When various changes are made to the model the main view is updated as well as the
explorer view. In order to speed up the normal usage a full refresh is not always called
after every update. This can sometimes mean that the explorer window selection may
not always be in step with the main view. Picking this option ensures that it is.
78
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
3.15 Sort by
Figure 3.25
The objects in the main list in the Explorer tree can be changed using the sort facility.
Click the right mouse button over the background of Explorer window or title of the job
and open the sub menu of the Sort By item on the pop up menu. No objects may
appear if the model does not contain any of the chosen type. The same can also be
accessed from View > Sort by.
79
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
4.0 Selection Menu
Figure 4.1
The Selection menu allows you to carry out editing operations on selected objects in the
model. These operations modify the model in various ways such as moving, stretching,
scaling and rotating parts of it. They are known generally as Transformations.
4.1
Normal
This is the default setting for selections. In this mode a selection merely creates a list
(or selection) of objects to which to apply some process. The program uses normal
windows selection methods by default.
4.1.1
Picking
Picking an object will highlight it as selected (the colour can be set in the configuration)
and deselect any others. To make multiple selections press CTRL while picking further
objects. Picking a selected object will deselect it.
4.1.2
Selection box
You can also select objects using selection boxes. If you pick on the background and
drag the mouse you will see a box form, which is the selection box. This has two modes of
operation. In both cases you can use more than one box to make selections by pressing
CTRL while dragging the box.
4.1.2.1
Enclosing box
If you drag from left to right this forms an enclosing box, which selects all the objects
totally contained within it.
4.1.2.2
Crossing box
80
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
If you drag from right to left this forms a box which selects all objects enclosed within it
and any object which crosses its boundary.
4.1.3
Clearing the selection
To clear a selection double click the background.
4.2
Move
This allows a part of the model to be moved to a different location. It acts directly on
the model and does not use the clipboard. It can do in one operation what you might
otherwise do by cutting and pasting. It does however offer better control.
Figure 4.2
If you already have a selection the Move will take this and lock it to prevent further
action deselecting its objects. You then pick one of the objects and drag it in the
required direction. In order to control the direction there are direction restraints that are
described below.
Figure 4.3
As you drag the objects the relative movement is shown in the right of the status bar. This
movement may be controlled by Snaps that can be toggled on or off and alternative
values set (see below). Once the drag has stopped the move action ceases and the
selection is unlocked, but remains selected. This enables you to move in another direction
without re-selection, if necessary.
4.3
Move By
This is similar to Move above but instead of dragging the selected objects to their
new location you specify the amount by which you want them moved. You must
already have objects selected to use this option.
81
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 4.4
This opens the Transform dialog box set to Move, Relative offset. Enter the offset values in
the appropriate direction fields and pick the OK (tick) button.
4.4
Stretch
Stretch is similar to Move except that when the selected objects are moved any
other objects attached to them are stretched. This is a particularly useful feature when
used in conjunction with the frame generators.
Figure 4.5
4.5
Stretch By
Stretch By is similar to Stretch except that the Transform dialog opens for you to
enter specified offset values as Move By above.
4.6
More
There are also some lesser used transformations available from the More sub-menu and
toolbar. The button on the toolbar changes to reflect the last Transform option used.
82
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 4.6
4.6.1
Rotate
This Rotates the selected objects about the current axis according to the restraint
setting, see below. It works rather like a stretch.
Figure 4.7
By default the rotation takes place about the centre of the selection as indicated by the
triad, but if you click the right mouse button whilst in this mode the pop up menu allows
you to alter the base point of rotation.
Figure 4.8
Pick base point allows you to pick a joint about which to rotate the objects.
Enter location allows you to specify the absolute co-ordinate of the base point.
4.6.2
Rotate By
This is similar to Rotate but a dialog opens in which you can specify the degree of
rotation.
Figure 4.9
83
A3D MAX
Function Guide
4.6.3
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Scale
This enlarges or reduces, i.e. Scales, selected object in the direction of the current
axis according to the restraint setting. It works rather like a stretch.
By default the scaling takes place about the centre of the selection as indicated by the
triad, but if you click the right mouse button whilst in this mode, the pop up menu allows
you to alter the base point of scaling. The options are the same as those shown under
Rotate above.
4.6.4
Scale By
This is similar to Scale but a dialog opens in which you can specify the Scale value.
4.6.5
Detach on Transform
This setting makes any transformation detach the objects being transformed so it
behaves like a Move rather than a Stretch. This setting is toggled on or off.
4.7
Lock Selection
This locks the current selection so that picking other objects does not affect the
existing selection. It is used normally with the various Transforms where it is activated
automatically. If this were not used, once a selection was made, picking the object to
drag would clear the selection. If you do need to add to the selection you can unlock
the selection, add to it (or remove) as necessary, and then lock again before dragging. It
has a hot key activated by pressing the Spacebar.
4.8
Restrict to
When dragging the Transforms it is necessary to be able to control the

placing of the objects accurately. It is useful to be able to drag using any convenient
view which may not align with the screen axes. To over come this problem drags are
confined to a particular axis using the Restrict to setting. These ensure that the
transformation takes place parallel to the axis set or in the case of rotations about the
axis set.
Figure 4.10
84
A3D MAX
Function Guide
4.9
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Toggle Snaps
When dragging, the movement is constrained to set increments, or Snaps, so that

the placing is accurate. You can toggle these snaps off and then the drag will be
according to the pointer movement. This is difficult to control accurately and is a function
of screen resolution, mouse sensitivity, and zoom setting.
4.9.1
Set snaps
This option opens the Set Snaps dialog in which you can set the values used for
controlling the transformations when dragged.
Figure 4.11
Linear is used by Move and Stretch.
Angle is used by Rotate.
Scale is used by Scale.
85
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
5.0 Model Menu
Figure 5.1
This menu contains the tools to create the model of your structure. Some of the tools act
directly on the objects whereas others can produce an almost complete model.
However before describing the tools it is worthwhile outlining the logic used by the model.
5.1
Outline of the model
As a basis for the analysis, you construct a structural model out of various objects such as
members, joints and supports and then you apply loading data. The completed model is
analysed by the program to obtain the forces, moments and deflections on the structure,
collectively known as effects.
5.1.1
Joints
The model is principally composed of members connected to joints. The joint positions
determine the shape of the model and the positions of its components.
86
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 5.2
The model is constrained relative to the outside world by supports applied to particular
joints. The program uses types of support to define how they behave and includes built in
types which include common forms such as pinned and fixed supports. There is a Quick
Support tool to apply these readily.
5.1.2
Members
Members are connected at their ends to joints and there is a Quick Member tool which
allows you to do this directly, rather like joining the dots. The properties of a member are
determined by its type and you compile a list of types you wish to use in the model.
This can be done in advance while you place the members themselves or after the
model has been defined, as new member types can be added at any time. By using
member types, it is easy to change the properties of individual or many members in one
go.
The program provides tools to enable you to select objects to work on, so that properties
can be applied to particular objects or selected results obtained.
5.1.3
Panels and Overhangs
Panels represent surfaces carrying load. They make modelling of the structure easier for
you as they would reduce the need for hand calculation of their effect on the structure.
It is much easier for you to apply unit loads over a panel or set its stiffness behaviour than
to work out linear loads on surrounding members or apply a mesh of stiffeners to simulate
a rigid region.
A panel is defined by its corner joints but must also have supporting members along some
edges and must be plane. Panels are mostly rectangular but may be triangular or
quadrilateral.
Panels have properties such as thickness and material but also have a number of other
properties concerning their behaviour within the model. This makes them a very powerful
element when modelling a structure.
87
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
A further benefit is that applying loads to panels makes it much easier to set up the loads
on a typical building as the need to calculate the distribution onto beams is avoided.
Overhang is the part of the floor extension that is attached to the boundary of the Panel
group.
5.1.4
Loads and Moments
Loads and Moments generally referred to simply as loads in this document can be
applied to member or joints. There are a variety of types, which can be applied relative
to global or local member axes. Loads have a category attribute such as dead or
imposed which is used when creating load combinations.
5.1.5
Load combinations
These define how the loads are to be analysed and the partial safety factors to be
applied for a particular combination of loads.
5.2
Create Frame
Rather than create a model from scratch by entering joints and members A3D MAX
includes a series of Frame Generators that enable typical frame forms to be modeled
easily. Even if these do not exactly correspond to your structure you may find them a
suitable basis for adding to or modifying.
Figure 5.3
There are five general forms. All of these can be used to create a variety of different
frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3D Building Frame
2D Girder Frame
2D Grillage
2D Truss Frame
88
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
5. Portal Frame
5.2.1
3D Building Frame Generator
This is a simple frame in which you can define the number of bays in each
direction and the number of storeys. The bay sizes are constant by default but may be
varied, if required.
5.2.1.1
Bay data
No. This input field is for entering the number of bays/storeys in the particular direction.
Length This input field is the typical length of each bay/storey. If the lengths vary then
by clicking the button adjoining a dialog opens in which the lengths may be entered.
The order of bay spacing is:-
Figure 5.4
Width (x) left to right
Height (y) bottom to top
Depth (z) front to back
Closing this field will then show Varies and the total will appear under the Total Length
heading.
89
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Member Type This list box allows you to select the member type to be used. A default
type is provided and if the type you require has not been defined you can do so later
using the Member Type Editor and apply it to the members subsequently.
Total Length This field shows the total length of the frame in the particular direction.
Altering this value changes the Length according to the number of bays by making them
all equal.
5.2.1.2
Panel creation options
Floors Set this option to create panels in all the storeys other than the top storey.
Roof Set this option to create panels in the top most storey.
Inner walls Set this option to create panels in the inner walls.
Outer walls Set this option to create panels on outer walls.
Properties can be set individually for each panel option using the panel properties dialog,
which opens up by clicking the button adjoining the option.
5.2.1.3
Grouping Options
The members of the 3D Building Frame can form a Design Group using the Grouping
Options. For more information on the use of Design Groups see the section on the Design
Menu.
Apply grouping set this option if you wish to include the members in a design group.
Frame reference this is the name given to the group. By default it is Frame n, where n
is according to the number of 3D frames so far created.
Design Type this enables you to choose the basic type of design and code for the
frame.
Design Application this allows you to choose the design application to use.
Continuous Beams this indicates whether you want all the beams to be continuous. This
will be applied to all beams at each level and in each direction. Otherwise they will be
included as individual design objects. Generally you cannot generate a mixture of
continuous and dis-continuous beams. The one exception is when there is only one bay in
one direction.
Beam design objects are labelled in the form bX1 i.e. type (b: beam), direction (X:
parallel X axis) and increment (1: number).
Continuous Columns this indicates whether you want all the columns to be continuous.
This will be applied to all columns and you cannot generate a mixture of continuous and
dis-continuous columns.
Column design objects are labelled in the form cY1 i.e. type (c: column), direction (Y:
parallel Y axis) and increment (1: number).
90
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
If you want a Design Grouping arrangement other than those provided by the 3D Frame
Generator then turn Apply Grouping off and use the Grouping Wizard, also described
under Design, to create the groups separately.
5.2.1.4
Generating the frame
Create Frame generates the frame as specified and either places it directly in the main
view if it is the first frame or allows you to drag it and attach it to an existing model. For
details of placing objects see Placing under the Edit Menu.
Cancel closes the Frame Generator without doing anything.
5.2.2
Girder Frame Generator
This Frame Generator creates a wide variety of girder shapes and lacer
arrangements.
Figure 5.5
There are two main panels dealing with the geometry and member types, plus two list
boxes which allow you choose the basic shape and lacer arrangements.
5.2.2.1
Girder Shape
Figure 5.6
Shapes This list box includes four basic shapes for the girder.
Flat where the girder is parallel and has a horizontal top chord.
Mono Upslope/Downslope for a mono-pitch girder the top chord slopes upwards or
downwards to the right. The bottom chord may be flat or sloped also.
Duo for a duo-pitch girder where the top chord comes to an Apex and the bottom
chord may slope in a similar manner or be flat.
91
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.2.2.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Girder Lacers
Figure 5.7
Lacers This list box shows the lacer arrangements available. There are three types N, W
and M:
The diagrams in the list box should give sufficient indication of the lacer arrangements.
The terms top and bottom post refer to the vertical lacers where they meet the top or
bottom chords alone in W and M girders.
Note that for the two N girder left/right arrangements, if there is an odd number of bays,
then the lacers cross in the middle.
5.2.2.3
Girder Geometry
This panel defines the overall size of the girder and the number of bays. It has two main
areas in which the overall dimensions of the girder are entered and the other which deals
with slope angles and end depths for mono and duo-pitch girders.
Number of bays This input field specifies the number of bays in the girder.
Bay Length this is the length of each bay in the girder and is the overall length divided
by the number of bays by default. However for Flat and the two Mono Pitch girders the
bays can be of varying length which is entered by picking the button alongside. This
opens a dialog in which you can enter the length of each bay from left to right. The
overall length then is the sum of these.
Overall Length This is the length of the girder over the extreme end joint positions. If you
modify this value then the Bay length will be calculated on the basis of equally spaced
bays of the given number.
92
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 5.8
Overall Depth This input is the greatest depth of the girder and dictates the height of a
flat girder, the deeper height of a mono-pitch girder and the apex height of a duo-pitch
girder. Changing this value alters the top slope of the girder.
Apex Position This input is the distance of the apex from the left hand end of a duopitch girder to the nearest top joint position. It is disabled out in other shapes. Changing
this value alters the left and right slopes.
End Depths This input sets the depth of the girders at either end for mono and duo pitch
girders. If the parallel option is set, then only the left end depth can be set. Changing
these values alters the corresponding top slopes.
Top Slope This input allows you to enter the slope of the top chord in degrees. Positive
values imply a slope upwards towards the right (i.e. positive gradient). Changing the top
slope alters the end depths for a mono-pitch and duo-pitch girder.
Bottom slope This allows the bottom slopes of mono and duo-pitch girders to be
specified. In a mono pitch girder the slope can vary between 0 (flat) and a minimum
end depth of 100mm.
Parallel This is a tick box which forces the bottom chord parallel to the top. This is
applicable to Mono and Duo-pitch slopes.
5.2.2.4
Girder Members
The Members panel allows you to choose which member types and end fixities you
require for the various members comprising the girder. A default type is provided and if
the type you require has not been defined you can do so later using the Member Type
Editor and apply it to the members subsequently.
93
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Top Chord These represent the members along the top of the girder. By default, they
have fixed ends.
Bottom Chord These are the members along the bottom of the girder. By default, they
have fixed ends.
End Posts These are the members at each end of the girder. By default, they have fixed
ends. The check box allows you to omit them if it is turned off. This may be appropriate if
you are placing the girder between columns. In the W and M girder shapes the adjacent
bottom or top end member of the chord is also omitted.
Vert Lacers These are the vertical internal members and they have pinned ends by
default.
Diag Lacers These are the diagonal internal members and they have pinned ends by
default.
Purlins These link the upper nodes of the girder if more than one is specified.
Type These list boxes allow you to choose which member type is to be used for each of
the girder components.
Fixity These list boxes allow you to choose fixed or pinned ends for the members. They
apply to both ends of the members making up the girder components.
If you need some other arrangement, then set the nearest to your requirements and use
the Member Editor to alter the member types or end fixities.
5.2.2.5
Multiple Frames
Figure 5.9
You can set up multiple identical frames in the Frames panel.
Number of Frames if more than one is entered then the Frame pitch, and Total pitch
fields are activated. The fields relating to purlins are also enabled.
Frame pitch is the distance between frames if more than one is specified. If the frame
pitch varies then pick the button alongside to open a dialog in which the pitch
dimensions from front to back can be entered.
Total pitch is the sum of the pitch values. You can enter a value here, which will update
the frame pitch to the appropriate equal values.
94
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.2.2.6
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Grouping Options
The members of the 2D Girder can form a Design Group using the Grouping Options. For
more information on the use of Design Groups see the section on the Design Menu.
Frame reference this is the name given to the group, and by default it is Girder n,
where n is according to the number of 2D girders so far created.
frame.
Continuous Top Chord this indicates whether you want the top chord members to be
continuous.
Top chord design objects are labelled in the form Tc1 i.e. type (Tc: Top chord), and
increment (1: number).
Continuous Bottom Chord this indicates whether you want all the bottom chord
members to be continuous.
Bottom chord design objects are labelled in the form Bc1 i.e. type (Bc: Bottom chord),
and increment (1: number).
The other members are always individual design objects. End posts are labelled Ep1 etc.
and lacers Lac1 etc.
If you want a Design Grouping arrangement other than those provided by the Girder
Generator then turn Apply Grouping off and use the Grouping Wizard to create the
groups separately.
5.2.2.7
Create Frame - This button accepts the data, creates the frame and draws it ghosted in
the current view, ready for placing, unless there are no other objects in which case it is
placed directly.
Cancel - This button aborts the frame generator operation.
5.2.3
2D Grillage Generator
This frame is a simple grillage in which you can define the number of bays in
each direction, which may be of constant or variable size. You can also specify a skew
angle.
95
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 5.10
5.2.3.1
Bay Data
No. This input field is for entering the number of bays in the particular direction.
Figure 5.11
Length This input field is the typical length of each bay. If the lengths vary then by
clicking the button adjoining a dialog opens in which the lengths may be entered. The
order of the bay spacing is:
Width (x) left to right
Depth (z) front to back
On closing the dialog this field will then show Varies and the total will appear under the
Total Length heading.
Member Type This list box allows you to select the member type to be used for each
direction. A default type is provided and if the type you require has not been defined
you can do so later using the Member Type Editor and apply it to the members
subsequently.
Total Length This input field is the total length of the frame in the particular direction.
Altering this value changes the Length according to the Number of bays.
Skew angle The grillage does not have to be orthogonal. The Z direction members can
be skewed away from the Z direction by this angle. The Depth is then along the line of the
members not the Z direction.
Create panels Selecting this option will create panels in addition to members and joints.
96
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Properties Clicking this button opens a panel properties dialog. Properties that can be
set are thickness, rigidity, material, alignment and load distribution scheme.
5.2.3.2
Grouping Options
The members of the 2D Grillage can form a Design Group using the Grouping Options.
For more information on the use of Design Groups see the section on the Design Menu.
Frame reference this is the name given to the group, by default it is Grillage n, where
n is according to the number of grillages so far created.
frame.
Continuous Beams (parallel to X) this indicates whether you want all the beams in the
direction parallel to the X direction to be continuous. This will be applied to all beams in
that direction, otherwise they will be included as individual design objects. You cannot
generate a mixture of continuous and dis-continuous beams in a given direction.
Beam design objects are labelled in the form bX1 i.e. type (b: beam), direction (X:
parallel X axis) and increment (1: number).
Continuous Beams (parallel to Z) this indicates whether you want all the beams in the
direction parallel to the Z direction to be continuous. This will be applied to all beams in
that direction, otherwise they will be included as individual design objects. You cannot
generate a mixture of continuous and dis-continuous beams in a given direction.
Beam design objects are labelled in the form bZ1 i.e. type (b: beam), direction (Z:
parallel Z axis) and increment (1: number). Note: that in a skew grillage the beams
counter to the X direction will still be given the direction Z even though they are not
actually parallel to the Z direction. It is a convenient label.
If you want a Design Grouping arrangement other than those provided by the Grillage
Generator then turn off Apply Grouping and use the Grouping Wizard to create the
groups separately.
5.2.3.3
Create Frame - This button accepts the data, closes the dialog and draws the frame
ghosted ready for placing.
Cancel - This button ignores the data, aborts the operation and closes the dialog.
5.2.4
2D Truss Frame Generator
This Frame Generator creates a variety of symmetrical triangular trusses. These

trusses can be generated singly or as multiples at a specified distance apart and
optionally linked by purlins.
97
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 5.12
There are two main panels dealing with the geometry and member types, and a list box
which allows you to choose the lacer arrangements.
5.2.4.1
Truss Type
Figure 5.15
Truss type This list box allows you to choose the lacer arrangement. The lacers divide the
top and bottom booms into equal length divisions. The diagrams in the list box should
give sufficient indication of the lacer arrangements.
5.2.4.2
Geometry
This panel defines the overall size of the truss and the number of trusses, if multiple trusses
are required.
Figure 5.13
Overall Width This input is the span of the truss over the extreme end joint positions.
Overall Height This input is the height of the truss.
Centre Panel Width This input is only active for the attic type truss and it is the distance
between the internal posts.
98
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Centre Panel Height This input is only active for the attic type truss and it is the height to
the internal collar.
Number of Frames This input specifies the number of frames to be generated. By
default, a single frame is drawn. However, any number up to 99 can be generated
simultaneously.
Frame Pitch This is the distance between frames and it is only active if more than one
member is specified. If you have variable pitch then pick the button alongside to open a
dialog in which you can enter the pitch from front to back.
Overall Depth Is the sum of the frame pitches. If you enter a value here then the frame
pitch is adjusted to give equal values depending on the number of pitches.
5.2.4.3
Members
The Members panel allows you to choose which member types and end fixities you
require for the various members comprising the truss.
Top Chord These represent the rafters of the truss. By default, they have fixed ends.
Bottom Chord These are the members along the bottom of the truss. By default, they
have fixed ends.
Lacers/Internals These are the various internal members depending on the truss type
and they have pinned ends by default.
Purlins These are members which link the joints along the top chord between multiple
trusses. They have pinned ends by default and the check box determines if they are to
be generated. The option is not available for a single truss.
Type These list boxes allow you to choose the member type to be used for each of the
truss components. A default type is provided and if the type you require has not been
defined you can do so later using the Member Type Editor and apply it to the members
subsequently.
Fixity These list boxes allow you to choose fixed or pinned ends for the members. They
apply to both ends of the members making up the truss components.
If you need some other arrangement, then set the nearest to your requirements and use
the Member Editor to alter the member types or end fixities.
5.2.4.4
Grouping options
The members of the 2D Triangular Truss can form a Design Group using the Grouping
Options. For more information on the use of Design Groups, see the section on the Design
Menu.
Frame reference this is the name given to the group, and by default it is Truss n, where
n is according to the number of 2D trusses so far created.
99
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
frame.
Continuous Top Chords this indicates whether you want the top chords (rafters) to be
continuous. This will be applied to both rafters in all the trusses. Otherwise they will be
included as individual design objects. You cannot generate a mixture of continuous and
discontinuous rafters.
Top chord design objects are labelled in the form Tc1 i.e. type (Tc: top chord), and
increment (1: number).
Continuous Bottom Chords this indicates whether you want all the bottom chords (ties)
to be continuous. This will be applied to all the ties in all the trusses. You cannot generate
a mixture of continuous and discontinuous ties.
Bottom chord design objects are labelled in the form Bc1 i.e. type (Bc: Bottom chord),
and increment (1: number).
The internal lacers are all individual design objects labelled Lac1 etc. Purlins, if present,
are also individual design objects and labelled Pur1 etc.
If you want a Design Grouping arrangement other than those provided by the 2D Truss
groups separately.
5.2.4.5
Creating the frame
Create Frame This button accepts the data, creates the frame and draws it ghosted in
the current view ready for placing.
Cancel - This button aborts the frame generator operation.
5.2.5
Portal Frame Generator
This Frame Generator can create a wide range of portal forms. The frame can
consist of as many spans as you require, each of which may be one of three basic types:
duo-pitch, mono-pitch or flat.
Figure 5.14
100
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Adjacent spans share a common column but they may have their eaves at a different
height. Each column may also be founded at a different level.
Figure 5.15
The frame may also be repeated for as many bays as required and linked by optional
eaves beams.
The upper part of the dialog consists of the spreadsheet in which the geometry of each
span is entered. By default, a 10m single span duo-pitch portal is defined but this is easily
edited to any other type.
Below the spreadsheet, typical members are specified. If they vary through the frame,
then they may be edited in the usual way once the frame is placed.
There are also facilities to help you to visualise the frame as it is created and to specify
the number of bays and their depth.
5.2.5.1
Portal Geometry
Duo-pitch
Mono-pitch
Flat
Figure 5.16
The spreadsheet is of the normal type with the first column showing the span number. The
remaining columns allow the frame data to be entered as follows:
Span Type - This sets the basic shape of the span, as illustrated.
101
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The duo-pitch does not have to have its apex at mid-span and the mono-pitch may
slope in either direction. Enter the initial letter for the type required.
Figure 5.17
The diagram may clarify the other Geometry field entries:
Span Length This is the distance between centres of the columns in metres.
L.Eave Height This is the height of the left eaves, in metres, above the column datum. In
the case of the first (leftmost) column, this is measured from the foot of the column.
The default value for the right eaves height is calculated from this value and the roof
slope or slopes.
In the case of subsequent spans, this value may be greater or less than the R.Eaves
Height of the previous span, allowing for a different springing point either side of the
column.
Ridge Position This is the distance to the apex (for the duo-pitch type only) from the left
column of the span in metres. The roof slopes are kept constant and the right eaves
height is adjusted as this value is changed.
Left Pitch This is the slope of the left side of the span in duo pitch types or the slope in
mono pitch types. It is set to zero for flat types. The slope is entered in degrees and a
positive value signifies an upward slope towards the right. Changing this value changes
the right eaves height.
Right Pitch This is the right half slope in duo-pitch types only. It will usually be a negative
value indicating a slope down to the right. Changing this value changes the right eaves
height.
R.Eave Height This value (m) is dependent on the preceding geometry but it can be
changed and the right slope will change to correspond.
R.Base Level This value is the level (m) of the foot of the right column relative to the
datum established by the first column (i.e. the foot of left column of the first span which is
assumed to be datum 0.0.)
102
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.2.5.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Member Type
You can assign a defined member type to each of the main members in the portal. Note
that in most cases the left and right rafter will use the same member type as the members
are placed starting at the eaves. A default type is provided and if the type you require
has not been defined you can do so later using the Member Type Editor and apply it to
the members subsequently.
Left Column the left column of the second or subsequent spans refers to any part of the
column above the eaves of the span to the left.
Right Column the right column of any span except the last refers to the lower column if
there is a difference in eaves level to the span to the right.
Left Rafter this is the rafter to left of the apex in a duo pitch roof or the whole rafter in a
flat or mono-pitch.
Right Rafter this is the rafter after the apex in a duo pitch roof, otherwise it is ignored in
flat and mono-pitch roofs.
Eaves Beam these members will be added at eaves or valleys if one or more bays are
specified under the Bay Repeat heading. However, no members will be provided if the
type is set to None.
Ridge Beam these members will be added at the apex of roofs if one or more bays are
specified under the Bay Repeat heading. However, no members will be provided if the
type is set to None.
5.2.5.3
Bay Repeat
This allows you to specify several identical bays in depth.

Number of bays This will add the specified number of bays.
Bay Depth is the dimension for each bay, the total being shown in the field at the right
of the panel. If you require varying depths of bay picking the button alongside opens a
dialog in which you can enter the values from front to back.
5.2.5.4
Visualisation
An illustration of the frame being defined in the spreadsheet may be obtained by clicking
on the Visualise button below the Member Types panel.
The diagram includes a scale and the span currently being edited has its number
emboldened. The diagram is updated dynamically as the data is changed.
103
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 5.18
Note: This panel can be moved and scaled so that you can view it whilst working on the
spreadsheet.
5.2.5.5
Haunch nodes
Figure 5.19
This option allows you to add joints to the columns and rafters to assist in simulating plastic
hinge points close to haunches. The dialog shows a spreadsheet in which the positions of
the nodes are entered. A diagram below indicates the current dimension.
The position of the nodes on the rafter can be entered by specifying their horizontal
distance from the column or apex or the distance up the slope. One is automatically
adjusted if the other is changed.
The span may be changed using the spin buttons below the spreadsheet.
If the Apply Nodes tick box is set, then they will be included in the frame when it is
created, otherwise no additional nodes will be added.
104
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The nodes are also shown on the Visualisation diagram, if that is on.
5.2.5.6
Grouping Options
The members of the Portal Frame can form a Design Group using the Grouping Options.
For more information on the use of Design Groups see the section on the Design Menu.
Frame reference this is the name given to the group, by default it is Portal n, where n
is according to the number of Portal frames so far created.
frame.
Figure 5.20
Continuous Rafters this indicates whether you want all the rafters to be continuous. By
default rafters consist of only one member unless you opt for haunch nodes. In that case
they are divided into three members representing the eaves member, normal rafter
member and apex member. Each member of the rafter could be designed individually
or more often the rafter would be designed as one by ticking the continuous rafters
option. Note that all rafters in each span will be treated as continuous unless there are no
haunch nodes in that span.
Rafter design objects are labelled in the form Raf1 where the number increments are
generally left to right, front to back.
Continuous Columns this indicates whether you want all the columns to be continuous.
This will be applied to all columns and you cannot generate a mixture of continuous and
discontinuous columns. Columns are treated as continuous from the base level up to the
highest eaves level. By default columns consist of one member for a simple outside or
internal case but could be two for an internal column with differing eaves for rafters
either side.
105
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
If you opt for haunch nodes a column will have a short eaves member added thus giving
up to four members in an internal column. This will also be one continuous Design object if
you choose the Continuous columns option.
Column design objects are labelled in the form Col1 where the number increments are
generally left to right, front to back.
If you want a Design Grouping arrangement other than those provided by the Portal
groups separately.
5.2.5.7
Creating the Frame
When you have defined the spans and any haunch nodes, click on the Create Frame
button and the frame will be created ready to place in the model in the usual manner.
Note that if you do not select the Haunch Node option at all, then no additional joints will
be created.
5.3
Automatic Panels
This tool allows creating panel in a complete region. It requires a suitable

arrangement of members to be selected and the program then attempts to populate
the region with quadrilateral or triangular panels. Members not included in the selection
will be ignored. This way bracing and other subsidiary members can be ignored by not
selecting them. All the members must lie in a plane.
Figure 5.21
The tool will open the panel properties dialog and the settings will apply to all the panels
to be created by the selection. Any areas that are not valid will not have panels applied
but no warning will be given. Full render mode is particularly recommended to show the
coverage. You may wish to add additional members or set up panels individually in
complex areas. In all other respects each panel acts as an individual.
This tool is likely to be the most frequently used one to create panels. Setting an
appropriate view and using a box selection can most easily accomplish the selection of
planes. The partial view tool can also be useful with complex structures.
106
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.4
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Create Portal
This option starts the Portal wizard which is a plug in application available only for A3D
MAX and is fully described in the Portal Wizard User Guide.
5.5
Joints
All members in the model must be attached to a joint at each end. Joints can be
positioned by specifying their co-ordinates in space. Joints can be turned into supports
by applying various restraints.
5.5.1
Joint Editor
The geometry of the model is determined by the joint positions and the Joint Editor
enables you to view or change their positions and add new ones.
Figure 5.22
5.5.1.1
Joint data
Joints are shown highlighted if they have been selected in the editor or the main view.
A joint is 'free' to move in any direction unless it is constrained by having some support
condition applied to it.
Reference is the name given to the joint. This is used when locating members and joint
loads and when reporting joint displacements etc. It can be anything you like but simple
numbers tend to be clearer particularly when labelling the view.
X, Y, Z_Coord is the global co-ordinate of the joint.
Support is a list of support types defined for the job. By default several typical conditions
are already defined but you can add others if you wish. See Supports for details. Picking
Free effectively removes a support.
107
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.5.1.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Selection
These options become available if one or more joints are selected.

Properties this opens the Joint Properties dialog which has been described in detail
under Edit > Joint Properties.
Delete this will delete a joint provided it does not have a member attached. You will
need to delete the member first.
Support this opens a menu of support types similar to the list under the Support heading
in the main body of the editor. The advantage of this is that the support condition can be
applied to all the selected joints in one go.
5.5.1.3
Relabel All
This re-numbers all the joints in the model. It is useful if you have deleted part of the model
and want to keep the list sequential.
5.6
Support Types
Joints are normally free to move or rotate in any direction. But if you need to restrain
them in some way, then a support condition must be applied. A3D MAX allows you to
specify whether a joint is restrained in the direction of the global axes (Translation) or
about the global axes (Rotation). These restraints may be Free, Fixed, or Spring. For your
convenience it has several pre-defined support types which cover the most common
conditions.
Free This has no restraints and is the default joint condition.
Fixed This applies a very high value of stiffness to all restraints to model a fully rigid
condition.
Pinned fixes the translational restraints, leaving the rotational ones free.
Fixed roller in X, Y or Z This is similar to Fixed but with one direction Free.
Pinned roller in X, Y or Z This is similar to Pinned but with one direction Free.
The creation of New supports and other settings are described in detail under Edit > Joint
Properties.
5.7
Members
Members are the fundamental components of the model.
5.7.1
Member Editor
The Member Editor allows you to define where each member is to be placed, its
type and some basic attributes. Members are placed relative to joints at their ends. At
least two joints should be defined before the Member Editor can be opened.
108
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Members selected in the main view are highlighted in the editor and vice versa.
5.7.1.1
Member data
Reference name or number given to identify the member. It is recommended that

simple numbering be used.
Figure 5.23
End1 is the joint number at the start of the member. End 1 of a member is the end from
which loads and other position dependant features are measured. There is a Member
direction toggle on the Display toolbar which shows the direction of the member in the
model. The arrow points away from End1.
End1 fixity Allows you to choose the standard end fixity conditions for the member. See
the paragraph on end fixities below.
End 2 the joint number at the other end of the member.
End 2 fixity is the fixity condition at end 2 of the member. See below.
Handing This allows you to indicate which handing unsymmetrical members are to be
placed. This is not used by the analysis calculations but is passed to Design and Detailing
application for their use if required.
Orientation this is the angle of the member rotated about its longitudinal axis,
sometimes referred to as the Beta angle. It is measure positive anti-clockwise looking in
the direction of the member axis from end1. For users of Analyse 3D versions 1.xx and 2.xx,
0 is the equivalent of Major and 90 Minor orientation.
Member type is the member type assigned to the member. You can choose from any
of the types already defined or use the Member type editor (described below) to add
more.
5.7.1.2
Selection
Properties opens the Member Attribute Editor. This allows many more attributes of a
member to be modified than the few offered in the Member Editor. The member end
109
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
fixity, orientation and plastic limits are some of the attributes that can be set. See Edit >
Properties for details.
Delete this will delete the selected members. Note that it does not delete the member
type used by the members.
Swap this allows the direction of a member to be swapped by swapping the order of
the end joints. Note that position dependant loads on a member remain in the same
position relative to the member start. This may mean a change in their position relative to
the rest of the model.
Type > offers a menu of the currently defined member types which may be applied to
all selected members.
5.7.1.3
Sorted Display OFF
This is a toggle. When ON it sorts members based on their references with alphanumeric
followed by numeric in ascending order. This is particularly useful after a copy and paste
operation, which merges any new joints, members if incident on existing one within a
tolerance.
5.7.1.4
Relabel All
This re-numbers all the members in the model. It is useful if you have deleted part of the
model and want to keep the list sequential.
5.7.1.5
End Fixity
The frame is modelled by connecting the members to the joints, there being a choice of
Fixed, Pinned, Ball and Partial, End Fixity conditions. The End Fixity defines the stiffness of
the connection between the member and the joint and hence other connecting
members.
Fixed is fully rigid in the normal, and lateral planes of the member and torsionally.
Pinned allows free rotation normally and laterally but fixed torsionally.
Ball is the same as Pinned but is torsionally free as well. Do not define a member with
Ball end fixities at both ends. Otherwise, it is free to spin in its axis and will probably cause
a Mechanism failure in the analysis calculations. The program does a pre-analysis check
for this condition.
Partial fixity allows you various options to define the normal and lateral fixity. This is set
fully via the Member Attributes dialog. Details of this can be found under Edit > Properties.
5.8
Panels
Panels are objects that are intended to represent surfaces carrying load. This is the
smallest area element within A3D MAX. The panels when taken together can constitute a
slab or a wall.
110
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.8.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Panel editor
The panel editor lists all the panels created along with their properties. Only the
reference can be edited from the spreadsheet.
Figure 5.24
Properties this option helps to edit properties of selected panels. It opens the panel
properties dialog. See topic on Edit>Panel properties.
Create panel Creates a panel with default properties with joints entered.
Delete panel - deletes the selected panel.
5.9
Create Panel
This tool creates an individual panel and requires three or four joints to be selected.
The joints must lie in a plane.
The tool opens the panel properties dialog in which you can set the principle attributes of
the panel. See topic Edit > Panel properties.
Clicking OK creates a panel after validation and Cancel exits the operation.
Figure 5.25
Few of the principle validations are:-
111
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Adjacent edges of a panel cannot be empty.

At least two opposite edges must be fully populated with members.
You cannot create a panel that overlaps with a part or whole of an existing
panel.
If the selection fails any of the principle validations, a warning message will be shown and
no panel will be created.
Please note the properties set in the dialog for panel creation are validated before
application. For example if one of the selected joint is a support then panel rigidity will be
set to non-rigid even though you specify it as rigid. Similarly if load distribution axis is set to
one-way and the axis chosen (say X-axis) is not valid because the edges are free it will be
changed to another axis (Z-axis).
5.10 Overhangs
Overhang is the part of the floor extension that is attached to the boundary of the
Panel group. Overhang can be attached only to those edges that are simply supported
(not free or restrained). Overhangs are applied to the bounding members of a panel.
Figure 5.26
To create overhang, select members on which it has to be applied. A dialog opens to
choose the type and width of overhang.
There are three forms of overhang available:
Rectangular this overhang extends parallel to the notional panel edge by a constant
specified width. Members selected need not be continuous. It can be different (at right
angles).
Trapezoidal this overhang has a straight edge extending to differing widths from the
start and end of the notional panel edge. Members selected should be continuous.
Circular this overhang is a circular arc extending to a maximum specified width from
the notional panel edge. Members selected should be continuous.
Note that these overhangs extend to either partial or full length of an edge and may
extend over several members.
Multiple overhangs can be applied to members shared between panels in two
perpendicular planes.
112
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Multiple overhangs cannot be created for members that lie in two different parallel
planes in a single operation. It is done for one panel group at a time.
Area load can be applied to overhangs. On analysis the load gets distributed to
members supporting the overhang.
5.10.1.1
Editing Overhangs
To edit an overhang right click and select properties. For rectangular overhang, only the
width can be edited. For trapezoidal and circular overhang, type and width can be
edited.
5.11 Member Types

Member types are used to specify the properties of each member in the model.
It is recommended that you create a member type for each set of members in a frame
(even if they are similar) as it makes modifying them easier.
5.11.1
Member Type Editor
They are defined using the Member Type Editor.

This allows you to:
Give each type a recognisable name

Choose from a range of different sections and profiles
Create your own types
Specify the material
Assign the types to members already defined in the model
By default, a 305x165UB40 is defined to give the model something to work with.
Figure 5.27
113
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.11.1.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Member Type data
Reference is an input field for you to give the member type a sensible name, e.g. Roof
Beam or Corner Column. Entering something that indicates its purpose will help you to
identify it later, particularly if you return to the job after some time.
Type contains a list of generic member types that A3D MAX recognises. The types are:
SW Library a structural section from the steelwork library.
Timber Library a timber section from the timber library.
Properties a section where you define the properties directly.
Elements a section built from rectangular elements.
SW Haunch a variety of tapered or haunched steel I or box members.
RC Members a variety of RC beam and column sections and profiles.
Non-prismatic - a user defined tapered and/or segmented member.
These are described in detail later.
Member types also fall into one of two general categories, Prismatic and Non-prismatic,
although for the most part it makes no difference to the way they are used.
Prismatic These are member types that have a constant cross section
throughout their length. Generally they are defined by their cross section. These
include the SW Library, Timber Library, Properties and Elements member types
(see below).
Non-prismatic These are member types which do not have a constant cross
section. They may be tapered, or stepped, and are defined by their cross
sections at either end of one or more segments. They include the SW Haunch
and RC Member types which provide tools for setting up several typical profiles
and thus do much of the work for you. For other more unusual cases there is a
Non-prismatic member type (not to be confused with being non-prismatic by
nature) where you define the sections and segments directly.
Section This shows the particular section chosen from the type specified. If you click on
this field it is actually a list of all the sections of that generic member type defined in the
job. This makes it easy to swap between sizes if you so wish. Normally you can skip over
this field when you create new member types, as it is often used when changing an
existing member type.
Material Shows the list of Materials that you can assign to the member type. If the
material you require is not listed, use the Materials Editor to create a new one. This is
described later.
Usage Shows the number of instances the member type is used in the model. Initially it is
zero but applying it to a member will automatically update this field.
114
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.11.1.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Visualise
Figure 5.28
The Visualise button expands the Member Type Editor dialog to reveal a panel in which a
representation of the current member is shown.
This view can be altered using the presets at the foot of the panel with the Free option
allowing you to rotate the image by dragging the view around the panel.
This visualisation is helpful in confirming that the member type you have created is of the
general form you envisaged. The Hide button closes the visualisation panel.
5.11.1.3
Controls
There are a number of buttons that allow you to handle the member types.
Edit Opens a dialog depending on the generic member type so that you may choose
another or modify its properties. This is described in detail below.
Delete Highlighted member types that are no longer required can be deleted provided
they are not in use by a member (i.e. their Usage is 0). Note that it does no harm to leave
member types, even if they are not used. The only real benefit of deleting them is to
make the list shorter, so that the ones you need are easier to find.
Select This will select the current member type in the main view. The current member
type is the one with the focus and is marked by an arrow in the index field on the left of
the member type data. Alternatively if a member type or several member types are
highlighted, this button will also select them in the main view. This facility is particularly
useful when used in concert with the Apply button.
Apply this applies the current member, marked by an arrow, to any members selected
in the main view. You will notice that the Usage field is updated by the number of
instances the member type was applied. There will be a corresponding reduction against
the previous types used by the members.
Highlight This highlights the member types in the editor for any members selected in the
main view. It enables you to readily find the member type of any member.
115
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.11.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
SW Library member type
Figure 5.29
This is a prismatic member type based on a structural section chosen from the steelwork
library. Picking the SW Library option opens the Section Library dialog filtered to show only
steelwork sections. From this dialog, you can choose the section you require.
The library contains a full set of UK sections to Revision 3, Revision 5, Revision 6 of the
'Steelwork Design Guide to BS5950: Part 1 plus Cold Rolled Hollow section tables. In
addition channel and angle sections can be defined as compound back to back, laced
or braced with a specified gap.
Depending on your installation there may be other national sections tables available
also.
You can also create you own non-standard and fabricated sections based on the
generic shapes.
The library opens with the currently used section highlighted. Section properties are
grouped into four tab pages dimension, elastic and plastic properties. The filter setting
can be used to view only the sections necessary. Filters include:
Table type The user may choose between standard and user defined tables.
Country The user can choose a country. The options depend on the type of installation.
Fabrication type Hot rolled, Cold rolled, fabricated or a combination may be selected.
116
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Section shape The user may choose either one or a combination of I, Box, Tube,
Channel, Angle, Tee, Castellated, Bar sections.
Section types Depending on the selection in Section shape either all or selected
section types will be displayed.
Non standard sections can be defined using the create button. It is enabled on clicking
Material - Steel in the explorer view. A series of details needs to be filed such as Table /
Country name, Section name, Generic type, Fabrication type and section dimension.
5.11.2.1
Preferred Section List
The Section Library has been enhanced by a new Preferred Section list facility. This allows
you to set up lists of sections for particular purposes, such as portal rafters, or a current
stock list. This is particularly useful when automatically designing a job as the selection
can be restricted to the most suitable or available sections.
5.11.2.2
Overview of preferred section lists
Preferred section lists are lists of sections chosen from the standard tables, or your own
tables, and are intended to allow you to set up lists containing just the sections you wish
to use for a particular project or purpose.
Typically they are based on the standard tables such as UK6 and the sections required in
the list marked. A name is given to the list so it can be identified. A list called Preferred
UB is supplied which contains the most commonly available UB sections.
You can choose to use the full table by setting All or any preferred list available. The list
then acts as a filter on the normal table and hence only the sections marked are shown.
Preferred section list This shows the preferred section lists available for
the particular table chosen. In the case of UK6 this is All which is the full section table,
and Preferred UB which is the reduced UB list mentioned above.
Set default preferred section list allows you to choose which list new SW library
member types are to be created from by default. When set by default the list is marked
with a tick in the box above. The button acts as a toggle so defaults can be turned on or
off. The setting of a default list does not prevent you choosing sections from another list or
the full table if you wish.
Create a Preferred section list this button allows you to create your own preferred
section lists, which are described in more detail below.
Edit a preferred section list allows you to change the content of an existing
preferred list and change its name if required. This does not edit the table contents only
the lists of sections to show.
Delete a preferred section list allows you to delete a preferred section list. It does
not delete section tables.
117
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
You can create as many preferred section lists as you require for each section table. The
preferred lists shown in the list box will depend on the set of tables chosen in the main
Tables and Section Types tree.
Example preferred lists called Preferred UB for both UK6 and UK5 tables are supplied
based on the respective UB section tables.
5.11.2.3
How to create a preferred section list
This is done using the Section Library. Hence open it by picking a new SW Library member
type.
Choose the section table on which you wish to base your preferred list e.g. UK6 with the
Preferred list box set to All which gives access to the full list.
Pick the Create a preferred list button which opens the Create Preferred list dialog.
This shows two panels. The left one shows the table chosen and its section types, and
expands it if necessary. The right panel shows the sections themselves.
Figure 5.30
Click on a section that will mark it with a tick and add it to the preferred list. Pick it again
to remove it. You can select a block of sections by holding SHIFT and by clicking, tick
them on or off. Repeat this procedure for all the section types you want included in your
preferred list and then pick Save.
This opens a dialog in which you can enter the name of the list and a brief description.
This name will appear in the preferred section list box in the toolbar.
You can then either make a fresh selection using Save As to save another list or pick
Close to finish.
118
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.11.2.4
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Using Preferred Sections
You use a preferred section by choosing the required list from the preferred list box in the
toolbar. This displays the appropriate table in the Section Library explorer panels, filtered
according to the preferred list, and the required section can be chosen in the normal
way.
When you specify member types from the preferred list and if they are used by a SW
member design object then the Design process only uses sections from the same
preferred list. This way you can limit the range of possible choices according to your
requirements.
If you send such a job to other people who may need to change the data, then they will
need a copy of your preferred list. They are stored in files named xxx.upl (user preferred
list) where xxx is based on the name of the source table e.g. UK6, UK5 etc. These files are
found in the \shared folder in the folder in which your CADS applications are located
(typically c:\cads\shared).
5.11.2.5
Editing preferred section lists
If you need to change the content of a preferred list then choose the required list and
pick the Edit preferred list button. This opens the Edit dialog which is similar to the Create
dialog described above.
You can add or remove sections from the list as needed. Pick Save when you have
finished your changes. You can also create a new preferred list from an existing one by
picking Save As and giving the list a new name. Close the dialog when you have
finished editing.
119
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.11.3
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Timber Library member type
Figure 5.31
This is a prismatic member type based on a structural section chosen from the timber
library. Picking the Timber Library option opens the Section Library dialog filtered to show
only timber sections from which you can choose the one you require.
The library contains a full set of UK softwood and hardwood sections and commonly used
glue laminated sections to BS 5268.
You can also create you own non-standard and fabricated sections based on the
generic shapes.
The library opens with the currently used section highlighted. The filter setting can be
used to view only the sections necessary. Filters include Table type, Country, Material and
Finish (Sawn timber, Regularized, Planned, Surfaced).
5.11.4
Non-prismatic Member Type
This allows you to create almost any non-prismatic member type consisting of tapered
and/or discontinuous steps.
120
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 5.32
It is defined as a series of segments, each of which has the sections at either end
specified. The segments have a fixed length assigned to them, except for one which is
'stretched' to fit between joints when the member is placed. This is a particularly powerful
facility in handling haunched or stepped members because it allows those with varying
lengths but standard haunches to be placed using only one member type definition.
Figure 5.33
this input is the reference for the member type.

this is a list of materials from which you can choose the one for the member type.
Default Length reports the length of the member type based on the sum of the
segment lengths. The actual length will depend on the members to which it is applied
and might vary.
Start & End Sections can be defined using a SW Library, Timber Library, or Properties
section type but there must be the same section type at both ends (i.e. the segment
must be prismatic).
Elements section types can also be used and a different type may be used at each end
to create tapered segments. However, the pair of Elements section types must have the
same number of elements in the same order.
These limitations arise because the stiffness calculations integrate the geometry, so the
start section must map dimensionally to the end section of each segment.
Length Each segment has a length specified. One of these segments must be
Variable so the member type can be fitted to the actual members in the model. It is
121
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
worth giving a sensible value to this, as it is used in the Member Type Editor to visualise the
member profile. A warning is given as part of the analysis pre-check routine if the
member type does not fit.
Placing rule this determines which segment is variable so that the member type can be
fitted to the members. All segments must be Fixed except for one.
5.11.5
Properties member type
Figure 5.34
This is a prismatic member type based on a section for which you define the geometric
properties.
this is a list of Properties sections that have already been defined for the job.
The panel on the right shows the section as a rectangle based on the ratios of the inertia
values. It is not intended as a true representation of the shape but does give an
indication that the proportions are reasonable.
5.11.5.1
Section Properties data
Area, Inertia & Torsional Constant values must be greater than zero and are used for the
analysis calculations.
Elastic Modulus must also be greater than zero as they are used by the simple Stress
results.
Shear Area is not used at present, as Shear Deformation calculations are not available.
122
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.11.6
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Elements Member Type
Figure 5.35
This is a prismatic member type based on a section built up from rectangular elements.
this is a list of Elements sections that have already been defined for the job.
5.11.6.1
Section Properties
This panel shows the properties as calculated from the elements data provided. It is
updated as the data is entered. Note that the Shear Areas are set to 0.000 as they are
not used.
The panel on the right shows the cross section derived from the elements and should
prove useful in confirming that the arrangement is as you expect. This also forms the cross
section for the rendered view in the model. Because of the ordering of the elements, it is
possible for members with voids to be rendered incorrectly. This is unavoidable but it is
only a visual problem.
5.11.6.2
Element Data
The element sizes are entered relative to the local directions of the section. Each element
is positioned relative to an arbitrary datum by specifying vertical or lateral offsets to its
centroid. Be careful to avoid overlapping, as the program makes no checks on this.
When the member type is assigned to a member the section may be rotated according
to the orientation of the member.
Width is the horizontal dimension of the element. You can specify a void by entering a
negative width for an element.
123
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Height is the vertical dimension of the element.

Vertical offset is the distance from the horizontal datum to the mid height of the
element. +ve is upwards.
Lateral offset is the distance from the vertical datum to the mid width of the element.
+ve is towards the right.
5.11.7
RC Member, member type
This offers both prismatic and non-prismatic member types to give a variety of RC beams
and column sections and profiles.
These prismatic profiles and sections are fully compatible with CADS RC Beam Designer
which designs and details reinforced concrete beams under various codes of practice.
Figure 5.36
5.11.7.1
Section
Section type There are a range of cross sections available for RC beams and columns.
Figure 5.37
124
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The diagram in which the dimensions are entered varies according to the section type
chosen. The dimension should be self-explanatory, except perhaps the dimension to the
balloon which is an offset to a vertical datum. This is not used by the analysis but may
be used by design and detailing applications. Note that the CADS RC Column Designer
application does not support elliptical columns.
Reference is the name you give to the member type. It is repeated on the Profile page.
Material is the material you wish to assign to the member type. It is repeated on the
Profile page.
5.11.7.2
Profile
Figure 5.38
There is a range of profile shapes available for RC Beams but the RC Column only uses
the Prismatic profile. This page is not available if a column section is chosen.
Profile type - Allows you to choose the RC beam profile shape to be used. The choice
available depends on the RC beam section chosen.
The I shaped section only allows a prismatic profile to be used, and will offer the T shape if
you use one of the others.
Figure 5.39
125
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
For Rectangular and T shaped beam sections there are four profile shapes. Note that only
the prismatic profile is supported by the CADS RC Beam Designer application.
For all the Beam sections the depth is entered in the Profile dialog. The prismatic profile
only requires the depth of the beam to be entered apart from the vertical offset.
The remaining profiles require the depths of their various segments to be entered and the
lengths of the segments at either end. These lengths are fixed when the member type is
placed in the model with the 'centre' portion varying in length according to the actual
distance between joints.
Note that the stiffness of the member is based on an integration of the profile, not just an
average cross section.
5.11.8
SW Haunch Member Type
This is a non-prismatic member type which can form a variety of tapered or haunched
members from steel I or box sections.
Reference is the name you give to the member type.
Material is the material you wish to assign to the member type.
Figure 5.40
5.11.8.1
Profile
There are six tapered or haunched profiles which are available in 2, 3 or 4 flanged forms.
These can be built from standard I and box sections or from defined fabricated I or box
shapes.
126
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
In addition, a Uniform profile enables fabricated sections of this profile to be created,

otherwise a normal SW Library member type would be more appropriate.
Figure 5.41
Profile Type is the list of available member profiles. The main diagram changes
according to the profile chosen. At either end there may be an option button where you
may choose whether to specify the overall haunch depth or the cut depth of the
haunch component. By default this is set to the depth of the haunch section less one
flange (3 Flange Haunch). For 2 Flange Haunch cut depth is haunch section depth less
haunch section top flange, root radius, main sections bottom flange and root radius. For
4 Flange haunch it is 1.2 times the haunch section depth.
The assumptions about the formation of the haunches is shown under each haunch type
below.
Figure 5.42
Haunch End types The member is composed of the main section, or main component,
and the haunch section or sections from which the haunch is actually cut.
By default the haunch section is the same size as the main section, but cannot be of a
different type i.e. you cannot have an I main section and box haunch or vice versa. The
haunch can also be made up from flat plates and there is an option to define the size of
these.
The following assumptions are made about the formation of the haunches. Tapers follow
the same logic except that they extend across the full length of the member.
2 Flange Haunches The main member is assumed to have the lower flange and root cut
away with the haunch fitted to suit. Normally the haunch would be cut from the same
size section as the main member but the program does allow any other size to be
chosen. The lower flange is assumed to be effectively continuous.
The maximum depth can be specified greater than the depth available from a cutting
from the haunch sections and is assumed to be made up of plate of the same thickness
as the haunch web for I sections or walls in box sections.
3 Flange Haunches The main member is continuous and the haunch cut such that its
depth varies from that specified at the eaves to the thickness of its flange where it ends.
127
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The maximum depth can be specified greater than the depth available from a cutting
from the haunch sections and is assumed to be made up of plate of the same thickness
as the haunch web for I sections or walls in box sections.
4 Flange Haunches The main member is continuous and the haunch member is splay
cut with a web/wall plate of the same thickness as the web or walls of the haunch
section welded between them.
These SW Haunch member types are compatible with the CADS SW Design application.
5.11.8.2
Section types
Main is the main rafter component of the member type. This is the component that will
be stretched to fit the particular instance as a member in the model.
End 1 & 2 are the haunch components and are enabled according to the profile
chosen. By default they are the maximum cut depth from the same section as the main
component. The ends have the same meaning as a normal member, with End 1
effectively being the start from which position dependant objects, such as loads, are
measured.
Each of the components can be chosen from:Library These are chosen from the I or box sections in the SW Library.
Figure 5.43
Non-standard This allows you to define the key dimensions of an I or box section. When
this option is chosen the following dialogue box appears in which you can enter the
required dimensions.
Fabricated This is similar to non-standard but with fillet radii omitted as the sections are
assumed to be composed of plate.
In all cases the full section is defined and the program extracts the data it requires.
Edit Pick the appropriate button to choose or specify the section.
128
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.11.8.3
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Member dimensions
The diagram allows you to enter the haunch depths, either overall or cut depth, and its
length.
Length this is the distance between the joints and depends on each member placing.
This value will actually depend on each individual placing and hence a value cannot be
shown.
Column offset is the distance between the joint in the model (normally centreline of
column) and start of the main body of the beam. It does not affect the analysis but is
passed to subsequent design and detailing applications.
Haunch length this specifies the length of haunch parallel to the main member axis.
Changing this will also affect the overall depth as the haunch depth is kept constant.
Haunch depth this specifies the depth of the haunch component from the end of the
member bottom flange line to the haunch flange measured perpendicular to the
haunch flange. Changes to this value update the Overall depth.
Overall depth this specifies the depth of haunch perpendicular to the main member
axis. Changes to this value update the Haunch depth.
For left and right tapered members and the right side of the double taper the haunch
length is dependent on the member length so that the relationship between the haunch
depth and overall depth cannot be established. In these cases a radio button is provided
for you to choose which depth to specify. The other will be calculated automatically
when the member is placed.
It should be remembered that the overall member length or slope is not known until the
member is placed between the defining joints. When placed, the haunch length is fixed
and the main member between haunches 'stretched' to fit. This means that the
relationship between the overall and cut haunch depth is not known before the member
is placed, therefore radio buttons are provided to allow you to select which you wish to
base the haunch depth on.
Note that the stiffness of the member is based on an integration of the profile, not just an
average cross section.
5.12 Sections
This shows details of all the principle sections defined for the model. By default as
member types are created their sections are added to this list. The only exceptions are
SW Haunch and RC member types which store their sections as parameters of the overall
member definition.
129
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.12.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Section Editor
Figure 5.44
5.12.1.1
Section data
Type The generic type of section.

Reference the name given to the section to identify it.
Area, Ixx, Iyy, Torsional constant these show the most significant properties of the
section.
Usage this indicates the number of member types (not members) which use the section.
5.12.1.2
Button controls
Edit opens the appropriate section editor to alter the choice or change its data.
Delete allows you to delete a section type provided it is not used by a member type,
i.e. its usage is zero.
You can use the Section Editor to create new SW Library, Timber library, Properties or
Elements section type by starting a new line at the foot of the editor and picking the
required type from the list. This opens the appropriate editor for you to choose or enter
the data which updates the remaining fields. These are for information only and are not
directly editable.
These sections cannot be used directly by members but only by member types. You may
find this facility most useful for creating a number of section types, particularly Elements
types, for use with Non-prismatic member types.
5.13 Materials
This allows you to edit or create new materials. Each member type has a material
assigned to it which the analysis calculation uses to calculate its stiffness.
130
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.13.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Steel materials library
Figure 5.45
The Materials Editor has been expanded to give access to the Steel materials library used
by the Steel Member Designer application.
This supports a wide range of international codes and allows more comprehensive
definition of new steel types. You can also configure which grade of steel you want to
use by default, and the program now defaults to UK-S275 grade.
A new labelling scheme has been introduced to prevent duplication of short names
across different nationalities and codes.
The old grades 43,50 and 55 are retained but have been relabelled so that they can
also be labelled briefly and unambiguously. Existing jobs retain their original labelling
scheme and the types are still available for new members.
You can create your own material data using the steel library. When you click on User
defined the last entry in the country list the Create button is enabled. Clicking on
Create prompts you to enter the code reference and the steel grade name. The steel
properties Youngs Modulus, Design strength etc. can then be edited and saved using
Edit and Save Buttons. Clicking Ok takes the steel data to Materials editor.
5.13.2
Materials Editor
5.13.2.1
Materials data
By default when a new SW Library or SW Haunch member type is defined the steel grade
is set in the configuration dialogue.
Reference The new materials editor has the same default materials as before but they
have been re-labelled to accord with the new scheme being adopted across CADS
applications.
131
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 5.46
Elastic modulus or Youngs modulus of elasticity for the material.
Poissons ratio Poissons ratio for the material.
Density density of the material in kN/m3.
Thermal Expansion coefficient of thermal expansion in length units per Cx10-6.
Design strength design strength of the material, currently only used in automatically
determining the plastic properties of SW Library member types.
Material Type It refers to the type of material as the name denotes. Steel materials
library will be enabled only when the material type is Steel.
You can also create and use steel material data without entering the library. The
advantage of creating new data from within the library is that the data can be used for
any subsequent job you create.
5.13.2.2
Button control
Delete allows the material type to be deleted if it is not used by a member type.
Steel Library this opens the steel materials library.
5.14 Load and Moments

Loads, including moments, can be applied to members or joints. The properties of a
load are determined by its type in a similar manner to the member. The load type
properties include Type (a generic form such as Uniform load, Point moment etc.),
Direction (Vertical, Horizontal etc.), Category (Dead, Imposed, etc.), Size and Position
along a member where appropriate.
132
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 5.47
A load is placed on members or joints by applying the appropriate load type to selected
members or joints.
Figure 5.48
The data required is as follows:
Load reference a name to identify the load type by.
5.14.1
Type
The program recognises a number of generic load types and all of the load types you
define are based upon these.
The load types broadly describe the 'shape' of the load and they can be applied in
certain directions relative to the global axis or local member axis. The directions available
depend upon the generic load type.
The generic types are listed below together with the abbreviations used in the Load
Editor and the default units for the data.
5.14.1.1
Uniform Load UL
UL is a constant load applied for the full length of a member. Default units kN/m.
5.14.1.2
Distributed Load DL
DL is a varying load which may start and end at any point along a member and have
different values at each end of the load. Default units kN/m & m.
133
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.14.1.3
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Point Load PL
PL is a concentrated load which may be placed at any point along a member. Default
units kN & m.
5.14.1.4
Triangular Load TL
TL is a varying load which extends the full length of the member and rises from zero at
either end to the specified value in the middle of the member. Default units kN/m.
5.14.1.5
Trapezoidal Load ZL
ZL is a symmetrical varying load which has a segment of constant value for part of the
member length with two equal segments rising from zero at either end to the value of the
constant segment. Default units kN/m & m.
5.14.1.6
Self Weight SW
SW is a constant load which always acts downwards over the length of a member and
is intended to represent the self weight of that member. It automatically compensates for
the slope of the member and behaves like a Vertical load generally but also works for
vertical members where a Vertical load would fail because it would have zero projected
length. An applied self weight overrides any value that might otherwise be calculated for
the member if the Automatic self weight option is on. Default units kN/m.
5.14.1.7
Area Load AL
AL is an uniform load applied over the entire panel. It is transferred to the supporting
members based on load distribution scheme and Consider edge continuity setting in
the Analysis options. Default units kN/m.
5.14.1.8
Joint Load JL
JL is a concentrated load applied to a joint. Default units kN.

5.14.1.9
Uniform Moment UM
UM is a constant torsional moment extending the full length of a member. Default units
kNm/m.
5.14.1.10
Distributed Moment DM
DM is a varying torsional moment which may start and end at any point along a
member and have different values at each end of the load. Default units kNm/m & m.
5.14.1.11
Point Moment PM
PM is a concentrated moment which may be applied at any point along a member.

Default units kNm & m.
5.14.1.12
Joint Moment JM
JM is a concentrated moment applied to a joint. Default units kNm.

134
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
5.14.2
Date: 01/08/03
Direction
For loads the direction options are:

Vertical A global load positive downwards, i.e. parallel to the Y axis but in the opposite
direction.
Horizontal A global load positive parallel to the X axis.
Transverse A global load positive parallel to the Z axis.
Normal A local load perpendicular to the longitudinal and major member axis.
Lateral A local load perpendicular to the longitudinal and minor member axis.
Axial A local load along the longitudinal axis. Positive loads act towards member end 1.
For moments the direction options are:
X axis a global moment about the X axis through a joint.
Y axis a global moment about the Y axis through a joint.
Z axis a global moment about the Z axis through a joint.
Normal a local moment about the major axis of a member.
Lateral a local moment about the minor axis of a member.
Torsion a local moment about the longitudinal axis of a member.
Load directions
Global
Local
Member loads
Joint loads
Member moments
Joint moments
Panel loads
Vertical, Horizontal, Transverse

Normal, Lateral, Axial

Normal, Lateral, Torsional
@ X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis

(for area loads only)
Normal, InplaneX, InplaneZ
Some load and moment types may not have all directions available.
5.14.3
Category
Indicates whether the load is Dead, Imposed or any other you may define. Categories
are used to assign partial safety factor to loads in load combinations. See the section on
Load Combinations and Categories for details.
5.14.4
Load values
The remaining inputs in the Load Editor deal with the actual values, such as size and
placing, which pertain to the load.
135
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.14.4.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Positioning
Some loads need to be positioned on the members by giving certain dimensions to their
location and in some cases their loaded length. By default these are actual values which
then stay Fixed even if the member changes in length.
There is also an option to specify such load positions as Proportional in which case the
positions are given as a percentage of the member length. Thus, even if the member
changes in length the load still remains in the same relative position. For instance a load
at a 50% End 1 position will remain in the middle of the member. However, its length
changes.
5.14.4.2
End 1 Size
The value of the load at its end nearest end 1 of the member. This also represents the
load value where only one is required. All loads require a value in this field.
5.14.4.3
End 1 Position
This is distance of a load from end 1 of a member. Only required for position dependant
loads and moments such as distributed, point, and trapezoidal.
5.14.4.4
End 2 Size
This is the value of the load at its end furthest from end 1 of the member. Only required for
distributed loads and moments.
5.14.4.5
Load Length
The length of the loaded portion of the member for distributed loads and moments.
5.14.4.6
Usage
The number of instances the load is used in the model. This value is automatically
updated as loads are applied or removed.
5.14.5
Load Options
5.14.5.1
Automatic self weight
This when turned on, calculates the self weight of each member from its cross sectional
area and density. It is overridden by any Self Weight load type applied to a member.
5.14.5.2
List All
This shows all loads in the model in the editor spreadsheet.

5.14.5.3
List Selected
This shows only loads on selected members or joints in the editor spreadsheet. This helps to
keep the number of items to scroll through down if a model has very many loads.
136
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.14.6
Load Controls
5.14.6.1
Apply
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
This applies the current or selected loads to selected members or joints in the model.
5.14.6.2
Remove
This removes the current or selected loads from selected members in the model. It does
not delete the load type definition itself. As this is a quite frequently used option it has its
own toolbar button which is enabled if any load itself is highlighted in the main view.
5.14.6.3
Delete
Deletes the load type if it is not used in the model, i.e. Usage is zero.
5.14.6.4
Select
This selects the members in the model to which the current or selected loads have
already been applied. This helps if you wish to apply a new load to the same members or
joints as an existing one.
5.14.6.5
Show
Show highlights in the editor, loads applied to members or joints selected in the model.
5.14.7
Applying Load Types to Member and Joints
To actually load the structure, the load types are applied to the members and joints as
required. There are two basic methods, directly as each load type is entered or as a
selected set of loads.
In both cases, you must have the members or joints that you wish to load selected in the
model view. It does not matter if you select both, as the program will ensure that only the
correct load types are applied to the members or joints.
5.14.7.1
Direct load application
As you enter the data for each load, picking the Apply button will apply that load to the
selected members or joints. The Usage value will then update according to how many
objects the load was applied to. Tabbing off this field takes you to the next entry ready to
enter a further load.
5.14.7.2
Selected load application
Alternatively, you can enter a selection of loads. This is particularly useful if you have a
number of loads, all of which need to be applied to the same member or joints. To do
this, click the load number field (the left most column) to highlight the load and then pick
the others using normal windows selection methods. Providing you have members or
joints selected in the model view, picking Apply will apply the selected loads to the
selected members.
137
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
5.15 Panel Loads

Panel loads are different form other conventional A3D MAX load types. Panel
load types include point load, line load, patch load and area load. Area load can be
applied both through the load editor dialog and loads page of Panel properties dialog.
Other panel loads are applied through the loads page of Panel properties dialog.
Figure 5.49
To create a panel load, select the panels in which you want to apply the load. Then
select a panel load type from Model > Panel Loads. The same action can be achieved
by selecting load type from loads toolbar.
These loads are applied in panel local directions normal, in-plane X and in-plane Z. At
present only normal is available.
5.15.1
Area Loads
Clicking area load opens a dialog. Area load is a constant load applied to the
whole surface of the panel. Load direction, category and intensity are specified. Area
loads may be specified in both global (Vertical, Horizontal, Transverse) and panel local
directions (Normal, InplaneX, InplaneZ).
Figure 5.50
An area load can also be applied to an overhang, which then transfers the load to the
supporting member.
138
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.15.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Point Load
Clicking Point load opens a dialog. Point load is a concentrated load applied at a
particular position in the panel. A positive panel point load acts in the direction of normal
but away from it. You need to specify the category, intensity, and location in the plane
of the panel. The default position offered is the center of the panel.
Figure 5.51
Load position can be entered or picked from view above. To enable picking from view
above, click on Pick graphically button. Once done, you will be prompted with
appropriate messages from the status bar just below the panel view Pick point 1 of 1 for
point load. If the picked point is valid it will be marked with a red cross. While on pick
mode snap setting and spacing can be changed to ease the action. Default snap
spacing of 100 mm is provided. Then click on Create to create the load. Load created
is represented in the main view (if point load toggle ON) and the tool in load category
colour. The dialog remains open to create the next load.
5.15.3
Line Load
Clicking Line load opens a dialog. Line load is a linearly varying load. A positive
panel line load acts in the direction of normal but away from it. You need to specify the
category, start and end, intensity and location. The default position offered is from the
center of the panel to the start vertex joint.
139
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 5.52
line load. A dashed rubber band line appears from the point picked. Then pick point 2
for line load. While on pick mode snap setting and spacing can be changed to ease the
action. Default snap spacing of 100 mm is provided. Then click on Create to create the
load. Load created is represented in the main view (if point load toggle ON) and the tool
in load category colour. The dialog remains open to create the next load.
5.15.4
Patch Load
Figure 5.53
Clicking Patch load opens a dialog. Patch load is applied to specific areas of the
panel with uniform intensity. You need to specify the category, intensity, and location
either three or four points in the plane of the panel. The default position offered is a
triangular patch connecting vertex1, vertex2 and center of the panel.
140
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
patch load. A rubber band starts appearing from the picked points. To cancel picking
operation, double-click on the panel view. To create a triangular patch, double click
after picking point3. The fourth point if invalid (internal angle > 180 deg.) then only a
triangular patch will be created.
5.15.5
Area loads shading scheme
Area loads are represented by a solid fill over the entire panel in the main view. Fill colour
is based on the load intensity. A specific colour can be assigned to start intensity and end
intensity. The program computes the colour for any intermediate load applied. For
example if a panel has 5 kN/m2 load applied and another panel has 10 kN/m2 load
applied, the start intensity colour will be assigned to the 5kN/m2 loaded panel and end
intensity colour will be applied to the 10 kN/m2 loaded panel. If another panel is loaded
by 7 kN/m2 an intermediate colour between start and end intensity will be applied.
Figure 5.54
The shading scheme helps to identify the loading pattern on a floor area. This colour
setting is saved with the job. Default colour setting for area load fill can be configured
from File>Configure>Preferences>Colours.
141
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
5.16 Load Combinations and Categories
Figure 5.55
Having applied loads to the model this dialog gives you control over the
circumstances under which they are included in the analysis and the partial safety
factors to be applied.
The dialog has two main panels in which the data for each combination appears. The
combinations scroll in tandem with each other so that all the relevant data are always
visible.
5.16.1
Load combinations
5.16.1.1
Add
This button creates a new load combination ready for you to enter its data. You may
have an unlimited number of combinations.
5.16.1.2
Remove
This button is enabled if one or more combinations are selected and will remove them. It
does not affect any load data but only the load combination data.
5.16.1.3
Combination Reference
It is a suitable name so that the combination can be identified. It is also useful to give a
meaningful name so that the purpose of the combination is clear as this name appears in
the results and printout.
5.16.1.4
Limit State
This is used when transferring information to CADS Design Applications. It allows you to
specify which load combinations are to be treated as Serviceability Limit State (SLS) or
142
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Ultimate Limit State (ULS). There is also an Ignore option which omits the combination from
a particular analysis run. This is useful for complex jobs when you are trying to optimise the
model for particular combinations and do not wish to wait while the application
calculates all the combinations defined.
5.16.1.5
Elastic analysis
This offers Linear, and P-Delta options for the particular load combination. Linear is a
standard linear elastic analysis. P-Delta takes account of the second order effects. PDelta can also be temporarily turned off by using the Analysis Options. See P-Delta
analysis for details and limitations.
5.16.1.6
Plastic analysis
This allows plastic analysis to be applied to the combination when set to Yes. See Plastic
Analysis for details and limitations.
5.16.2
Load Categories
A Load Category is an attribute of a load which allows you to assign different partial
safety factors to it for different load combinations (see below). A category is used rather
than the load name itself as normally you only need a few, such as dead, imposed or
wind whereas you may need many loads. This provides a convenient way of grouping
loads together.
Three load categories Dead, Imposed and Other are provided by default and you can
add as many as you require.
5.16.2.1
Category ref.
A name to identify the category. This appears in the category list box in the Load editor.
5.16.2.2
Category
This is a generic type to enable design applications to handle the combinations correctly.
There are three types Dead, Imposed and Other.
5.16.2.3
Show load
This is an untitled tick field which allows loads of certain categories to be turned on or off
when the loads and moments display toggles are on.
5.16.2.4
Load Category colours
This untitled colour swatch field allows you to set different colours for each load
according to its category. This makes it easier to tell which Dead, Imposed or any other
category of load has been applied.
5.16.2.5
Combination data
This is where the partial safety factors for the particular combination are entered against
each category. For any categories that are inappropriate to the particular combination
enter a value of 0.000.
143
A3D MAX
Function Guide
5.16.2.6
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Remove
This button allows you to delete a category if it is no longer required. It is enabled when
one or more categories are highlighted. You cannot remove a category if it is in use by a
load type.
5.16.2.7
Load Editor
Allows you to open the Load Editor directly.

5.16.2.8
Display selection
This is a toggle acting on a selected load combination. It turns on the show load tick for
all load categories that have non-zero partial safety factors. This means that only loads of
those categories are shown in the main view. Thus only loads that are effective under
that load combination are indicated.
As an adjunct to this display the effective load categories are shown in a dialog with their
partial safety factors. This provides a useful summary of the combination.
While in this mode you can scan the load combinations by picking the buttons at the
head of each combination. You can also use the list box in the Categories for display
dialog.
Picking the display Selection button will turn the feature off and restore the display as
before.
Right clicking on the load combinations dialog other than the spreadsheet brings a menu
with the following options:
Set all Show Loads Set to show all load categories.
Restore previous Show Loads Restores previous setting.
144
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
6.0 Tools Menu
Figure 6.1
This is a miscellany of facilities to assist in creating the model.
6.1
Mirror Selection
This tool flips the selected objects about the centre of the selection relative to the
plane chosen.
Figure 6.2
The objects remain attached to the rest of the model, which may then deform according
to the nature of the mirroring. This option effectively moves objects. It does not copy
them.
6.2
Quick Member
The Quick Member tool allows you to add members simply by picking joints.
145
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 6.3
Picking this tool will open to the Set Member properties dialog to allow you to set the
various properties for the members you are about to add. In most cases, all you will need
to select is the member type but you can also change the end fixities, orientation and
handing attributes.
Member type this is the list of member types defined for the job.
Start and End fixity this is the fixity to the joints at End 1 and End 2 of the member.
Orientation this is the rotation of the member about its longitudinal axis.
Handing this is the direction of the member section and is applicable to unsymmetrical
sections.
However, all of these can be changed later, if you prefer, using the Member Attributes
dialog. See the topic on Edit > Member Attributes for more details.
Pick OK when you are satisfied with the settings.
The pointer will change to a box with cross hairs to indicate that you are in Quick
Member mode. Pick the joint you wish to start the member from (End1) and then pick the
end joint (End2). Carry on picking joints to continue a run of members. To terminate a run
of members, pick anywhere over the background. You can resume adding members by
picking another joint or node.
Figure 6.4
While you are in Quick Member mode if you right click the mouse the pop up menu
allows you to modify the member settings before you continue. Thus you can remain in
Quick Member mode but place different members or apply different attributes.
Pick start joint this allows you to pick a joint and start a new run of members. It is
equivalent to picking on the background as described above.
146
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Select Member type opens the Set Member Properties dialog so you can choose
another member type or change the various member attributes before continuing to
place members.
End mode This finishes the Quick Member session. Double clicking on the background
also finishes the Quick Member session. The pointer returns to normal to indicate this has
happened.
6.3
Quick Panel
The Quick Panel tool allows you to add panels simply by picking joints similar to the
quick member tool.
Picking this tool opens Panel properties dialog to allow you to set the various properties
for the panel you are about to add.
These properties are described in more detail under the Panel properties heading later
but briefly:
Thickness is the thickness of the panel.
Rigidity panels can affect the structural behaviour of the frame by imposing constraint
on the joints. Non-rigid panels do not constrain the joints.
Material is the material of the panel
Alignment determines the position of the panel in relation to the plane of its joints. It can
be Centre, Top, Bottom or aligned to User offset values.
Load distribution The way in which loads applied to a panel are distributed onto the
supporting members can be specified. This is effectively the span direction of the panel. It
can be set separately for normal loads and loads in the plane of the panel. The latter is
particularly relevant to walls.
Normal loads allow two-way or one-way distribution. If one-way is chosen then there is a
choice of X axis or Z axis directions. X axis direction spans parallel to the X direction thus
loading Z direction members.
In-plane loads allow two-way and one-way distribution similar to normal loads above.
They also have two additional distributions, Bearing and Hanging, where the entire inplane load is transferred to one edge.
All of these can be changed later, if you prefer, using the Panel properties dialog. See
the topic on Edit > Panel properties for more details.
Pick OK when you are satisfied with the settings.
The mouse pointer will change to a panel with cross hairs to indicate that you are in
Quick Panel mode. Pick the joint from which you wish to create the panel. Picking four
joints successively creates a quadrilateral panel. Picking joints can be continued for run
of panels.
147
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
While you are in Quick Panel mode if you right click the mouse the pop up menu allows
you to modify the panel properties before you continue. Thus you can remain in Quick
Panel mode but place panels with different properties.
Figure 6.5
Create Triangular Panel To create triangular panels pick three joints and select this
option from right click pop up dialog.
Pick start joint this allows you to pick a joint and start a new run of panels.
Change Panel Attributes opens the Panel Properties dialog so you can change the
various panel attributes before continuing to place panels.
End mode This finishes the Quick Panel session. Double clicking on the background also
finishes the Quick Panel session. The pointer returns to normal once this is completed.
6.4
Quick Support
The Quick support tool allows you to apply pre-set support types to joints by means
of a Quick Support Palette.
Figure 6.6
This palette offers the pre-defined support types as described under Edit> Support Types
which can be applied in two ways.
If no joints are selected then pick the required support type from the palette and then
pick the joints to apply it in succession.
Alternatively, select the joints to have a common support type applied and pick the type
from the palette to apply to them all.
If you require a non-standard support type that you have already defined, select
the joints to apply it to and pick the User Support Type button in the palette. This opens
the Joint Properties dialog on the Supports page where you choose the required type as
described under Edit >Support Types.
148
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
If you require a new non-standard support type, select the joints to apply it to and
pick the New Support Type button in the palette. This opens the Joint Properties dialog on
the Supports page where you can create a new one as described under Edit >Support
Types.
To clear the current support type, pick it again or double click the background of the
Main view.
To close the palette pick the small X on its title bar or pick the Quick Support tool bar
button or its menu item.
6.5
Split Selected Members
This tool enables you to split selected members by inserting one or more joints into
them. There are two main reasons to split members:
1. to introduce joints so that other members may be attached or
2. to alter the alignment of a member.
Figure 6.7
The tool offers a choice of joint insertions:
Distance splits all members at the specified distance from end1, unless the member is
not long enough, in which case it is ignored.
Percentage splits all members at the specified percentage of their length from end1.
No. of Joints allows you to insert a specified number of joints equally spaced along the
members. Thus one joint divides the member into two.
Selection type reports whether the split is to be applied to a single member or a multiple
selection.
149
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Shortest Length reports the length of the shortest member in the selection. This is to assist
when deciding the distance of the joint from End 1.
Apply inserts the specified joints.
Close closes the dialog without inserting joints.
A member with uniform loads when split, copies it into all the sub members. The other
load types are not implemented.
When members which have been designated as Design Objects are split this status is not
bestowed on the new members thus created. This meant that in many cases new design
objects needed to be created which was time consuming.
There have been a number of enhancements to the split member tool so that design
objects are handled more logically. Most of the work is behind the scenes in the actual
data handling with the only obvious difference being a new option in the split member
dialog.
Maintain continuity for grouping
If this option is set then the split member tool will endeavour to keep the new members
thus formed as part of a designed object. Exactly what happens depends on the
situation and is set out below. The detailed explanations may seem complicated but in
essence if you set the option to ON then the tool tries to maintain the original structural
behaviour.
6.5.1.1
Splitting a member that is not a design object
No change to the present action. This just creates the new members and reduces the
parent.
Splitting a member that is an ordinary design object
The basic assumption is that you will also want the new member to be designed so that it
will be assigned as a design object in the same groups as the parent. The question is
whether these new members should still be regarded as one like the parent was
originally.
If you set the Maintain continuity option to ON then the members will be joined as part of
the parents design object. This means they will be designed as one member.
If you set it to OFF then the new members will be added to the design group but as
separate design objects so they will be designed separately. Note that if the design
group is set to have common design then the new members will also be set for a
common design.
Splitting a member that is part of a joined design object
The basic assumption is also that you want the new member designed to be similar to
above.
If you set the Maintain continuity option to ON then the members will remain joined as
part of the parents design object.
150
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
If you set it to OFF then the new members will be added to the design group but as
separate design objects so they will be designed separately. Depending on the new
members location within the design object the existing design object may be split into
lesser joined objects. The program will endeavour to maintain as much logical joining as it
can. This option is not likely to be used very often but may be appropriate when splitting
the end member in a joined run.
6.6
Remove Selected Loads
This removes the current or selected loads/moments from selected members or joints in
the model. It does not delete the load type definition itself. As this is a quite frequently
used option it has its own toolbar button, which is enabled when any load itself is
highlighted in the main view.
6.7
Old Grouping
This gives access to the original Grouping for SW design dialog, and method, introduced
in A3Dv1.70. It is included for backwards compatibility with existing A3Dv1xx and v2.xx
jobs. Details of this method can be found in Appendix B.4. However, for all new SW
designs you are advised to use the new grouping wizard which offers much better
facilities.
6.8
Layout Grouping wizard
A major new feature has been added to allow easy generation of General Arrangement
layouts from the model that can be exported to drafting applications via DXF file transfer.
It works on the principle of setting up groups of members as a 3D stick model or as planes
to be output in a DXF file for reading by a drafting application.
The 3D stick model just puts out the member geometry so you can enhance it in the
manner you wish in the drafting application.
The plane output can be in the form of a plan, elevation (which also serves for sections)
and may include grid and member references. There is also a special version of the
elevation for portal frames. A Layout Grouping Wizard is provided to assist you with this.
6.8.1
Create Layout Group
Before you start it, you should select those objects that are to form part of the group.
Select the member in the plane you wish to create and pick Design > Create Layout
Group. The figures below show a typical plane selection. The Wizard consists of four
pages, with just a few simple inputs, most of which are defaults that will not need to be
changed often.
151
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 6.8
Figure 6.9
The opening page has two input fields.
Layout style The first page of Layout grouping Wizard allows you to choose whether the
layout is a Plan, Elevation or Portal style and enter a name for it. DXF output will vary
depending on the style. For example elevation style will not have horizontal grid lines or
sections at the intersections unlike the plan style.
Reference name this allows you to give your group a name. This name will appear in the
Layout group editor and explorer tree.
Next> Takes you to the next step in the process. A warning is shown if selected objects
do not lie in a plane and consequently next is disabled. You have to come out of the
wizard and modify the selection.
Cancel this terminates the Wizard without setting up a group.
Help shows help relating to this page of the Wizard.
152
A3D MAX
Function Guide
6.8.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Grid line and dimension settings
All the layout objects are broken into two sets of lines, represented by intersecting grid
lines in two directions. This page allows you to specify the grid and dimension settings. The
Horizontal grid label options are disabled if you are setting up an Elevation.
Figure 6.10
Label Position the tick box indicates whether grid labels are present at all. The adjacent
list box allows you to set where the labels should appear whether to the left, right or both
sides of the horizontal grid lines or top, bottom or both sides of the vertical grid lines.
Style the list box allows various styles of grid labeling to be set, A,B,C
, a,b,c, or 1,2,3. Please note here that the same style cannot be set for both
horizontal and vertical grid lines. One needs to be numeric and the other alphabetic.
Extension length is the distance to scale of the ends of the grids beyond the
intersections. The grid labels and bubbles are placed beyond that.
Dim location is the position of the grid dimension lines. The choice depends on the grid
label position and includes None if you wish to suppress dimensions.
Back> takes you to the preceding step to make corrections.
Next> takes you to the next step.
6.8.3
Layer and file information
The layers, LineTypes, text styles, sizes etc. used to create the DXF output, are controlled
by Layer information files (LIF). They enable you to set up various styles according to your
requirements and save them by name. This can be done via the Layout Grouping Editor
described later.
153
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Folder for LIF you can specify the LIF file name with the path to be used for the layout
group.
Figure 6.11
Scale Factor you can create the plan and elevation to a specified scale on a particular
drawing. You can enter the desired scale factor.
Folder for DXF is the path to the folder where you want the DXF files to be created. By
default it is the current job folder. The button opens a file browser for you to choose
an alternative location.
DXF file name is the name you wish to give the DXF file to be created. This name will be
the one used when importing the DXF file into AutoCAD or other drafting packages. The
button opens the file browser so you can view the existing DXF files in the folder.
<Back this returns you to the previous page where you may review or modify the
settings if you wish.
Next> this takes you on to the next page.
6.8.4
End Layout Grouping Wizard
This page confirms the completed layout structure before you create it. You can go back
to any part of the wizard and amend the settings if you wish.
154
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 6.12
Group structure the scrolling panel shows the hierarchy of the group in Explorer style.
The icons shown will depend on the layout objects and their component analytical
objects.
the grid icon represents the group containing the layout objects.
the grid line icon represents the layout object.
this is the standard member icon used in the analysis model.
Finish this will create the group and close the Wizard.
<Back this returns you to the previous page where you may review or modify the
settings if you wish.
The Grouping hierarchy can also be shown in the main explorer panel. Right click over
the job reference at the top of the tree and pick Sort by > Layout Group from the menu.
The tree is now shown in a similar manner to the panel in the Grouping Wizard.
Note that the DXF file has not been created but only the settings for the layout. The DXF
file can be written when you are ready and will incorporate any changes to members
etc. that may take place in the meantime.
6.9
Layout Group Editor
Once the group is created you can view, modify the property of layout groups with
this editor. Its contents vary slightly based on the view.
155
A3D MAX
Function Guide
6.9.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Results Panel
Figure 6.13
Its contents vary slightly based on the view. The available views are group view and
object view.
Layout group view gives the property of the group. Item lists the groups available, type
(plan, elevation, portal) and the dxf file name.
Layout object view gives the display label name and the object type.
6.9.2
Sort
The content of the display panel is controlled by the view chosen. The view can be the
layout group view or the layout object view.
6.9.3
Property
Layout group property you can view and modify the properties - group reference, grid
line extension, LIF, DXF path and file name. Other properties that can be edited include
the label position, style and the dimension line location.
156
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 6.14
Layout object property displays the object type and associated grid line type. The
object type may be a Primary member, Secondary member, Bracing member or a
Column member. The grid line types are primary, secondary or invisible.
Figure 6.15
Each object is drawn on a different layer with the associated properties.

157
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Primary member Primary member layer

Secondary member Secondary member layer
Bracing member Bracing member layer
Grid line Grid line layer
Column Section layer
Similarly the labels for the above are also drawn on different layers.
Primary grid lines have a single labelling style e.g. A, B, C or 1, 2, 3. Secondary grid lines
have a suffix attached to the label e.g. A1, 1a etc. No grid lines are drawn for a bracing
member. In the present version, all inclined members are considered to be bracing
members.
6.9.4
Creating DXF files
When you have created your layout groups they are stored with the job and can be
output at any time. You can also edit the grid settings and the output scale using the
Layout Group Editor via the Properties dialog. The editor allows you to export your layouts
individually or as a batch when required using Create DXF File.
6.10 Layer Information File

The scale setting is important because this influences the text height and symbol sizes in
the drawing, although you can subsequently use the drafting applications own tools to
alter this if you wish.
You can also configure the output to suit your drafting standards using the LIF File Editor.
LIF files are Layout Information Files and contain the layer and style settings. Two versions
are supplied by default: one for the general building forms and one for the portal
elevations. The Layout Grouping Wizard chooses the appropriate one, automatically for
you but you may override it if you wish.
Options in LIF file are described below.
DXF objects gives details of the object name, layers, style, line start offset, end offset,
label alignment and orientation. They include
Primary member
Primary member label
Secondary member
Secondary member label
Bracing member
Bracing layer
Grid line layer
Grid line dimension text
Bubble label
Section
Sections label
158
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 6.16
Each DXF object has a layer and style attached to it. Their properties can be edited in
the next tab page.
Figure 6.17
159
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Layer & Style has the layer name. Layer properties that can be changed include line
type, line weightage (thickness) and colour. Properties of the font style are the font name
and font height.
160
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
7.0 Analysis Menu
Figure 7.1
This is the part of the program that actually carries out the frame analysis. There is a tool
to set up various options for the analysis and tools to show the results on screen. Printed
and other forms of output are covered by the topic on File > Printing.
7.1
Calculate
This activates the Analysis Calculations. Depending on the options set the analysis is
carried out in a number of stages. These are described briefly here and more detail is to
be found in various appendices as noted below.
Figure 7.2
While the calculations are under way a progress dialog is shown.
Loading data fetches all the data needed for the analysis. During this process it does
the following:
Pre-process In all cases the job data undergoes an internal audit to ensure it is
complete. There are no un-referenced objects and that editing has not invalidated some
of the data. For instance the program checks that all position dependent loads fit still on
their members.
Auto Save If the job has not been saved after some data change then the preprocessor will automatically save it. This is to avoid corruption should there be a failure
during a protracted calculation run.
Initialising calculations prepare the matrices for elastic analysis solution.
161
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Solving stiffness matrix carries out the main solution process. This can take some time if it
is a large job with many load combinations. Non-prismatic members slow the process
somewhat as there is addition integration to take account of the variable geometry. The
program makes an accurate integration of the properties not a simple averaging of end
properties.
The calculation process then varies according to the type of analysis being under taken.
Elastic analysis passes directly to the calculation of final results. Details of this method
are given in Appendix A.1.
Plastic Analysis carries out a preliminary elastic analysis similar to that above. Then at the
Results stage you can review the progress of hinge formation and readily make changes
to the model before under-taking possibly longer and more detailed Plastic Analysis
calculations. See the Tabular and Graphical Results below and Appendix A.4 for details
and recommendations in using Plastic Analysis.
P-Delta analysis carries out a second order analysis to take account of the effect on
load positions of the deformation of the frame. Details of the method are given in
Appendix A.3.
Torsionless analysis is a unique facility where the user may elect to ignore the torsional
stiffness of the members in the model. This prevents unwanted torsional effects
manifesting in structures that would otherwise be regarded as suitable for ignoring
torsional effects under BS 8110 part 2 clause 2.4.1, or similar situations. Clearly this option
should not be used for structures which rely on torsion in total, or in part, for their stability.
Details of the method are given in Appendix A.2.
Calculating final results having obtained the stiffness matrix, and carrying out any
additional processes as noted above, the program then calculates the end effects for
every member. These are then used to obtain the final interval results for the members
when displayed.
Once the analysis calculations have been completed the Tabular and Graphical Results
become available.
7.2
Analysis Options
There are a number of options that controls the analysis of the model. Generally,
they allow modification of the model to include or suppress some aspect so that
alternative solutions can be tried.
162
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 7.3
7.2.1
Note
This is a warning to be alert for a particular problem that can arise when dealing with
what are apparently 2D plane frames but actually require to be dealt with as 3D
structures because of the disposition of its members or loads. This is not an error in the
calculations but a frequently encountered problem with the model as defined by users
which may cause some concern.
7.2.2
Options
7.2.2.1
Auto fixity
The program requires that every joint has at least one restraint, either to a support or to a
member, to prevent it spinning and thus causing a "mechanism" error in the analysis
calculations. Failure to provide the necessary restraint is most likely to occur in fully pinned
frames. To overcome this, the program can automatically fix one member to a joint,
where required. This is accomplished by setting this option. The program will report that it
has applied automatic fixity if it finds that it needs to.
This automatic fixing is usually satisfactory but can result in the structure not behaving as
the designer would wish, particularly if it is a 3D structure which has significant torsional
effects. In this case, the designer is advised to select the appropriate members to fix
manually.
163
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Early versions of the program always carried out this autofix procedure and displayed a
warning. This change has been introduced to reduce the risk of overlooking unexpected
effects and to enable the user to precisely define the model more easily.
Note that only true 2D frames with all members, loads and applied moments in the XY
plane can confidently have Auto Fixity set, as the arbitrary fixing of one member has no
effect on the structural behaviour.
7.2.2.2
Consider Edge Continuity
This option, when selected takes account of the edge restraints during load distribution.
Normal components of area loads, panel point, line, patch loads are distributed through
the grid method. In-plane area loads are distributed through the bisection method.
If this option is not selected, all panel edges will be considered simply supported. This is
done irrespective of edge restraints set to the panel. Area loads follow the bisection
method and other panel loads follow the grid method of distribution.
7.2.2.3
Supporting edge members to be stiff
Setting this option treats all edge members of the panel as being stiff (high major moment
of inertia) during panel load distribution.
7.2.2.4
Plastic Analysis
This option determines whether the setting for Plastic in the load combinations editor is to
be taken into account or ignored. The switch allows the presence of Plastic analysis to be
examined easily by simply turning it on or off without having to redefine each load
combination. See Appendix A.2, Plastic Analysis for more information.
7.2.2.5
P-Delta Analysis
This option determines whether the setting for P-Delta effects in the load combinations
editor is to be taken into account or ignored. The switch allows the presence of P-Delta
effects to be examined easily by simply turning it on or off without having to redefine
each load combination. See Appendix A.3, P-Delta Analysis for more information.
7.2.2.6
Torsionless analysis
This setting determines whether a so called torsionless analysis is carried out or not. This is
a special form of analysis calculation which emulates common design office
assumptions when designing frames that do not rely on torsion for stability, which is the
case with every day frames. See Appendix A.2, Torsionless Analysis for the benefits of this
method.
7.2.2.7
Tension/compression
This determines whether to take account of the direction limitations that may have been
applied to any members. Members may be marked as being suitable for sustaining
tension or compression only, and if this setting is on they will be ignored in any load
combination where they are subject to the opposite axial force. This option allows you to
include or exclude them easily to examine the effect without having to re-define the
member each time. See Edit > Member Attributes for more details.
164
A3D MAX
Function Guide
7.2.2.8
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Lift off supports
This determines whether to take account of the lift off setting that may have been
applied to any support. Supports may be marked as being subject to lift off (i.e. unable
to sustain upward forces) and if this setting is on, they will be ignored in any load
combination where they are subject to upward force. This option allows you to include or
exclude them easily to examine the effect without having to re-define the support each
time. See Edit > Support Properties for more details.
7.3
Tabular Results
The tabular results allow you to review the detailed values for joint displacements,
support reactions, hinge formation (under plastic analysis) and collapse analysis, member
effects (forces and moments) and member deflections. In addition there are summations
checks to ensure consistency in the data and simple stress reporting to give a feel for
the structure. These values are shown for each load combination but the member effects
and deflections have an option to show an envelope of results encompassing all the
load combinations.
7.3.1
Displacements
This shows the joint displacements and rotations for each load combination. The
directions are relative to the global axes.
Figure 7.4
Use the Comb buttons to page between load combinations or go directly to a
combination by picking it from the adjacent list box.
165
A3D MAX
Function Guide
7.3.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Reactions
Figure 7.5
This shows the force and moment reactions at the supports for all load combinations. The
directions are relative to the global axes. If a support is marked as Lift off and a load
combination produces this effect, then the joint is so marked. Use the Comb buttons to
page between load combinations or go directly to a combination by picking it from the
adjacent list box.
7.3.2.1
Summations
This provides checks in the analysis calculations as an additional validation of the

calculations.
Figure 7.6
166
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
This takes the form of summing all loads in each global direction against the support
reactions, and moments about global axes plus the load moments (relative to the origin)
against the support moments and reaction moments. These values are tabulated with
the result of the summation, which should be 0.0 in all cases.
7.3.2.2
Reactions
Picking this, returns you to the Reaction results for that load combination.
7.3.3
Hinge Formation
This lists all the load combinations that have been marked for plastic analysis. For each
combination, the load factor is reported at which the first plastic hinge would form, and
the member reference and position along it.
If no combinations are marked for plastic analysis then it reports No combinations are
selected as plastic".
Figure 7.7
7.3.3.1
Select Collapse Analysis
Highlight the appropriate combination and pick this button to select them for collapse
analysis. Normally combinations with first hinge load factor less than one should have
collapse analysis Yes and those greater than one No. You can of course do whatever
you think fit!
The use of this facility is explained in detail in Appendix A.4, Plastic Analysis.
167
A3D MAX
Function Guide
7.3.4
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Collapse Analysis
Figure 7.8
This results sheet shows the collapse analysis for a particular combination provided a
plastic analysis has been undertaken. Otherwise it reports "Combination not selected for
collapse analysis".
For those combinations marked Yes for collapse analysis, the history of plastic hinge
formation up to collapse is displayed with the following information:
Hinge No. hinge number in sequence of formation.
Load Factor the load factor at which the hinge forms.
Member ref. the reference number of the member in which the hinge forms.
Hinge Position the position along the member at which the hinge forms.
Local Buckling Classification the local buckling status of the hinge. This is available only
for SW members having the default Mpr (reduced plastic moment) option set.
Unhinge report of any unloading (transient) hinges listed after the new hinge which
initiates the unloading.
Finally the number of hinges formed at collapse is reported below the main panel.
The hinges may form a full plastic collapse mechanism or, if P-Delta effects have been
included and are significant, collapse due to instability may occur with a lesser number
of hinges formed.
The report does not distinguish between instability and mechanism collapses but if
necessary you can run comparative plastic collapse analyses with and without
PDelta effects to see for yourself either by using the global P-Delta switch in the Analysis
options dialog or running two comparative load combinations.
168
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
More details on the use of this facility are given in Appendix A.4, Plastic Analysis.
Use the Comb buttons to page between load combinations or go directly to a
combination by picking it from the adjacent list box.
7.3.5
Effects
This shows the local effects in each member for all load combinations. The directions are
relative to the local member axes.
7.3.5.1
Member Effects
Analysis type reports whether elastic or plastic analysis applies to the particular
combination.
Effects load factor reports the load factor applicable to the particular combination. For
elastic analysis it is always 1.0 but will vary for plastic analysis.
Interval is the position number, 0 being at End1 of the member, and the distance along
the members of each interval reported. This can be configured from File > Configure >
Preferences > Sizes > Tabular Results Interval
Figure 7.9
Axial force compressive forces are positive.
Shear Normal upward shear to the left is positive, when viewed with member End 1 at
the left.
Shear Lateral forward shear to the left is positive, when viewed looking down on the
member with end 1 at the left.
169
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Moment Torsion anti-clockwise torsion is positive when viewed along the member from
end 1.
Moment Normal moments tending to cause sagging when the member is viewed from
the side are positive.
Moment Lateral moments tending to cause sagging when the member is viewed from
the top with end 1 at the left are positive.
7.3.5.2
Maximum moments
This shows the true maximum values which may occur between the reported intervals
and their positions.
7.3.5.3
Controls
Memb these buttons allow you to page between members and you can go directly to
a member by picking it from the adjacent list.
Comb these buttons allow you to page between load combinations or go directly to a
combination by picking it from the adjacent list.
Intervals this input allows you to specify the number of intervals to report along every
member. More intervals give finer results but take longer to calculate which may be
significant on a large job. This can be configured from File > Configure > Preferences >
Sizes > Tabular Results Interval
Apply forces a recalculation for the number of intervals specified.
Envelope shows the range of values for shears and moments for all load combinations
under the control of the Shear and Moment radio buttons. The Comb buttons and list are
disabled while this option is active.
7.3.5.4
Stress
This shows simple maximum stress values for members in place of the Maximum Moments.
The stresses reported are maximum Compression, Tension and Positive and Negative
bending about the principle member axes.
The stress calculations are simply Force/Area and Moment/Section Modulus (for the
extreme fibre). At present the stresses reported are confined to prismatic members.
These reports are provided as a guide and in no way represent an adequate design or
check on a members suitability.
Moment this returns you to the maximum moment results for that member and load
combination.
Stresses are not reported if the envelope mode is set.
170
A3D MAX
Function Guide
7.3.6
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Deflections
This shows the deflections in each member for all load combinations. The directions are
relative to the local member axes.
Figure 7.10
7.3.6.1
Member Deflections
Analysis type reports whether elastic or plastic analysis applies to the particular
combination.
Effects load factor reports the load factor applicable to the particular combination. For
elastic analysis it is always 1.0 but will vary for plastic analysis.
Interval is the position number, 0 being at End1 of the member, and the distance along
the members of each interval reported. This can be configured from File > Configure >
Preferences > Sizes > Tabular Results Interval
Displacement Axial is positive in the direction of the member.
Displacement Normal is positive upward when viewed with the member horizontal and
0 orientation.
Displacement Lateral is positive away from the viewer with the member horizontal and
0 orientation.
Slope Torsion anti-clockwise torsional rotation is positive when viewed along the
member from end 1.
Slope Normal upward slopes when the member is viewed from the side are positive.
Moment Lateral upward slopes when the member is viewed from the top with end 1
at the left are positive.
171
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The above descriptions assume a member parallel to the X axis at 0 orientation. For
other alignments you may find it easier to imagine the member realigned in such a
manner.
7.3.6.2
Maximum deflections
This shows the true maximum values which may occur between the reported intervals
and their positions.
7.3.6.3
Controls
Memb these buttons allow you to page between members and you can go directly to
a member by picking it from the list adjacent.
Comb these buttons allow you to page between load combinations or go directly to a
combination by picking it from the adjacent list.
Intervals this input allows you to specify the number of intervals to report along every
member. More intervals give finer results but takes longer to calculate which may be
significant on a large job. This can be configured from File > Configure > Preferences >
Sizes > Tabular Results Interval. This setting also controls the number of intervals included in
the printed tables.
Apply forces a recalculation for the number of intervals specified.
7.4
Graphical Results
Figure 7.11
Once the model has been analysed, the moments, forces and deflections of the
structure can be displayed graphically in the model view. This dialog controls the content
of the view.
172
A3D MAX
Function Guide
7.4.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Graph Type
The Graph Type panel allows you to choose which set of results to show.
7.4.1.1
Deflection
This shows the deflected form of the frame. If tool-tips are turned on the relative
displacements at the joints are shown when you pause the pointer over a displaced joint.
They are prefixed by to distinguish them from the joint positions.
Figure 7.12
7.4.1.2
Moments
This shows the moment effects within the frame. If the tool-tips are on, then pausing the
pointer over an ordinate shows the moment at that position. If you pause near the
moment curve then the critical moments at the member ends and maximum span are
shown.
Figure 7.13
7.4.1.3
Shears
This shows the shear effects within the frame. If the tool-tips are on then pausing the
pointer over an ordinate shows the shear at that position. If you pause near the shear
curve then the critical shears at the member ends are shown.
Figure 7.14
7.4.1.4
Axial
This shows the axial effects within the frame. The colour changes to indicate tension or
compression. By default tension is red and compression green. If the tool-tips are on, then
pausing the pointer over an ordinate shows the axial force at that position. If you pause
near the shear curve then the critical axial forces at the member ends are shown.
173
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 7.15
7.4.1.5
Torsion
This shows the torsion effects within the frame. If the tool-tips are on, then pausing the
pointer over an ordinate shows the torsion at that position. If you pause near the shear
curve, then the critical torsions at the member ends are shown.
Figure 7.16
7.4.1.6
Hinge formation
Hinge formation - for those load combinations analysed to collapse, the hinge
formation may be viewed graphically. All the hinges formed up to collapse are shown on
the frame diagram and numbered in sequence. Under the default graphics setting, they
will be shown as simple numbers for speed.
You may like to switch off member and joint numbering to avoid confusion. Alternatively
you can obtain a better hinge display by selecting View > Toggle high quality render.
Hinges which are active at the effects load factor are shown as coloured circles. Hinges
which have unloaded at below the collapse load factor are shown as white circles.
7.4.2
Graph Plane
Figure 7.17
The Graph Plane settings enable you to choose whether to show the moments or shears
in a normal or lateral plane relative to the members, or both. Turning one or the other off
can help to make complex views clearer.
Note that these effects rotate with the member according to its orientation. The other
graph types are unaffected by these settings.
The results for each load combination is shown separately although there is an Envelope
tick box which shows an envelope of all load combinations.
174
A3D MAX
Function Guide
7.4.3
Options
7.4.3.1
Toggle
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Toggle when set, if only one of the Graph Types is shown at a time, once it is cleared,
you can overlay as many as you require. However, it can get quite confusing.
Figure 7.18
7.4.3.2
Envelope
If there is more than one combination available then this enables you to show the current
Graph Type enveloped. The darker fill marks the region below the lower boundary.
If tool-tips are on they show the greater ordinate value or the greater or lesser curve
depending on their proximity to the boundary curves.
Note that the Envelope option is disabled if the Deflection graph type is set.
7.4.3.3
Label
This turns the labels on or off according to the graph types shown. The labels will appear
as simple numbers if the high Quality render setting is OFF or within filled shapes if the
setting in ON. The latter can make them clearer. The decimal displayed can be
controlled from File > Configure > Preferences > Sizes > Result Graph Labels Precision. This
value also controls the precision shown in the tool tips.
7.4.3.4
Auto Update
If this is set then the graphs are automatically redrawn when the Graph Type is changed.
When it is OFF, then you need to pick the Update button to re-draw. This option is
provided to improve performance with very large frames on slow machines.
Figure 7.19
7.4.3.5
Graph Fills
Graph fills turns the shading under the graphs on or off. Turning it off can speed up the
display with large frames on slow machines.
175
A3D MAX
Function Guide
7.4.4
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Controls
Figure 7.20
7.4.4.1
Intervals
This allows to specify at the number of intervals to split the member. In fact the program
uses this as a basic for the longest members and uses this as a basis for the others. It does
not take effect until a new editing session is started. By default, the value is 20. This can be
configured from File > Configure > Preferences > Sizes > Graphical Results Interval.
The program also inserts additional intervals at the ends of position dependant loads,
such as the distributed load illustrated, wherever possible. This assists in finding the actual
values associated with these load discontinuities using tool-tips.
7.4.4.2
Scale factor
This allows you to scale the effects graphs to make them clearer. It does not affect the
model objects, only the height of the graph ordinates. Note, that if a scale factor of 10
is applied the deflection is shown to the same scale as the model and hence gives a true
representation. However, this is usually too small to see clearly.
7.4.4.3
Comb
This allows you to choose which load combination to show. It is disabled if the Envelope
option is on.
7.4.5
Elastic critical load analysis
Elastic critical load analysis (lcr) has been added for those cases where the designer
considers it appropriate. To use elastic critical load analysis pick the Elastic critical load
analysis button. This opens a dialog showing load categories and load combinations.
176
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 7.21
Load category selection The Load categories allow you to set whether to include dead,
imposed categories etc. in the lcr analysis. The default is Dead and Imposed types but
not Others. For convenience there are options to set All or None if you wish to choose just
a few.
Load combination selection The lower panel is where you select which combination to
analyse. Set the Elastic critical load analysis items to Yes or No as required. For
convenience there are options to Select all or not as required.
Elastic critical load analysis criteria lcr is calculated iteratively to a value close to the
true critical value. You can set how close an increment is to be used to Integer (whole
numbers), or 1, 2 or 3 decimal places. You can also set the maximum value to consider
which by default is 10.
Results Pick the Calculate lcr button and the result will appear for each load
combination specified in the Elastic critical load factor fields.
177
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
8.0 Design Menu

This menu allows you to access the integrated design facilities for Steelwork Member
Design. These options become available if you have purchased CADS SW Member
Designer.
Figure 8.1
For those of you familiar with early versions of A3D this supersedes the old grouping
method to provide much better integration and more powerful interface. The old
grouping is still available to deal with jobs that use it and it is described in detail in
Appendix B.4. However, you are recommended to use the facility described here for all
new jobs.
8.1
Overview of Grouping
The following sections give you an outline on the use of Grouping in the context of
Steelwork Member design.
8.1.1
Purpose of Grouping
A3D MAX allows you to group objects into a set of related components. In its simplest
form a group may be a collection of members, such as a truss, which you may want to
keep together so they can be easily handled. For instance all groups can be shown in
the explorer tree so that when picked all its component members are selected.
However, groups can have additional data assigned to them and the main use is to
ascribe design information to the components. The components then become Design
Objects which can link to their appropriate design applications. At present the CADS
Steelwork Member Designer (SWMD) is supported.
The type of data assigned to steelwork design members SW Members includes, design
application (SWMD), design code (BS5950:1990 and BS5950:2000), and template name
(containing design specific data such as restraints).
You can also apply additional parameters such as a Joined condition, which signifies
that a series of analysis objects are joined together as one Design Object. For example, a
steel primary beam may be divided into sub-beams by nodes carrying the secondary
beams for the purposes of the analysis. However, you can choose to define this as one
continuous (joined) design object for the purposes of the design.
In addition you can specify that all the members in a Group are to be designed using
one common serial size, and this is called Common Design.
A3D MAX has a Grouping Wizard to assist in setting up groups easily and the later sections
cover this and give further details and guidance.
178
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.1.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Designing with Groups
When you create a Group it can contain design objects. The nature of the objects will
depend on the design application. For instance, the CADS Steelwork Member Designer
(SWMD) requires its design objects to be SW library or SW Haunch member types, whereas
CADS RC Pad Base Designer (RCPBD) will require them to be support types.
The design process is essentially the same regardless of type and you can do the
following operations:
Checking reports how the design object performed according to the appropriate
checks for the object. Generally, this is in the form of Passed or Failed design status,
usually with some quantifiable data to support that assertion.
Design makes the design application look for the best solution. Normally this will return
Passed with quantifiable data supporting that assertion. It may, however, return an
Error such as No suitable section found, in which case you will need to re-appraise the
model.
Update the analysis model where a design solution may affect the analysis model, such
as a new steel section, the program allows you to update the model and
reanalyse it. In practise this is an iterative process refining the model until all is satisfactory.
Generally, a solution is found in only a couple of iterations unless the structure is
particularly sensitive.
Select for Design you can choose to design or check all or selected design objects. The
latter is particularly useful when trying to refine a design in a large structure.
A more detailed description of the operations with some recommended procedures is
given in the later sections.
8.1.3
Assigning Groups
You can assign members to groups using two methods.

1. Grouping Wizard using the Create Groups option described below.
2. Frame Generators which have options to create suitable groups automatically when
the frame is created. See Model > Create Frame for choices.
8.2
Create Group
This is the tool to create any groups. Before you start this, you should select those
objects that are to form part of the group.
179
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 8.2
The Wizard will vary slightly after the first two pages according to the design application
chosen, but the principles remain the same. The process of creating a Group containing
steelwork design objects is illustrated below.
The Wizard consists of only four or five pages, with just a few simple inputs, most of which
are defaults that will not need to be changed often.
8.2.1
Page 1 Grouping Wizard
The opening page has two options and two input fields.
8.2.1.1
Simple Collection
This option creates an ordinary collection of objects. Choose this if you just want to make
the selection of associated objects easier using the Explorer tree. This kind of group is
known as a Simple Group.
8.2.1.2
Collection of Design/Check objects
This creates a group of Design Objects to which design attributes can be assigned.
Choose this if you want to design or check any objects. This kind of group is referred to as
a Design Group.
8.2.1.3
Reference name
This allows you to give your group a name. Enter a name that reflects the nature of the
design objects as this will make reading the results much easier. Names such as
BeamA1-5, ColumnG4, First Floor Beams are typical examples.
8.2.1.4
Annotation
180
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
This gives you the ability to add brief notes to the group. Such notes can be regarded as
an aide memoir for the designer. (Not implemented in this version).
8.2.1.5
Next>
This is enabled if you choose to create design objects. When you have entered the group
name and notes, this will take you to the next page of the Wizard.
8.2.1.6
Finish
This is enabled if you choose to create a simple collection as there is no further data to
add. Pick this to close the Wizard and create the group.
8.2.1.7
Cancel
This terminates the Wizard without setting up a group.

8.2.1.8
Help
This shows help relating to this page of the Wizard.

A warning is shown if you start the Wizard without having selected some objects in the
main view.
8.2.2
Page 2 Design Information
This is where you enter information about how the objects are to be designed. In the
illustration they are SW Members and the remaining fields will default to appropriate
options or locations according to the kind of objects.
8.2.2.1
Kind of Objects
There is a type of Design Object for each CADS Design Application and this setting tells
A3D MAX which to use for design or checking the objects in the group.
In this example, all the objects are Steelwork Members so the default is SW Members. At
present, only SW members are recognised for Group Design.
181
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 8.3
The objects need to be of the correct Member Type, which for this case may be either
SW Library or SW Haunch member types. If you make a mistake the program will warn
you.
8.2.2.2
Design Code
This allows you to choose alternative design codes for the Group where they are
available. Currently, you can choose between BS5950:1990 and BS5950:2000.
8.2.2.3
Which Template
This allows you to specify a particular template containing the design criteria appropriate
to the type of object. Typically for SW Members templates are where you specify
particular restraint conditions. Templates are a powerful tool allowing you to use most of
the options within the individual designer applications.
Normally, the default template for the particular application is shown. For example, for
SW Members it assumes no restraint other than at the ends of the member. The template
itself is called defaults.smd and the rest of the path will have been set up from your
system settings, and hence rarely needs changing.
If it is set to the wrong location, the browse button alongside will open the File dialog
to help you locate it.
8.2.2.4
New
This button opens the Steelwork Member Designer so that a new template may be
created. Set the required restraints and Save the file, usually in the Template folder. Now
close SWMD and the path to the template will be set up in the above field.
182
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.2.2.5
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Folder for detailed data
This input allows you to specify where any detailed results will be saved. The path shown
depends on the application and is automatically retrieved by the Wizard from the
applications current settings. There is rarely any need to change it but you may, by
entering the path directly or using the File browser button .
8.2.2.6
Finish
This will create the group, applying only the default settings for any further attributes that
may be set up on the following pages. Experienced users may find this a useful shortcut.
8.2.2.7
<Back
This returns you to the previous page where you may review or modify the settings, if you
wish.
8.2.2.8 Next> this takes you on to the next page where further attributes may be set
according to the type of design objects.
8.2.3
Page 3 Member Joining
This page of the Wizard will depend on the type of design objects.
Figure 8.4
8.2.3.1
Joining
SW Members objects can be joined together to form one continuous member for design
purposes. The default is to treat members as individual ones. However there can be
benefits in joining them for design purposes. Primary beams in floors and roofs are a
typical case.
183
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
If you choose to join members the program will search out all members forming a
continuous line in the same direction. This means that several joined members may be
created. Individual members that do not have continuity with their neighbours will be
treated as individual design objects.
If you choose to join members you are offered limits on the alignment of adjoining
members in order for them to be considered as continuous.
Note that all, or none, of the continuous members will be joined according to the chosen
option. If you have a frame and want some continuous members joined and some not,
then you will need to create atleast two groups to differentiate between them.
8.2.3.2
Directional tolerance
This refers to the relative alignment of the members parallel to their local axes. The
maximum tolerance that the Steelwork Member Designer can accept is 5 which is the
default setting. This allows minor bends in members to be regarded as straight.
8.2.3.3
Torsional tolerance
This is relative orientation of one member to the next, about their longitudinal axis. Thus, a
slight twist can be accomodated allowing the member to be regarded as straight.
8.2.3.4
Finish
This will create the group applying only the default settings for any further attributes that
may be set up on the following pages. Experienced users may find this a useful short cut.
8.2.3.5
<Back
wish.
8.2.3.6
Next>
This takes you on to the next page where further attributes may be set according to the
type of design objects.
8.2.4
Page 4 Common Design
A Group can be used to ensure that when its members are designed one common size is
used for all. For instance, all lacers in a truss can be designed to the same size. This is
called Common Design.
This page allows you to invoke Common Design and apply certain preferences.
184
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 8.5
8.2.4.1
Individual Design
If you choose the individual design then each member may have a different serial size
when designed, as a suitable section will be found for each case.
8.2.4.2
Common Design
If this is chosen then a serial size which works for all the members in the group will be
designed, provided one can be found.
8.2.4.3
Size Control
With either design method you can control the criteria for determining the size. These
options are:
Least depth/size this searches for sections using the tables which are organised by serial
depth. It uses the order of these tables to find a suitable size. Generally, the least depth
will be found but it is possible that where two sets of sections have a similar serial depth
the true depths may overlap and the program will not find the absolute least.
Least weight Uses a re-ordered version of the tables to find the lightest section that
works.
Use default (global) setting is available when the Individual Design option is chosen. This
allows you change the size criteria from within the Design Results dialog for an individual
design run. It thus gives the greatest flexibility when you do not wish to have a common
member size.
185
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.2.4.4
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Finish
This will create the group applying only the default settings for any further attributes that
may be set up on the following pages. Experienced users may find this a useful short cut.
8.2.4.5
<Back
wish.
8.2.4.6
Next>
This takes you on to the next page where further attributes may be set according to the
type of design objects.
8.2.4.7 Limitations on member type any arrangement of members can be selected for
Common Design provided they form a valid SW member design object and their main
members are all from the same section table. For example, SW Library types are all from
UB (UK5) or all UC (UK3) or all RSUA section types. You can also have SW Haunch and SW
library members in the group again provided they are based on the same section table.
The program warns you if the grouping is not allowed and you should make an
alternative one or change the section in the Member type or Section type editors.
Depending on the type of design objects there may be an additional data page but in
most cases the next page is the final one.
8.2.5
Page 5 Finished!
The Group is about to be created but before you leave the Wizard you can review its
structure. This can be particularly useful if you have joined members or other collective
attributes and wish to ascertain that the task has been carried out as you expected
before finally creating the group.
You can go back to any part of the wizard and amend the settings, if you wish. In most
cases this is unnecessary and you can continue.
186
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 8.6
8.2.5.1
Group structure
The scrolling panel shows the hierarchy of the group in Explorer style. Its main purpose is
to assist you in determining that the grouping structure to be created is as you intended.
The icons shown will depend on the design objects and their component analytical
objects.
the atom icon represents the group containing the design objects.
the steel beam icon represents the SW member design object. Each type
of design object has its own icon.
this is the standard member icon used in the analysis model.
In the above illustration the group Roof is shown to contain several design objects
although only the first two, 1 and 2, appear in view. Scrolling down reveals the
remainder. Both the design objects contain two members which indicate they are
connected in some way. In the case of SW members they are joined meaning they will
be designed as one member.
You can expand the tree to reveal objects associated with the member in the usual way,
if you wish.
8.2.5.2
Finish
This will create the group and close the Wizard.
187
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.2.5.3
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
<Back
wish.
The Grouping hierarchy can also be shown in the main explorer panel. Right click over
the job reference at the top of the tree and pick Sort by > Group from the menu. The
tree is now shown in a similar manner to the panel in the Grouping Wizard.
8.3
Edit Group
A number of improvements have been made to assist in using the Design Groups. New
tools have been provided to allow members to be added or removed from Design
groups so it is no longer necessary to delete a group and re-create it if new members
need to be added. They are available from the Design Results dialog described below.
8.4
Design Results
Figure 8.7
Once the model has been analysed any design objects created can be checked
or designed. This process is controlled from the Design Results dialog. The following
explanation deals with SW Members as these are the only types supported in this version.
The dialog consists of a panel containing the design results, with a message below
describing the overall status of the analysis and design, plus various controls.
The controls modify the results display and give access to various design and modelling
processes.
8.4.1
Results Panel
The Results Panel is the area in which the Design Objects are shown together with some
related data and a summary of the results from a check or design.
188
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.4.1.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Item
This shows the Design Objects in the form of an explorer style tree. The content of the
display can be modified using the View controls as described below. Expanding the
items shows the members contained within the design object and further relationships
such as joints, member types and supports.
If a Group is set to apply Common Design then it is marked with an asterisk for all objects
in the group.
8.4.1.2
Status
This shows the design status for each design object as follows:
Passed the design/check is satisfactory i.e. all the utilisation factors are 1.0 or
less or not applicable (n/a).
Failed the design/check is not satisfactory i.e. one or more utilisation factors
are greater than 1.0.
N/A the design data is not available (no design/check done) or it has been
invalidated by a change to the model and may require re-analysis and
design/check. The overall status message below the panel will clarify which one
it is.
Error the design/check cannot find a solution for some reason. The reason is
posted in the Design/check notes field when All objects are shown. There are
more details of this below.
Over Design In addition to the declared status the results are coloured to make
the status stand out at a glance. Passed objects are Green, Failed or Errors, Red,
and other cases Black. Thus a quick scroll down the list will soon determine
whether any items still need to be resolved.
The Design Results hitherto have just reported Passed, Failed or Error status. A
number of users have requested the ability to indicate when members are
significantly over designed. This has now been incorporated by means of
showing such items in an alternative colour to the Passed items. The status label
remains as Passed but the colour serves as a ready indicator.
By default the Over design colour is Blue and is triggered if the member is over
designed by 20%. This value of 20% means that if all the utilisation ratios for the
member are less than 0.8 then it will be regarded as over designed.
The colour coding is applied to the Design Results table and display toggle.
The colour can be set in File> Configure > Preferences > Colours > Design Results
- Over design. Note that the Pass and Fail colours can now also be set here.
The level of over design can be set by File > Configure > Preferences > Sizes >
Maximum utilisation for over design report expressed as a percentage.
189
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.4.1.3
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Mbr. Ref.
This shows the Member Reference of the member contained by the design object. If the
design object consists of joined members then it will show the reference of the first and
last members.
8.4.1.4
Template Ref.
This shows the name of the template assigned to the design object. The use of templates
is discussed more fully later. If a Detailed Results file for a particular design object has
been created then this will be shown.
In this program version design to BS5950: 2000 includes checks for deflection locally. This
check uses default span to depth ratio set in SWMD template. You should change this
according to the member end conditions.
8.4.1.5
Analysis Sect.
This is the section used by the analysis model.

8.4.1.6
Design Sect.
This is the section returned by the Design facility to optimise the size of section. It may
differ from the analysis section but you can update the analysis model, if you wish. A reanalysis is required after that, and you are advised to
recheck the design objects.
A recommended procedure for analysis, design and checking is described in Appendix
B.1, The Design Process.
8.4.1.7
Lcl Cap.
Local Capacity reports the most critical load capacity utilisation ratio for all the ULS load
combinations designed. n/a is shown if the design object has not been designed or
checked.
8.4.1.8
Lat. Buck.
This reports the most critical Lateral Buckling utilisation ratio for all the ULS load
combinations designed. n/a is shown if the design object has not been designed or
checked.
8.4.1.9
Tor. Buck.
This reports the most critical Torsional Buckling utilisation ratio for all the ULS load
combinations designed. If the program does not find any potential buckling lengths for
any of the load combinations and if the design object has not been designed or
checked then it will report n/a.
8.4.1.10
Defln
Design to BS5950: 2000 now includes checks for deflection locally. See below.
The Utilisation Ratios and other aspects of steelwork member design are described in
greater detail in the CADS Steelwork Member Designer User Guide accompanying that
application.
190
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.4.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Steel design deflection checks
Full support for the Steelwork Member Designer (SWMD) deflection checks under
BS5950:2000 has now been incorporated. These require Steelwork Member Designer
version 3.10 to be installed.
In accordance with normal practice, this facility reports the local or relative deflections of
members deflections relative to their ends, i.e. bowing of the midpoint relative to the
displaced ends and sway of one end relative to the other. It does not report global
deflections relative to the original unloaded position of the frame (e.g. sway of a multistorey building or tower or the mid-span deflection of a lattice girder). The global
displacements depend on the stiffness of the whole frame and only indirectly on
individual members. They may also be important and should be checked separately by
examining the frame displacement results. A sort and report facility is being prepared
for a future version that will assist with this.
The steel design check uses the default setting in the Steel design templates for
comparison that is typically L/200. You can use alternative values and investigate via the
Details option, or create templates with alternative values for specific instances. The
value is set in SWMD > Geometry & Parameters > Deflection Limits dialog. Attention is
drawn to the fact that the deflection limitation given in ratio terms is applied to the
member length which does not always correspond to the relevant span.
For a symmetrical duo-pitch portal frame, the rafters are separate members for which the
typical span/deflection ratio given as 200 should be expressed as 100 in terms of the
member lengths.
Note that the Automatic design process does not use the deflection as criteria when
offering a section for consideration and marks the result n/a accordingly. It does however
include the deflection utilisation ratio in the Pass or Failed status in Check mode, which
should always be used as the final check anyway.
8.4.3
Overall status messages
Below the Results Panel various messages are displayed showing the status of the analysis
and design results. This allows you to monitor how your design is progressing. The possible
messages are:
8.4.3.1
Re-analysis required
This shows when some change has been made which invalidates the current analysis. The
previous results are not removed, although their status is changed to n/a so that you
can still judge the suitability of the design objects, but bear in mind that a re-analysis is
likely to alter the results. The benefits of working this way are set out in Appendix B.1, The
Design Process.
When this message is shown the Check, Design and Details buttons are disabled to
prevent processing invalid data.
191
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.4.3.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Current analysis number:
This shows the run number assigned to each analysis calculation. This number is
incremented for each calculation. It enables you to compare the design runs with the
analysis to ensure the calculations are up to date.
8.4.3.3
Results are based on Analysis:
This shows the run number of the analysis used by the designs or checks carried out on
the design objects. They must be the same to ensure a properly valid design. This
message may also show a range of analysis numbers if designs or checks have been
carried out on some objects during the development of the design. The message is
prefixed with Warning if the design analysis number is not the same as the current
analysis number.
The above can arise because you are not forced to re-analyse or re-design the objects
to avoid making the process too slow for large jobs. Where changes are small although
the results are strictly invalid they are nonetheless useful while the design is being refined.
This is described in more detail in Appendix B.1, The Design Process.
8.4.4
Show
The Show panel controls the content of the Results Panel. The Design Result dialog layout
has been simplified and hence is easier to use. The Show panel has been reduced to two
options, which shows either a summary of All objects or particular object type. This is
similar to before but now only one click is needed to toggle between them.
8.4.4.1
All objects
This option shows the full list of design objects. This view summarises the status of all the
design object types. The Item and Status are as above but in place of the remaining
data it reports Design/check notes. These are messages that may be passed back by
the design application to clarify some point in the design or to report an error. Thus when
viewing the specific design object results, if you notice an Error status, choose Show > All
objects to see the error message.
8.4.4.2
Current object type
This option allows you to choose the type of design object to show the design results.. At
present only the SW member option is available and is the default display as described
above. If there are no design objects of the type selected then the display will be blank.
Similar to the main explorer new control buttons, which allow you to Expand it
completely, expand by one level, collapse by one level or collapse it completely are
provided in design results dialog. The dialog is sizeable so you can see a wider or longer
list, if you wish. You can also adjust the column widths to suit your screen size.
8.4.5
Group Editing Tools
The panel has tools that facilitate group editing. The operations available are described
below.
192
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.4.5.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Merge
This option allows combining two groups into a single group. If properties of both groups
are different then common design option is removed in the newly combined group. This
is enabled when more than two groups are selected.
8.4.5.2
Move to
This option allows moving design objects from one group to another. Design objects from
two different groups can be selected and moved into another already existing group.
This can be done either through a simple drag and drop or by using Move to button.
On selection a small dialog pops up with a list of groups available. Selecting a group
causes already selected design objects to be moved into the group. This option is
enabled when one or more design objects are selected.
8.4.5.3
Break
This option allows forming a new group by moving objects from existing groups. This
option is enabled when one or more design objects are selected. The objects may be
from two different groups.
Each of the above editing operations can be removed and the model can be restored
to the previous stage using Undo.
8.4.6
Selection
The Selection panel controls the operations you can do with selected design objects.
Note that to make a selection you need to pick the design object icon or the associated
reference. You can use the normal Windows selection methods to make multiple
selections. In addition the corresponding objects in the main view and the main Explorer
tree are also selected. There are also some additional selection options available from
the pop up menu that are described later.
193
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 8.8
8.4.6.1
Properties
This opens the properties dialog which allows you to change some of the parameters
applied to the design objects. Where multiple selections are made, the term multiple
will be shown if the parameters vary across the selection. However, where the
parameters may be reset then any change will be applied to all the selected objects.
Reference is the name of the design object.
Type reports the Design Object type.
Design code is the design code specified for the design object. You can choose
between BS5950:19990 and BS5950:2000
For existing jobs or new ones where you wish to explore the differences you can change
the design code by selecting the design objects from the Design Results dialog, picking
Properties and choosing the Design Code required. You will be asked to confirm the
change to avoid accidental alteration. Note that if you change the code of a design
object, which is part of a Common Design Group then all the objects in that group will be
changed to the same code.
Any previous results will be cleared ready for new Check or Design calculations. This
makes no change to the physical model so there is no need to re-analyse.
194
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The effect of BS5950:2000 on designs is outside the scope of this document. You should
consult the SW Member Designer User Guide for assistance. (Version 3.00 dealing with
BS5950:2000 is currently being prepared).
Template is the path to the template to be used by the selected objects. Alongside is a
button to open the file browser to assist in locating the template.
New Template this button starts up the SW Member Designer application so that you
can create a new template directly, if necessary.
Details file the first field is the path to the location of the Details data files, which will be
used by the Steelwork Designer. Alongside is a browse button if you wish to find an
alternative folder. See below for more information about Details files.
The second field shows the job name followed by a hyphen (e.g.jobname). This is the
basic name that will be used by any detailed results files that are created. When such a
file is created for a particular design object, an ID number generated by the program is
appended and this becomes the reference to that file. (e.g. jobname-4887). You
cannot alter this name.
If a Details file exists it will be used in preference to the specified template when the
design object is Checked, Designed, or opened for Detailed review.
Delete allows you to delete the Details file if it exists. You will be asked to confirm the
action. Deleting the details file allows the checking and design to revert to using the
specified template.
Status shows the current design status.
8.4.6.2
Details
This opens the detailed results for any selected object that has been designed or
checked. In the case of SWMD you can also modify the other parameters controlled by
the program. The result is then passed back to the Design Results dialog. If the section has
changed then this is shown in the Design Section column of the Design Results dialog.
In practice this can be a useful means of modifying the restraints on a particular design
object and if a Details file is created this will become the template for any future
checking or design. If you subsequently wish to revert to the specified template then you
can delete the details file via the Properties dialog as described above. More information
on using this facility is included in Appendix B.1, The Design Process.
8.4.6.3
Check
This button activates the checking of selected design objects. What happens is that the
design application is started and each of the design objects is passed to it, and the
Analysis section is checked and the results passed back to the Design Results dialog. The
important point about the Check option is that the section is not changed by the design
application, just verified.
Checks are carried out quickly and can be used in conjunction with the resulting
utilisation factors to see how close to the ideal the solution is. This way you may decide
195
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
to Design, or optimise, only those objects that are outside an acceptable range of
results.
A Check can be carried out at any time there is a current analysis. You are
recommended to complete any analysis and design sequence with a check on a fully
updated model in order to ensure a strictly valid set of results. See Appendix B.1, The
Design Process for more on this.
8.4.6.4
Design
This button activates the design of selected design objects. In this case the design
application attempts to find the best solution. For SWMD this is a suitable section on the
basis of the Least depth or weight according to the option set in the Settings dialog (see
below). Because it may test a number of sections this process is a little slower than a
simple check.
If an object has Common Design set then all the members of the group will be designed
and the program will choose a section suitable for all. You can tell this is happening as a
dialog appears counting through the objects being designed (as it does with individual
objects). Having then chosen a section it then runs through them again checking the
utilisation factors for the chosen section.
The Design returns the recommended section and its utilisation factors to the Design
Results dialog. No re-analysis has taken place at this stage and hence the results are not
strictly accurate, although if the change is small the result is likely to be close. A reanalysis is not undertaken automatically as it would slow the design process down and
reduces much of the control you need. There is a facility to update the model with the
design sections, see below, and a re-analysis and re-check can then be carried out.
Because of its iterative nature on very large jobs you may find it expedient to Design only
critical objects, which can be identified from a simple check. You may then update the
model as required and re-check. This method usually homes in on a satisfactory result in
only a couple of passes. More details of this approach are outlined in Appendix B.1, The
Design Process.
8.4.7
Settings
This button opens the Design Settings dialog, which allows you to choose the criteria to
be used when using the Design option. Only the SW Design options are supported at
present and there are two options.
Figure 8.9
196
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.4.7.1
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Least depth/size
This chooses the section to offer on the basis of the least depth or size depending on the
section. It searches the section table in ascending order and stops at the first suitable
section.
8.4.7.2
Least weight
This attempts to choose the section to offer on the basis of the least weight. To avoid
searching excessively it finds the first ten satisfactory sections in ascending order and then
chooses the lightest of these.
8.4.8
Update Analysis Model
Figure 8.10
This button allows you to update the analysis model with the recommended section from
a Design. This can be done by adding new sections as new member types or updating
existing member types. If you do the latter then all members and hence design objects
using those types will adopt the new section.
8.4.8.1
Update
Update controls what objects are to be updated.

All objects setting this option attempts to update all the design objects which have a
Design section assigned.
Selected objects setting this option will only attempt to update those design objects
which are currently selected.
Objects of type this setting will attempt only to update those objects of the chosen
type. In this version only the SW Member types are supported.
197
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.4.8.2
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Update method
This allows you to set how the update is to be applied.

Create new Member Types This will create a new member type for each of the design
objects. Here, if the design objects are joined out of different types (such as a haunched
member might be) then new member types will be created for each of the components.
Update existing Member Types This will update the existing member types. Choosing this
option means that any other members using those member types will also be changed.
The message below the option serves as a reminder of this.
OK this activates the update according to the settings described above. The program
will not update if the Design Section is the same as the current Analysis one. Thus if no
changes take place, the analysis remains valid.
Note that any change to a Member Type will mean that the model has changed and
the current analysis becomes invalid. There is a reminder that updating the model will
require re-analysis to confirm a satisfactory solution.
Cancel this returns you to the Design results without updating the model.
8.4.8.3
In the Design Results
When an update occurs the Design section field is cleared. Depending on the type of
section / member, the Analysis section field may show the change. Some of the more
complex forms, or joined members simply show Multiple in this case.
If you want to check quickly on the member types used by any design object you can
expand the explorer tree in the Item column. Alternatively if you want to examine the
member type in more detail; select the design object, open the Member Type editor,
pick Highlight and then double click on the appropriate highlighted entry in the
Member Type editor.
Once any update has occurred as pointed out above, the original analysis is no longer
valid so a re-analysis is required. The status of each of the design objects will be marked
N/A to indicate it is unknown. However, the utilisation factors for the last analysis are
retained so you can still judge the approximate validity of the design.
You are recommended to conclude any design, update and re-analysis sequence with
a complete Check to ensure all results are valid. Appendix B.1, The Design Process
covers this in more detail.
8.4.9
Design Results menu
If you right click the mouse over the Results data area, a pop up menu will appear which
will allow a number of further controls. This menu varies slightly depending on whether the
button was clicked over an object or a group.
198
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Figure 8.11
8.4.9.1
Select All & Clear All
You can also use the pop up menu (right mouse click over the Results Panel) to select all
the design objects or clear the selection of all the design objects.
8.4.9.2
Highlight
This option on the pop up menu will select all the design objects corresponding to any
members selected in the main view. This means you can select a design object from the
view directly if you wish. Selecting members in the main view does not change the design
object selection automatically because you may wish to make selections for viewing
purposes without destroying any selection you are using for design purposes.
8.4.9.3
Delete design object
This removes the design object properties from the objects but not the objects
themselves. For instance a SW Member design object may consist of two members and
deleting the design object removes attributes such as being a design object, being
joined, templates to use etc. but not the actual members or their types etc.
8.4.9.4
Expand all & Expand one level
Expand all completely expands all the objects in the tree till its last root object. Expand
one level expands all the objects by one level. Picking successively will produce a
complete expansion of all the objects.
8.4.9.5
Collapse one level & Collapse all
Collapse one level collapses all objects in the tree to its preceding object. Collapse all
closes all the expanded objects down to the basic list.
8.4.9.6
Common Design
This will clear the common design setting, if set, so that the objects within the group are
no longer constrained to use the same section size.
Similarly, Common Design can be applied to a group by picking it and setting this option.
Note that it applies to the whole group and all objects within it. The same validation is
applied to that described under the Grouping Wizard above.
199
A3D MAX
Function Guide
8.4.9.7
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Delete Group
This removes the group and all the design objects within it. The objects themselves
remain, only their design attributes are removed.
8.4.10
Viewing tools
The program includes a number of tools to assist in viewing the design objects and
results. Primarily they are concerned with identifying the objects so you can visualise them
easily.
8.4.10.1
Viewing design objects
Normally the main view shows the analysis model, which consists mainly of members,
joints, supports and loads.
In order to visualise the design objects there is a Design Objects and Result toggle
button on the Display toolbar. This changes the main view so that it shows design objects
rather than the analysis objects. The main differences are that joints within joined
members are suppressed unless another member is connected to them. If labels are
shown then only the first member of the design object is labelled with the name of the
design object.
Figure 8.12 Analysis Model display
Design Model display
In the above illustration, both the column and rafter members are joined creating four
design objects.
8.4.10.2
Design Status display
When the Design Objects toggle is on they are coloured according to their design status.
You are advised to clear any selection (by double clicking the main view background) so
that the selection highlighting colour does not confuse the display.
Figure 8.13
In the illustration, the green columns (design objects 1 & 2) have both Passed. The red
rafter (3) has Failed and the grey rafter (4) has N/A status indicating that it has not
been designed or checked yet. This is another very quick visual check on the state of the
model.
200
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
201
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
9.0 Window Menu
Figure 9.1
You can open multiple windows on a job, which may be useful, if you are working on a
large structure. You may have partial views in some if you require. Any selected
members will be shown as selected in all views if they are visible. The window with the
current focus can be regarded as the Main View as far as the operation of the program is
concerned.
Changes in one window should be reflected in them all but you might find the use of the
Refresh option from the Pop Up menu useful on occasion.
9.1
New window
This opens a new window, which defaults to a full isometric view. You can close the
Windows at any time except that there must be at least one window left open.
9.2
Cascade
This is a standard windows feature that arranges the windows in staggered, overlapping
style.
9.3
Tile
This is a standard Windows feature that arranges the windows to fit horizontally.
9.4
Arrange icons
This is a standard Windows feature that arranges the windows icons neatly when they are
minimised.
202
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
10.0 Help Menu
Figure 10.1
The help menu aids the user in working with the program. There are various help
resources available as described below.
Quick Guide to A3D MAX opens A3D MAX help file for the application.
Contents opens the standard windows help browser for CADS A3D MAX help.
Using Windows Help opens the standard browser describing the use of the windows
help system.
About CADS A3D MAX opens the about box which gives version details of the
application and how to contact us. Please always quote this version information when
raising any queries concerning the application.
203
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Appendix A Analysis Methods

This appendix contains brief technical descriptions of the various analysis methods
offered by the program.
A.1 Elastic Analysis

The program will carry out an elastic analysis of 2D frames, grillages and 3D structures
using the stiffness method of calculation. It is not necessary to have any knowledge of this
method, although there are a number of standard textbooks available.
A.1.1 Overview of the stiffness method

Briefly, the program assembles a set of simultaneous equations, which may be
represented in the simplified notation
[K] [d] = [P]
where :[K] is the stiffness matrix, which represents the behaviour of the frame and is
derived from the joint and member data.
[P] is the set of forces acting at the joints. Loads and moments applied to
members are translated to joint effects during the calculations.
[d] is the set of displacements. These are, with the exception of the supported
joints, unknown and are found by solving the simultaneous equations.
Each load combination has a corresponding set of these simultaneous equations,
although the stiffness matrix is constant for all cases. Solving these equations gives the
joint displacement and rotations from which the effects on individual members can be
calculated, knowing the loads applied for each combination.
A.1.2 Bandwidth
Because of the inherent symmetry of the stiffness matrix, economies in computation can
be made as the relevant data exists within a band about the leading diagonal of the
matrix. This bandwidth is dependent on how well ordered the joint numbering at the ends
of the members is. The greatest difference in joint number at the end of any member
determines the bandwidth. The smaller this is, the fewer calculation loops are required
and the faster the solution. This can be significant when there are many members.
A.1.3 Assumptions
The method of solution adopted makes some assumptions similar to those implicit in the
traditional hand calculation methods.
The first assumption is that the structure can be represented, with sufficient accuracy, by
one or more perfectly straight members of negligible depth that are joined to each other
by means of connections at their intersections. These connections may be either rigid
204
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
(Fixed option), have total rotational freedom in all axes (Ball option) or rotational freedom
with torsional restraint (Pinned option). There is also a Partial restraint option that allows a
degree of stiffness to be specified.
The next assumption is the customary one for beams, namely that plane sections before
bending remain plane after bending (sections being taken perpendicular to the
longitudinal axis of the member). The behaviour of both the structure as a whole and of
each of its constituent members is assumed to be linear elastic.
Finally, the only deformations considered in the solution are the changes of member
curvature due to bending moments and shortening or lengthening of individual members
due to axial forces. Thus the deformations due to shear are not included, nor are the so
called P-Delta effects (the secondary incremental effects that would be produced by reapplying the loads at the displaced positions of the members in successive solutions).
Within the limits of these assumptions, Analyse 3D will produce results of very high
accuracy, in fact almost an exact solution. However, the experienced engineer will be
well aware that no results, no matter how accurate they appear, are any better than the
assumptions, including the loading conditions that are made.
A.1.4 Operation
No special action is required as an elastic analysis is carried out in all cases.
A.2 Torsionless Analysis

Torsionless analysis is simply an option by which the user may elect to neglect or ignore
the torsional stiffness of the members. This is similar to methods commonly adopted when
carrying out hand calculations.
A.2.1 Torsionless method

The response of the software is to reduce the torsional stiffness of all the members in the
structural model to a very small value so that calculated torsion moments are too small to
register in the output. Zero stiffness is not used because in some cases this would cause
calculation problems.
The neglect of torsion resistance results in higher flexural moments. In a typical floor grid
the span moments in secondary beams are increased and outer support moments
become zero with no torsion in edge beams and primary beams.
In 2D frame analysis and traditional hand calculations, no torsion moments are
calculated in normal framed structures but they appear in 3D analysis due to stiffness
effects. The design or checking of members for torsional effects is usually complex and
the results are often uneconomic. Software may not be available. Most design codes
permit torsion effects to be ignored if the loads can be carried by other means, e.g. BS
8110 part 2 clause 2.4.1.
A.2.2 Recommendations
Torsionless analysis is advisable for 3D structures in reinforced concrete in which the
beams are to be designed using CADS RC Beam Designer or by hand calculation.
205
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Torsionless analysis may be used in conjunction with any of the other additional analysis
features.
Torsionless analysis should not be used for structures in which any principal load path is
torsional.
Any such misapplication will be revealed by excessive deflections of the affected
members.
A.2.3 Operation
Torsionless analysis can be invoked by setting its option in the Analysis Options dialog.
A.3 P-Delta Analysis

This option allows the effects displacements of the frame relative to the line of action of
the loads to be taken into account. This effect is ignored in normal elastic analysis.
A.3.1 Overview
When a frame deflects under the action of applied loads, any axial loads become
eccentric to the member axis and secondary bending moments and deflections are
thereby induced in the members. In simple linear elastic analysis the effect is neglected
and this is quite safe for many structures.
However, when high axial compression forces and slender members combine, the
resultant magnification of moments and deflections can have a serious effect on the
structure. In an extreme case the magnification or stability effects have a run away
effect and the structure collapses by buckling. The axial compression forces effectively
reduce the bending stiffness of members whilst tension forces have the opposite effect.
The simplest example of this is the buckling of a single column. CADS A3D MAX provides
the facility to include P-Delta effects in the analysis. This may be used to detect adverse
magnification of moments and deflections or actual instability due perhaps to an
incomplete bracing system.
A.3.2 P-Delta Method

The analysis is carried out in two stages for each load combination separately. The first
stage is a normal linear elastic analysis to determine the axial forces in the members.
These results are used to calculate the stability functions used in the second stage
analysis to calculate the modified fixed end effects, the solution of the modified stiffness
matrix and the subsequent calculation of the modified member internal effects. During
calculation the matrix is tested to ascertain whether it is `positive definite. If the test is
negative, the frame load combination is above the elastic critical load factor and is
reported as unstable.
In addition to testing the matrix, the software also checks for huge deflections that may
be calculated for sway frames at load levels below the theoretical `critical load. An
arbitrary limit of half the maximum frame dimension is applied and if this is exceeded the
load combination is reported as collapsed irrespective of whether the matrix is positive
definite.
206
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
In the case of plastic collapse analysis for which P-Delta effects are specified, the two
stage P-Delta analysis is carried out before the first hinge analysis. P-Delta effects are
included at each hinge increment until the frame collapses either as a full hinge
mechanism or due to instability resulting from deteriorating stiffness which is the result of
hinge formation and increasing axial compression forces.
A.3.3 Operation
To carry out P-Delta analysis set up the frame data in the usual way. Open the Load
combinations and categories dialog and in the Combination options use the Elastic
analysis options combo box to select P-Delta for the relevant combinations. This preselection must be confirmed in the Analysis Options dialog by clicking in the P-Delta
option if it is not already selected. The purpose of this is to allow you to do rapid
with/without P-Delta analyses without having to reset all the affected load combinations.
However you can be temporarily puzzled if you forget whether the switch is on or off!
No additional input data is required for P-Delta analysis because the basic elastic
properties are sufficient.
The results are presented in the same format as for linear elastic analysis except that the
tables are annotated: - Analysis type P-Delta. If the frame is unstable no results are
displayed other than the warning message on each page for the affected load
combination.
If you require to determine the elastic critical load factor for your frame under a
particular load combination, you can do this by progressively factoring up the partial
safety factors for the load combination until the frame is reported as unstable under this
load combination. In a forthcoming version of the program the facility will be provided
to find the critical load factor automatically.
Note that èlastic critical load factor is defined here as the factor by which the current
load combination must be multiplied to cause buckling instability whilst neglecting the
formation of plastic hinges or any other local failure.
A.3.4 Limitations
In this version P-Delta effects are ignored for non prismatic members (haunched, tapered
or user defined).
If you wish to analyse portal frames with haunches, you should define the haunches as
separate tapered members. P-Delta effects in the uniform sub members will then be
taken into account. This is also desirable for plastic analysis.
In this version of A3D MAX, P-Delta effects are ignored for members with partial end fixity.
However, for multi storey frames with semi rigid beam to column connections, a
reasonably accurate solution can still be obtained because P-Delta effects are allowed
in the critical column members.
For column bases for which it is required to specify partial fixity in terms of the member
stiffness it is suggested that the column member properties dialog, partial fixity page be
used to obtain the absolute value of the connection stiffness equivalent to the
proportional stiffness. This value can then be used as the support rotational stiffness with
column member end fixity set to fixed.
207
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
These restrictions will be removed in a forthcoming version.

Elastic P-Delta analysis may be selected at the same time as plastic analysis, torsionless
analysis, tension/compression only members or lift-off supports in 2D or 3D structures.
Note that load combinations with P-Delta effects will be ignored by SWMD. A warning
message will be displayed to this effect. It is best to set P-Delta combinations to Ignore
or switch off P-Delta in the Analysis options dialog before doing SWMD checks.
A.4 Plastic Analysis

CADS A3D MAX provides the first user friendly facility for the plastic analysis of general
frames of ductile material properties. It is assumed that engineers using CADS A3D MAX
are already familiar with plastic analysis and design or are using the program in
conjunction with one of the relevant text books as part of their education and training.
This Guide will therefore not take up space with the explanation of plastic theory, but
concentrate on operation and application of the software. However we must first clarify
some terms.
A.4.1 Overview
The collapse load factor is the amount by which the current load combination values
must be multiplied to cause collapse by formation of a plastic hinge mechanism or
instability (assuming no other failure intervenes). A value less than unity therefore
indicates failure.
The first hinge load factor is the amount by which the current load combination values
must be multiplied to cause the formation of the first plastic hinge. In this case values less
than unity merely indicate that the frame is no longer fully elastic under the design loads
and requires plastic analysis to determine the correct internal moments and force effects
at load factor 1.000.
Before embarking on the plastic analysis of a large 3D structure, it is worth considering
whether the 2D analysis of sub-frames would be adequate for design purposes and be
both quicker and easier to manage. Many portal frame structures repeat the same main
frame many times. Full plastic analysis of such frames can be lengthy and just produce
repetitions of the same hinges in parallel frames.
A.4.2 Operation
First set up the frame model in the usual way. However, note that if plastic analysis (or PDelta analysis) is likely, haunched members should be divided into sub members, i.e. with
the haunch as a tapered member and the uniform part as a separate prismatic member.
This is because haunched/tapered members are treated as linear elastic elements with
unlimited strength for the purposes of plastic and P-Delta analysis.
It is often useful to first carry out a linear elastic analysis on all load combinations. This
establishes whether the serviceability deflections are acceptable and whether the
ultimate load effects are of the right order of magnitude. You can use the linear stress
checks, as provided by the Stress Reporting facility, to assist with the latter.
208
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
This preliminary elastic analysis enables you to home in on a likely solution, changing
member sizes and support conditions etc. and re-analysing quickly before getting
involved in more complex analysis which inevitably takes longer and requires closer
attention to the process.
Preliminary elastic analysis is particularly advisable if you are using an old, slow computer
because plastic analysis is iterative and incremental for each separate load combination
and may take some time.
A.4.2.1 Check the plastic properties of the members This is not essential if the members
of your frame are restricted to the following categories:
SW Members i.e. Steel I sections, box or circular hollow sections selected from
the CADS library. For these, the program will calculate the plastic resistances.
SW haunch members i.e. haunched or tapered steel members defined using
CADS SW Haunch input facility. The plastic resistances of haunches will be taken
to be unlimited based on the normal assumption that you will design them to
be sufficiently strong so as not to develop plastic hinges.
All hinges are assumed to form in prismatic (uniform section) members.
Other types For other types of members select the member or group of similar
members and right click the mouse. Select Properties from the menu. Select the
Plastic Limits tab. Change the plastic limit options to Specified and edit the
default values (10000 kNm) to the value you intend for the relevant sections
along the member and the hogging, sagging and lateral moment directions.
This option is intended not only for uniform member types for which automatic
calculation of plastic properties is not currently available, but also for reinforced
concrete members for which the resistance moment may vary.
If the section is uniform you can reduce the number of inputs by ticking the Constant
box.
A.4.2.2 Connections You can specify plastic resistance moments for semi rigid
connections using the Plastic Limits tab as described in section 5.2.10 Member attributes
plastic limits. At any member end, the analysis reviews the member and connection
resistance moments and adopts the lesser.
A.4.2.3 Mark the load combinations Open the Load Combinations and Categories
dialog. Set the Plastic Analysis option to Yes for all the load combinations intended for
first hinge or full collapse analysis. Usually these will be the ultimate limit state (ULS)
combinations. Note that there is no commitment to full collapse analysis at this stage so
no penalty for marking combinations that later turn out to be elastic at the design
ultimate limit state.
If you also require P-Delta effects to be included set the Elastic analysis option to PDelta for the relevant load combinations. Note that load combinations with P-Delta
effects will be ignored when carrying out design checks to BS5950 using CADS SWMD or
the Design batch processing facility. P-Delta can be switched off globally using the tick
box in the Analysis options dialog or by changing the Elastic analysis setting for
individual combinations and re-analysing. Alternatively you can set up duplicate load
combinations with and without P-Delta.
209
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
A.4.2.4 Calculate Close the Load Combinations dialog and select Calculate from the
Results menu or Toolbar icon. When the calculations are reported complete, select
Tabulated Results from the Results menu or toolbar icon.
A.4.2.5 Review first hinge results If you have selected plastic analysis for one or more
load combinations, the Tabulated Results dialog will open at the First Hinge Formation
page. This lists all the load combinations that have been marked for plastic analysis. For
each combination, the load factor is reported at which the first plastic hinge would form,
and the member reference and position along it.
Low first hinge load factor If any load combination has a very low first hinge
load factor (say less than 0.70), it is likely that the collapse load factor will be less
than 1.00 and design changes may be required. You may wish to request a
collapse analysis for that combination to ascertain which members are critical
(other than the one in which the first hinge is formed.)
High first hinge load factor If all the first hinge load factors are greater than
unity, full collapse analysis will not normally be required except for curiosity.
Depending on circumstances, you may wish to reduce member sizes and reanalyse. However, if the design is governed by deflections this will probably not
be a sensible option.
Assuming the above do not apply, you can mark the load combinations Yes or No for
collapse analysis using the Select for Collapse Analysis button on this dialog page.
Normally combinations with first hinge load factor less than 1.0 should have collapse
analysis Yes and those greater than 1.0 No. You can of course do whatever you think
fit!
When you are satisfied with your selection for collapse analysis press the Collapse
analysis tab to start the analysis and display the results. The calculations for plastic
collapse analysis require numerous iterations and will take a noticeable time to
complete, especially for large 3D structures. The actual execution time will depend on
the power of your computer.
A.4.2.6 Review collapse analysis results In the Tabular Results dialog select the Collapse
Analysis tab. Each load combination has a separate page. Combinations which were
marked èlastic in the Load Combinations and Categories dialog have no results
reported.
Combinations which were marked plastic in the Load Combinations and Categories
dialog but marked No for collapse analysis in the First Hinge Formation page will also
have no results reported. For those combinations marked Yes for collapse analysis, the
history of plastic hinge formation up to collapse is displayed with the following
information:
Hinge number in sequence of formation.
The load factor at which the hinge forms.
The reference number of the member in which the hinge forms.
The position along the member at which the hinge forms.

210
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The local buckling status of the hinge. This is available only for SW members
having the default Mpr (reduced plastic moment) option set. The program can
only check local buckling for recognisable steel sections.
Report of any unloading (transient) hinges listed after the new hinge which
initiates the unloading. This is reported as unhinge.
Finally the number of hinges formed at collapse is reported.
The hinges may form a full plastic collapse mechanism or, if P-Delta effects have been
included and are significant, collapse due to instability may occur with a lesser number
of hinges formed.
The report does not distinguish between instability and mechanism collapses but if
necessary you can run comparative plastic collapse analyses with and without P-Delta
effects to see for yourself either by using the global P-Delta switch in Analysis options
dialog or running two comparative load combinations.
A.4.2.7 Set the load factor for calculating internal effects [Effects load factor] In order to
carry out design code checks on the frame members, it is necessary to obtain the
internal effects (moment, shear and axial forces) for the members and their distribution
for each ultimate load combination. Deflections may also be required.
In most cases of plastic analysis the internal effects will be processed using CADS SWMD
Steelwork Member Designer. However, they may also be used for hand calculations or
linked into other software. For the elastic load combinations the effects are automatically
calculated at load factor = 1.000.
For the plastic load combinations, the permitted range of load factor is between 0.100
and the collapse load factor if a collapse analysis has been done. If a collapse analysis
has not been done, the effects are automatically calculated at load factor = 1.000 using
elastic analysis. It is assumed that if the first hinge factor is less than 1.000, you will request
a full collapse analysis.
The effects load factor is displayed for each plastic load combination and may be
edited. The default load factor is 1.000 as long as this lies in the range. Obviously at load
factors less than first hinge factor, the frame is entirely elastic and if necessary, the
combination should be redefined accordingly. Load factors greater than the collapse
factor are of course meaningless.
For normal design purposes the default load factor = 1.000 will be used. However, you
may wish to see the effects at collapse to satisfy yourself as to their validity. Also, some
designers make a practice of designing for the collapse load factor so that the full
strength of the members chosen is available for future changes in loading, alterations
etc.
A.4.2.8 Review the internal effects Having reviewed the collapse analysis results and
accepted or edited the default load factors, you can see the member effects results and
the corresponding reactions, joint displacements and member deflections by selecting
the relevant tab in the Tabulated Results dialog.
The results for the elastic load combinations are displayed instantly but those for the
plastic combinations are calculated `to order and take a few moments computation
time depending on the power of your computer and the size of the frame.
211
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
A.4.2.9 Graphical results The internal effects and deflections for load combinations
containing plastic hinges may be viewed in graphical form superimposed on the frame
diagram in the same way as for elastic combinations. The number of ordinates per
member may be lined for members containing hinges within their span.
Enveloping The enveloping of effects of all load combinations is not available in this
program version if plastic analysis is set for any combination. Enveloping is of use in
reinforced concrete structures but of little or no relevance to steelwork the principal
application of plastic analysis.
Hinge formation For those load combinations analysed to collapse, the hinge formation
may be viewed graphically. All the hinges formed up to collapse are shown on the frame
diagram and numbered in sequence. Under the default graphics setting, they will be
shown as simple numbers for speed. You may like to switch off member and joint
numbering to avoid confusion.
Alternatively you can obtain a better hinge display by selecting View > Toggle high
quality render. Hinges which are active at the effects load factor, are shown as coloured
circles. Hinges which have unloaded at below the collapse load factor, are shown as
white circles. The high quality render also enhances the joint and member labels.
A.4.2.10 Post processing using CADS SWMD You can export the data for a frame with
plastic load combinations to CADS SWMD for checking against the requirements of BS
5950 pt 1. You can use the simple Export to designer facility for individual members or
you can use the Design dialog facility for efficient batch processing of multiple
members. Both are described elsewhere.
The current selection of elastic and plastic load combinations data will be used. The data
for combinations with plastic hinges will produce more favourable results than the original
elastic analyses for these combinations because the moment peaks typically at supports
will be reduced to the values sustainable as reduced plastic moments. Export of the
original elastic analysis data would result in local capacity failures being reported at
these positions.
Note that load combinations with P-Delta effects will be ignored by SWMD. A warning
message will be displayed to this effect. It is best to set P-Delta combinations to Ignore
or switch off P-Delta in the Analysis options dialog before doing SWMD checks.
A.4.3 Limitations
CADS A3D MAX plastic analysis is intended for structures in which the principal effect is
the major axis bending of the sections. Biaxial bending about the member X and Y axes is
accommodated by simple linear interaction formula which can give conservative results.
Note that under the default (Auto Mpr) option for steel members, the program reduces
the design strength for flange thickness greater than 16.0mm in accordance with BS5950,
Part 1 for steel grades 43, 50 and 55. Other steel grades are not recognised in this version.
Note that plastic analysis is not meaningful for structures which consist primarily of
triangulated assemblies of members. For structures which operate principally in bending
but have braced bays to provide stability it is recommended that the diagonal bracings
should have pinned ends and assigned Unlimited plastic limits.
212
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the members/sections adopted are
suitable for plastic analysis.
A.5 Elastic Critical Load Analysis

In normal analysis, the applied loads are defined, grouped into categories and applied
to the frame in various load combinations. In each ultimate load combination the load
categories are multiplied by appropriate partial safety factors to represent the `design
ultimate load condition.
In plastic analysis, the collapse load factor is defined as the factor by which the current
design ultimate load combination would have to be multiplied to cause a plastic
collapse to occur. Each load combination will have a different collapse load factor.
Similarly, the elastic critical load factor is the factor l by which the current design ultimate
load combination would have to be multiplied to cause frame instability. I.e. collapse by
elastic buckling or loss of stiffness as distinct from formation of a plastic collapse
mechanism.
In most frames (especially portal frames and unbraced multi storey building frames) there
is an interaction between the progressive formation of plastic hinges and instability
effects so that the simple plastic collapse load factor is reduced by the P-Delta buckling
effects. This is modelled by switching on P-Delta and Plastic analysis in A3D MAX. [Second
order elastic-plastic analysis].
The elastic critical load can never be achieved for these common types of structure and
it could be said to be only of theoretical interest. Nevertheless the elastic critical load
factor is used in BS 5950 as a useful index of frame stability.
Frames with lcr > 10 are considered to be insensitive to P-Delta effects (usually because
of bracing).
Frames with lcr < 4.0 are required to have full second order elastic-plastic analysis.
Frames with lcr > 4.0 but < 10 can be checked either by second order elastic-plastic
analysis or by various approximate methods involving hand calculations and/or
modifications of simple linear elastic analysis utilising lcr . BS 5950 provides hand methods
of estimating lcr from linear elastic deflections.
Obviously a better estimate (true value) can be obtained by iterative P-Delta analysis.
A.6 Rigid Constraints in Analysis

In multi-storied buildings, slab stiffness in lateral direction is very large compared to beam
and column stiffness. Structures designed using simple design techniques proposed in
BS5950 depend on the floor slab rigidity to transfer the loads. This in-plane rigidity is
essential to accurately model the structural behavior for lateral loads. Because of the
high rigidity of the slab in its own plane, it is accurate to consider that all the members
and joints in that slab act as a rigid plane.
A.6.1 Rigid plane

A rigid plane is a plane where there are no in-plane deformations, but only out of plane
deformations, i.e. the degrees of freedom associated with joints in that plane are
condensed to one point.
213
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
For example, slabs are usually considered as rigid planes. A slab is very rigid in its own
plane and deformations are very small for in-plane forces. They are usually ignored and
the slab is considered behaving as a rigid plane. But, a slab has considerably larger
deformations for out-of-plane forces. For out-of-plane deformations, we calculate strains
and forces associated with strains.
Figure A.1
Shown above is an example of a rigid plane with four members. At each corner node
there are six degrees of freedom. But because of the rigid plane behavior, all the
deflection degrees of freedom that are within the plane and all rotational degrees of
freedom that are out of the plane will behave in a rigid plane manner. In the program, all
the forces and deflections that are shown in red will be carried to the degrees of
freedom that are shown in blue.
Thus the effect of applying rigid plane constraint to panels is to lock the joints of those
panels such that they cannot move relative to each other in that plane. The joints in the
panel can however deform normal to its plane. The panel can also be displaced and
rotated bodily in respect of the whole structure.
A.6.2 Limitations
Rigid panel analysis has the following limitations:1. A joint cannot form part of two rigid panel groups.
2. A support joint cannot form part of a rigid panel.
A.7 Panel Local Coordinate System
A3D MAX uses a global coordinate system as shown above. This is different from the
conventional system where the Z-axis in A3D MAX goes inside whereas in the regular
Cartesian co-ordinate system the Z-axis comes out. All the user-interface activities input,
display of results are performed in this coordinate system.
With the introduction of panels, a new co-ordinate system has been defined. The Panel
co-ordinate system is based on the co-ordinate system of the plane in which it lies. The
co-ordinate system for the plane originates at the global coordinate system and is
defined as follows:-
214
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The normal to the plane is taken as the Y-axis of PCS (YpL). It is selected in such a way
that YpL is in the +ve in the Yg axes.
If the plane is vertical then
(i)
YpL is chosen in the +ve Xg-axis direction for the Yg-Zg plane
(ii)
YpL is chosen in the -ve Zg-axis direction for the Xg-Yg plane
Then the X-axis of PCS is defined. It is the intersection line between the plane and the ZgXg plane and is in the +ve Xg direction. If the XpL is along global Z, then the X-axis is taken
in the ve Zg direction.
Finally the Z-axis is defined perpendicular to the X-axis and Y-axis following the right-hand
thumb rule. (Cross product of XpL and YpL )
Figure A.1
The Plane co-ordinate system for a few panel orientations is shown above.
The Panels local co-ordinate system is the same as the planes co-ordinate system with
the origin shifted to the minimum X and minimum Z of the panel vertices. All operations
related to individual panels follow the panel local co-ordinate system.
The Panel co-ordinate system can be viewed for all panels created by turning the panel
co-ordinate axes toggle ON from View > Toggle Objects > Panel loads or from the
Display toolbar, fly-out under Panel in Stick Model mode.
A.8 Panel Loads Distribution

There are two possible methods of panel load distribution. They are the bisection method
and the grid method. Panel point, line, patch loads are always distributed through the
grid method whereas area loads may be distributed by either the bisection or grid
method.
215
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
A.8.1 Bisection method for area loads

The bisection method is used when Consider Edge fixity is not selected in the Analysis
options dialog. The program bisects the angle between each edge of a panel to create
the area to be allocated for the edge. The load on the area is then applied to members
on that edge as distributed loads. If an edge is free, the load is distributed between other
edges and no load goes to the free edge. The free edge also includes edges partially
populated with members. This option considers panel edges to be simply supported,
regardless of the edge fixity settings in the panel. This is the default setting.
The following are few samples of area load distribution patterns:-
A.8.2 Grid method

This method is used when the Consider Edge fixity is selected. Panel point, line, patch
and normal components of area loads are distributed through this method. The loads are
distributed by an approximate method where each panel is analysed as a separate
216
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
structure by meshing it with the grid of members. The analysis results are then transferred
as loads on to the panel edge members. One set of loads is generated for each panel
load category.
A.8.2.1 Salient features of model generated are as follows:
(i) For each edge the first member on that boundary is used to model the edge of the
panel.
(ii) Member properties of internal grid members are based on the spacing of the grid and
the panel thickness. The spacing of the grid is in turn based on the configuration setting
for the number of divisions.
(iii) End fixity of all members joining the edge is set based on the edge fixity of the panel.
If the edge is simply supported, all members have a pinned end condition at that end
joining the edge.
(iv) Material for internal members is taken as panel material.
(v) All vertex joints of a panel are assigned pinned support.
(vi) The load on the panel is transferred to the grid members as follows:Point load transferred to the nearest grid member as point load based on the least
perpendicular distance.
Line load transferred to the grid member as uniform loads so that the center of gravity
of the load is preserved.
Patch load transferred to the grid member as uniform loads so that the center of gravity
of the load is preserved.
In this case the effect of the restrained edges in the distribution of loads is taken into
account. This method is more intensive in terms of processing time and hence the
performance of the program may be slowed noticeably when used on large frames.
Supporting edge members to be stiff When this option is selected in the Analysis
options dialog, Member properties of edge members are set to have high major
moment of inertia value. This option is ON by default.
The above model is an approximation erring on the safer side. The results improve on
increasing the number of grids, by changing the configuration setting No. of divisions
for panel load distribution.
A.8.3 Distributed member load

All member loads generated from the panel load have their reference set to "auto". They
can be viewed in the main view or Member page of the Load editor dialog and are
non editable. They disappear once the calculations are reset by model changes.
Generated loads are always applied in the global X, Y and Z direction as horizontal,
vertical and transverse loads on effective member lengths. There may be few exceptions
in the case of in-plane loads where generated loads may be applied along member axis
as axial loads.
217
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
The direction of the load depends on the panels orientation in the global co-ordinate
system. For example if a panel is inclined to all three global axes then for a single panel
load three global loads will be generated for each member of the panel.
218
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Appendix B Design Grouping

This appendix describes the Design Grouping methods available in the program and
aspects of the use of CADS SW Member Designer which may be useful.
B.1 Design Process

This section outlines a typical procedure for analysing and designing a frame. The process
is essentially circular following an Analysis, Check, Design, Update loop. The following
commentary will guide you round this loop. This should be familiar as it is essentially the
normal design process. Breaking it into these steps allows you maximum control.
Figure B.1
B.1.1 Analysis
The first step is to create the model. Bearing in mind the evolution of the model it is worth
setting up the model so that changes can be controlled easily. The principle methods to
assist in this are the appropriate use of Member types and Design groups.
B.1.1.1 Member types It is useful to create a member type for each set of members that
are related and likely to be required to remain the same size. For instance all roof beams
may be of one size and all corner columns another. Using member types allows all
members of that type to be modified by making just one change.
Although the assignment of member types may be made at any time, it is better to do it
as the model is being set up when one is concentrating on the creation of the model
rather than its design.
B.1.1.2 Design Groups These help to break down the model into design elements. They
are particularly useful for applying particular design constraints, such as restraints, which
do not affect the analysis. They also enable you to specify which analysis members are to
be treated as one for design purposes.
It is also possible to use more than one group in parallel to examine alternative
conditions. This has the benefit that if changes are made the whole model can be re219
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
checked in one go and the effects observed. It does mean, however, that greater care
is needed in viewing the results and updating the model.
B.1.2 Check
You might wonder why the check comes before the design. The reason is that the check
is used to validate the last analysis. Even after the first analysis, and before any sizing is
done, it can be useful to get a feel for the closeness of the trail sections. Of course if you
know the sections chosen are not likely to be satisfactory you can skip to the Design
stage to obtain a better set of trial sections.
The Check will report how well the design objects have performed. For SW Members the
basis is the utilisation factors.
If some fail then you will almost certainly want to carry out a Design as discussed in the
next section.
If they all pass then you have a solution, whether it is the best one is for you to judge.
Some Design objects may be over designed so that carrying out a Design will help to
optimise them.
B.1.3 Design
By this stage you will probably have a set of Check results so you can see how
satisfactory your model is and clearly you have decided it needs to be modified either to
work, or be more efficient.
It is worth considering what needs to be changed and the implications. The members all
interact with each other. In a structure, changing anything changes the forces so trying
to optimise individual objects to the nth degree is likely to result in failures in other
members. Some structures are more sensitive than others in this regard. You need to be
particularly careful when dealing with portal frames.
If some objects have reasonable utilisation factors then it is often worth leaving these
alone and just changing those that are totally unsatisfactory. If you need to refine the
design very tightly it is better to make a few changes at a time and go round the design
process loop several times.
Having decided what to change there are a number of possible methods.
B.1.3.1 Change the model geometry This is fairly radical and is only likely to be required if
the results are so unsatisfactory as to require a re-appraisal of the structural form. In this
case you would normally return to the main modelling environment, make appropriate
changes, and start the design process afresh with a new analysis.
B.1.3.2 Estimate a new size In this case you might look at the results and judge which
Design objects are failed and hence member types need modifying. You may also then
estimate the new section to try which is done as part of the Update model step.
B.1.3.3 Use the Design option This option is one of the powerful features of the Design
Results in that it enables you to optimise the size of the Design Objects.
Select the Design Object you wish to optimise and pick Design. Each object will then be
calculated to obtain a satisfactory result. This calculation loops through a series of
220
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
sections of the same type as the analysis section until it finds one that passes all the
utilisation checks and offers that in the Design Section column of the results. If it cannot
find a satisfactory section it returns an error, the content of which can be read by picking
Show > All objects.
Where the design object contains haunched sections the same search is applied and
the haunch length kept constant but the haunch is based on the main section and its
depth is the default for that section.
B.1.3.4 Use the Details option The prime purpose of this option is to enable you to
interrogate the results in detail, hence its name. However, you can make modifications to
Design objects on an individual basis so it is good for fine tuning a design.
Using this option gives you access to most of the facilities within the Steelwork Member
Designer. This includes setting up restraints, but you can also change the section. The
merit of using Details is that you can easily change the section, run the internal
calculation to obtain new utilisation factors and repeat this until you have an acceptable
answer. The model will still need to be updated and re-checked but you might be able
to find a good trial section for problematic design objects more quickly.
Another advantage is that the Auto Design facility in SWMD is available and this offers a
range of possible sections from which to choose. This can be useful if you deliberately
wish to over design slightly so that when the model is updated and re-checked the
design objects have enough latitude not to fail.
When you have made your choice then Close SWMD and the results will be passed back
to the Design Results table and the appropriate section will appear in the Design Section
column of the results. The corresponding utilisation factors will also be shown.
An important point to remember is that the details file thus created will now be used as
the template for subsequent designs and checks. Thus additional restraints you may have
added will be preserved. Note, however, that holes data is not automatically taken into
account in the Check and Design.
B.1.3.5 Generally Normally following a total Design all the design objects should have
passed. However these results are only an indication based on the last analysis. The
model is yet to be updated and re-analysed and checked.
A tip when reviewing the Design Results is that if a section is shown in the Design Section
column of the results then the job may not have been updated and re-checked.
B.1.4 Details option and Aspects

Some commentary on the Aspect of a section as interpreted by SWMD may be useful.
In SWMD non-symmetrical sections may have an attribute called aspect set. The aspect is
a combination of orientation and handing of a section. Channels may be set web near
or far which is equivalent to the handing in A3D MAX and angles may be set leg near or
far, up or down which is dependant on the orientation. In A3D MAX the aspect is set
indirectly using the orientation and the handing. To avoid inconsistency, when in Details
mode, SWMD does not allow you to change the aspect in the Member Properties dialog.
Any change must be made in A3D MAX.
221
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
When A3D MAX passes information about members to SWMD it passes the information
with respect to the members local axes. Thus a member with an orientation of 180 will
be shown the opposite way round to one of 0 orientation.
This does not matter much until you come to view the graphs in SWMD which are always
shown horizontally, even for columns. The consequence of this is that members of 180
orientation may appear to show their moment and shear diagrams inverted. This is not an
error but a consequence of the interpretation of local effects on such members.
B.1.5 Update model

Having completed the design stage you will either have in mind some changes or will
have some Design section changes obtained from the Design or Details options. If you
have decided the changes yourself then you will need to update the model directly.
However, the model can be updated automatically for any design sections that exist.
This is done by the update Analysis model option. These methods are described below.
B.1.5.1 Update directly This usually means modifying the member types to sections you
estimate will be more suitable. The Design Results explorer can help you find the member
type, or types used by a design object.
Alternatively if you select the design object you wish to consider, open the Member Editor
and pick Highlight, then the member type or types will be highlighted in the editor.
You can then make the necessary changes. Any changes require the model to be reanalysed so the Design Results status for all the design objects will be set to n/a.
However, the utilisation factors remain for your guidance so you can continue to modify
the other objects as required.
B.1.5.2 Update Analysis Model option This option automatically updates the Member
types used by the design objects where a new Design Section is present. You can choose
to update all objects or only those selected, and you can choose to create new
member types or update the existing ones.
Before updating it is useful to consider the effect on the model. To some extent what
update options you choose will depend on how much you considered the effect of
change when you created the model.
B.1.5.3 Updating existing member types Take an example where the trial model is
created using just one section, say the default. You will have obtained some design
results so you know, much better, what sizes to try. If you select all and try to update
existing it will attempt to update the existing section with the Design section for each
design object. If it finds that the original member type has already been updated by
another design object but the current design section is different, then it creates a new
member type and assigns the design object to that. This ensures that while the member
types are updated, wherever possible, new member types are also created if necessary.
This can be a very effective way of carrying out a design without worrying about trial sizes
at all. Just let the program do the work. You may need an extra pass round the Design
process loop but this only takes a few moments usually so it can lead to very rapid design
solutions.
222
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
An important point to remember when updating existing types is that any other member
using an updated type will also be modified. The only exception is the other member if it
is also going to be updated anyway, as described above.
B.1.5.4 Creating new member types If you do not wish to affect other members which
use a member type being updated, then choose the Create new member type option.
For each Design object with a design section the program creates a corresponding type,
having first checked that it has not just created such a type already. This prevents too
many identical types from being created.
B.1.6 Re-analysis
Having updated the model the analysis now needs to be re-calculated to obtain the
correct forces. To warn you, the Design Results overall status message below the results
panel will show Re-analysis required in bold text. Pick the Calculate button from the
toolbar. You can view the graphical and tabular results if you wish.
The message will change to the new analysis run number.
B.1.7 Re-check
Once the re-analysis is done normally you should make sure all the design objects are
selected and pick Check. This will check the current model and produce a set of valid
results.
If you are investigating just a few objects to optimise then you may decide to only check
those you are interested in. The checking operation is pretty fast, but with large jobs you
may prefer to limit the scope of the checking. When you think you have a solution you
are strongly recommended to check all the objects.
Hopefully they will all pass, but some may fail. This is because the member forces will now
be distributed differently due to the new relative stiffness following the last design section
changes. However, the results should be quite close.
You can judge whether the results are close enough but strictly you should go round the
Design Process loop again. Experience has shown that once or twice is usually sufficient
to provide a satisfactory solution unless you have a particularly sensitive structure. In this
case increasing the size of critical members directly should overcome any inadequacies.
If you choose to override the sizes suggested by the Design option then exclude these
Design Objects when you do any further re-design.
B.1.8 Solution
Finally you should have arrived at a set of results where all the Design Objects pass the
final Check with reasonable utilisation factors. This is your solution.
B.1.8.1 Printout If you want to Printout these results there are two data tables you can
choose. One is the Design Results Summary the other is the Steelwork Results.
B.1.8.2 Design Results Summary This shows a summary of all the Design objects giving
their type, status and any other messages that may be relevant. If you want more
223
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
detailed information choose the table for the particular type of Design Object required.
In this version only SW members are supported.
Design Results Summary
Group
Design Object
Comments
Design
Reference
Reference Type
Status
Frame 1
cY1
SW Design
Passed
cY2
SW Design
Passed
cY3
SW Design
Passed
cY4
SW Design
Passed
bX1
SW Design
Failed
bX2
SW Design
Failed
bZ1
SW Design
Passed
bZ2
SW Design
Passed
B.1.8.3 Steelwork Result This shows the Design Results for SW Member types of Design
Objects. It includes the status and utilisation factors for the Design object.
Steelwork Design Results
Design
Object
Membe
r
Ref.
Template
Analysis
Design
Ref.
Section
Section Local
Reference
Utilisation Factors
Lateral
Torsion
capacity
buckling
buckling
Deflection
Status
Group Reference - Frame 1

cY1
Defaults
356x171 UB57
0.222
0.752
n/a
n/a
Passed
cY2
defaults
356x171 UB57
0.222
0.752
n/a
n/a
Passed
cY3
defaults
356x171 UB57
0.222
0.752
n/a
n/a
Passed
cY4
defaults
356x171 UB57
0.222
0.752
n/a
n/a
Passed
bX1
defaults
406x178 UB74
0.287
1.163
n/a
n/a
Failed
bX2
defaults
406x178 UB74
0.287
1.162
n/a
n/a
Failed
bZ1
defaults
127x76 UB13
0.000
0.000
n/a
n/a
Passed
bZ2
defaults
127x76 UB13
0.000
0.000
n/a
n/a
Passed
B.1.9 Optimising points to watch

In trying to optimise the model it is tempting to select all the design objects, update, reanalyse and check. With sensitive structures like portal frames, whilst the design has
minimised each section, the changed distribution of forces often results in the new sizes
not being satisfactory. Continuing to optimise in this way may not reach a satisfactory
solution.
The way to deal with it is to only optimise one set of members at a time. For instance just
optimise the rafters update and re-check to see the new situation. Then maybe optimise
the columns. Doing this progressively should focus quickly on a satisfactory solution. It is for
this reason that a fully automated optimiser is unlikely to find satisfactory solutions in many
cases.
An alternative strategy which often works well, particularly if a lot of slightly differing
sections are being offered by the design, is to choose those design objects which
224
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
represent the best choice and update existing member types using only those. The other
Design Objects using the same member types will be modified accordingly.
B.2 How SWMD handles A3D MAX members

This appendix gives a brief discussion of the use of the CADS Steelwork Member Designer
SWMD. When carrying out Checks and Designs its operation is totally transparent.
However, if you use the Details options to review the detailed results, the application is
opened and its full facilities become available.
B.2.1 Overview
Any member which uses a standard SW Library section I or box section and SW Haunch
member types can be designed by SWMD. The member size and steel grade specified
by the user and the member effects (moments and shears etc.) determined by the
analysis are passed to SWMD which substitutes them for its own internal effects
calculations.
It uses the Limit State setting to determine whether a particular load combination is ULS
or SLS.
The principal results are the local capacity, lateral buckling, torsional buckling and
deflection utilisation factors, as these essentially determine whether the member gives a
satisfactory design result. This data is passed back to A3D MAX to allow it to show as a
result summary in the Design Results dialog. Whether or not all the above results are
appropriate, and therefore shown, will depend on the load combinations and the
restraints applied to the member.
Note: The current version of SWMD does not check deflections in members imported from
A3D MAX. Consequently, these results are always marked 'N/A'.
By default, SWMD assumes that a member is only restrained at its ends and this is the
setting used in the defaults.smd job, as supplied by CADS, which is loaded whenever
SWMD is started. This is a safe assumption (for braced structures) but can result in a
number of inappropriate failures where restraints available for the stability of the member
are ignored. If you have modified the defaults.smd job in some way, then the restraint
settings may be different.
A3D MAX at present does not recognise restraints but SWMD does. You can set up any
number of SWMD template files reflecting the various patterns of restraints you need to
apply. The setting up of template files is described in Appendix B.3, Creating SWMD
Templates.
In addition to restraints, template files can allow modifications to effective lengths and
deflection criteria. The SWMD User Guide gives more details regarding these options.
Because members exported to SWMD are already analysed, some of the internal
calculations for the member effects (such as shear, moments and axial force) are
bypassed. This means that support conditions and any loads specified in SWMD are
ignored in favour of the imported data. The following table shows the data in the
templates that is either used or ignored and the imported data that is used or ignored.
225
A3D MAX
Version:3.0
Function Guide
Date: 01/08/03
Data items
Member Properties
Bolt holes and positions
Restraints and supports
Effective lengths
Deflection
Load details
Load combinations
Response
Member Geometry
Steel Properties
Haunch/Taper Properties
Section details
Affected lengths
Lateral restraints
Support conditions
Effective lengths
Governing span/length
Span/deflection criteria
All cases
All cases
Imported * (see note below)

Imported
Imported (SW Haunch types)
Template used
Template used
Template used
Template ignored
Template used
Template used ** (see below)
Template used **
Template ignored
Template ignored
Notes:
* The member length is significant in template files as this may affect the positioning of
internal restraints and holes etc. The actual length passed by A3D MAX is, however,
substituted when the member is checked.
** Deflection not checked for imported members in the current version of SWMD.
SWMD treats joined members as one member. If members are part of a group marked
for common design then all the members in that group will be designed to use the same
size section. If you change a member so marked in Details mode to a different size it will
return that new size to A3D MAX. However, if you wish to retain it you will need to clear
the Common Design setting or else it may be changed next time a Check or Design is
carried out.
When you Use the Details option SWMD creates a file based on the job name and the
object identifier. You can open this job directly using SWMD as a standalone application
if you wish for reviewing the results. Note that any changes made under these
circumstances will NOT be passed back to A3D MAX.
B.2.2 Making alterations

While in SWMD you can modify the restraints to include holes and make a number of
alterations to member parameters. You may even change the section. These changes
are saved with the SWMD Details files and are used, except for hole data, for subsequent
Designs or Checks on that member.
If you no longer wish to use these modifications you may revert to any templates by
making the appropriate setting in Design Results > Properties for the member and
Deleting the Details file from that dialog also. You should not delete the details file directly
from its folder using the normal windows file tools as this might cause A3D MAX to
become confused.
B.2.3 Reviewing the Results.

SWMD has two main display results options, and a wide range of printed output.
226
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
B.2.3.1 Tabular results allows you to view the checks made to arrive at the utilisation
ratios in great detail. Highlight the particular aspect you wish to examine and pick Details
to open a further dialog giving more detailed information.
B.2.3.2 Graphical Results shows the moment and shear effects etc. as they are applied
to the members. This can be particularly useful when examining joined members.
B.2.3.3 Output A3D MAX offers a summary of Design Results but if you require more
information then there is a wide range of options. This Output can be directed to a printer
or various files formats, in a similar manner to the operation in A3D MAX.
B.3 Creating SWMD templates

Templates, which are essentially blank job files with the restraints set up, are used to apply
various parameters to a member design that cannot otherwise be set up in the A3D MAX
model. They allow access to all the SWMD facilities.
B.3.1 Overview
Templates can be created from within SWMD, although there is a button in the Design
Results > Properties dialog that will launch SWMD directly for you ready to create a
template.
The member section and material can be ignored because that is read from the data
passed by A3D MAX. The only other important item of data to be set up is the member
length in the Member Properties dialog. This is important because internal restraints, holes
and other positions may depend on it.
Templates can be saved anywhere but a sensible place is a special Templates directory
created inside the SWMD parent directory, i.e. in parallel with the Data directory. SWMD
creates this directory for you when it is installed.
B.3.2 Restraints
SWMD has some restraint options that are specifically intended to work with A3D MAX so
that constant distributed restraints or regular point restraints can be set up regardless of
the member length. Thus if these are adequate to define the member restraints you no
longer have to set a template with a specific member length. You now only need to do
this if you wish to specify restraints at irregular positions.
If you do need to set the member length then pick the Member Properties button (shown
above) and enter the length of the member that the template is for. If the member is
joined, then enter the total length of the member. You can ignore the remaining items
in the dialog, as these will be overwritten by the data from A3D MAX. Close the dialog.
If you wish to specify the restraints, then pick the Restraints button and set up your
required restraints at the desired positions. Wherever possible use the Open restraint
options (see below). If you need to use the other restraint types then ensure that the
member lengths correspond. Otherwise the restraints may either be short of the member
or run off the end, in which case an error will be generated when the member data from
A3D MAX is read.
227
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Full details of the A3D MAX specific restraint options can be found in the SWMD manual
and help but the following is a brief outline.
B.3.2.1 Open Point 1 is used to specify an òpen ended range of equally spaced point
restraints with start dimension and spacing run from end 1 towards end 2 fitting in as
many spaces as the member length permits. The length of the range is determined
automatically.
B.3.2.2 Open Point 2 is the same as Open Point 1 except that the start dimension and
spacing are run from end 2 towards end 1. This type is particularly useful for portal frame
rafters with lateral restraints provided by purlins.
B.3.2.3 Open Dist.1 is used to specify a distributed or continuous lateral restraint with start
dimension specified from end 1 and extending to end 2 of the member.
B.3.2.4 Open Dist.2 is the same as Open Dist.1 except that the start dimension is from
end 2 and the restraint extends to end 1.
Note that the Restraints dialog currently only deals with lateral restraints against buckling
about the minor axis. If you are dealing with a joined member, there may also be major
axis restraints. You can make a crude allowance for these by reducing the major axis
effective length factor in the Effective Lengths dialog.
Note also that the default effective length factors calculated in SWMD all assume that
the member is restrained in position at the ends and, possibly, by any specified
intermediate restraints. If the member or structure is un-braced (i.e. a sway structure), the
effective length factors should be increased. Refer to BS5950 appendix E and relevant
textbooks for guidance.
B.3.3 Saving template files

Save the file to wherever you keep your template files. If you are not sure how to do this,
carry out the following operations:
a
Pick the File > Save As Template menu option. This will open the template directory.
If you wish, you can use the file viewer to create a new template directory in another
location.
Give the file a suitable name possibly reflecting the restraint type (e.g. distrib) and
save it in the templates directory.
Any data entered into the loads and load combinations dialogs will be ignored when
reading A3D MAX members.
You may create as many templates for restraints etc. as you require.
Whilst templates are primarily designed to work with A3D MAX imported members, they
can also be used to set up different default job files for ordinary standalone SWMD
designs. In this case, all the input dialog settings are used but you are advised to review
them before calculating the job.
228
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
B.4 Old Grouping Method

This appendix describes the original Grouping method first introduced in Analyse 3D
version 1.70 and carried over to early versions of A3D MAX. It is still available for
compatibility with old jobs which may use it. Note this is reproduced from the original
text and does take account of the new features.
You are advised to use the New method described above on all jobs which have not
already had design grouping applied. Note that although you can operate the two side
by side in the same job this is not recommended.
B.4.1 Introduction
CADS Steelwork Member Designer (SWMD) is an application for checking the design of
steel members to BS5950. It includes comprehensive code checking algorithms and
produces detailed reports of the member behaviour together with code references
where appropriate. Used directly, it can also design (i.e. find members of appropriate
size).
Full details of how to use this program and its facilities are given in the User Guide which
accompanies the SWMD application. However, for your convenience, an outline is given
here to assist in using it in conjunction with A3D MAX.
The A3D MAX link to SWMD allows many steel members to be checked in one operation
with a summary of the results displayed in A3D MAX so that the progress of the design
can be ascertained readily at any time.
The link relies on the grouping facility within A3D MAX to instruct SWMD if it is to check the
member. It can also tell SWMD what template file to use. Their use is outlined in Appendix
B.3, Creating SWMD Templates.
B.4.2 Member Grouping

This feature is primarily intended to improve the link to the CADS Steelwork Member
Designer (SWMD) application. However, grouping can also be useful in conjunction with
many A3D MAX operations.
The program offers three types of grouping:
B.4.2.1 Viewonly This enables you to create a named set of members which can then
be selected from the grouping dialog whenever required. For instance, you may make a
part of a structure a set so that it can be repeatedly selected for inclusion in a partial
view without having to select the members each time. Another use would be to group a
frame so that it could be used as a template for copying to other parts of the model.
B.4.2.2 SWMDjoin This group is specifically for joining Analyse members together to form
one member for design purposes. However it can be used in the same way as a
Viewonly group within A3D MAX.
B.4.2.3 SWMDset This is another group specifically for use with the Steelwork Member
Designer. In this case the selected members are given identical group attributes but are
listed separately. This allows design results applicable to them to be shown against each
individually.
229
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
B.4.3 The Grouping dialog

The grouping dialog consists of a list of defined sets and a number of buttons that show
information relating to the groups or processes that can be carried out on them.
Figure B.2
The grouped member list headings have the following meanings:
Set No. - This shows the number allocated to the set by the program when the set was
created.
Group Reference - This is the Set reference you entered when it was created. It may be
changed at any time.
Member Type - This shows the member type in the set to aid identification.
Section reference This shows the section used by the member type in the set to aid
identification.
Length (m) - This gives the total length of the members included in the set. It is most useful
for SWMDjoin types but it may also be relevant to Viewonly types if they represent
members in a line. SWMDset types are expanded into individual items bearing the same
set name and thus the length represents that of each member.
Load Capacity, Lateral Buckling, Torsional Buckling, Deflection - These are the four
utilisation factors for various design checks returned by the Steelwork Member Designer. A
more complete explanation of these is given below. If no design has been carried out,
then the message 'No results available' is shown.
Design Status - This is an 'at a glance' result showing whether the member has 'Passed' or
'Failed' its design checks. More details of this are given below.
The member list allows a group or groups to be highlighted for use in conjunction with the
buttons which carry out the following operations:
New - This creates a new group using the selected members.
Set - This allows the 'Recalculate in SWMD' option and the template to be set for one or
more highlighted sets in the list.
230
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Properties - This opens the Set Information dialog so that the group data may be
reviewed or edited. Double clicking on a set in the list also opens this dialog. Note that
the set type cannot be changed once it is specified. If you need to change it, then you
should delete the set and create a new one of the required type.
It also allows the SWMD Template to be set.
Select template - This is the path to the template file to be used by the set. The standard
file is defaults.smd which is the default job file. This item is marked n/a for Viewonly types,
as templates are not relevant to them. The use of templates is described in section 13.3
Creating SWMD Templates.
This dialog also allows you to modify the A3D MAX member types following changes that
may have been made in SWMD. Both the current A3D MAX member type and the one
offered by SWMD are shown and you have two methods of updating.
Update this changes the member types definition and will consequently affect all
members of the same type. This is useful if you know that you wish to keep all the
members the same size.
Create this creates a new member type and then assigns the members in the set to it.
This means that other members which shared the same original member type are not
affected.
Delete - This deletes the sets highlighted in the list after a confirmatory warning. Note it
does NOT delete any members, only the set referring to them.
Select - This makes a selection in the main view of any individual set highlighted in the list.
Highlight - This highlights sets in the list which contain any selected members in the main
view, thus making it easy to identify members in the model with sets in the list.
Show status - This enables you to show in the main view all members which belong to
SWMD groups, with an option to show which have passed or failed the design checks.
Details - This opens the Steelwork Member Designer data file for the particular set
highlighted in the list. It is for reviewing the current results details and it does not recalculate the member for any subsequent changes made in A3D MAX. To do that, you
must use the 'Export to SW Member Designer' option.
Once the data file has been opened, it enables the full results to be examined and
allows other modifications to be made to judge the effect on the design.
Note that such changes are passed back to A3D MAX automatically but it is not
updated. This allows a quick examination of alternatives before modifying the analysis
model, if deemed necessary. This gives the designer maximum scope but also imposes
the responsibility of ensuring that the analysis and design models are reasonable
representations of the structure being designed. You have the option of updating any
changes in SWMD by using the picking the Properties button.
Export exports all or selected sets to SWMD for re-design. This useful shortcut is the
equivalent of picking Export to SW Member Designer from the Export to Designer button.
231
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
B.4.4 Creating a group

To create a group, select the required member in the main view. Pick Grouping from the
Tools menu to open the Grouping dialog.
Figure B.3
Pick New and the Set Information dialog appears. This dialog allows you to specify the
group type and it lists the selected members.
Set Reference This is the in field in which you name the set. By default, Set1 is offered but
you are recommended to give them more meaningful names so that they are easily
identified.
Set Type Choose from Viewonly, SWMDjoin and SWMDset types.
Recalculate in SWMD ThisYes/No choice is only enabled when a SWMD type of set is
chosen. Selecting 'Yes' indicates that you wish to have those members calculated by
SWMD when that operation is invoked. It is mainly of use in turning off members that you
know to be nominal, thus eliminating unnecessary calculation.
Selected Members This field shows a list of members selected for the set.
Select Template This is another item which is only enabled if a SWMD type of set is
chosen. It enables you to specify which SWMD template is to be used for designing the
members of that group. It has a browse button which opens a file browser window to
assist in locating the required template file. A SWMD template is a job file that allows you
to set the restraint parameters and positions to be taken into account in the design. A
more complete description of the use of templates can be found in section 13.3 Creating
SWMD Templates.
The options in the bottom panel are greyed out as these are used to update the A3D
MAX model if the members are changed in SWMD.
Cancel This ignores any data you may have entered and does not create a new set.
232
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
OK This creates a new set from the data you have entered and adds it to the list in the
Group dialog.
B.4.5 Calculating member checks

To check the member, pick the Export to Designer button (shown above) or select File >
Export to Designer and then pick SW Member Designer from the menu. A3D MAX then
automatically starts SWMD which takes a few moments to initialise itself. Once the
initialisation is complete, A3D MAX exports the member sets one by one to SWMD.
SWMD reads in the template file assigned to the set and receives the member type and
member effects data from A3D MAX and applies any restraint settings. During this
process, SWMD creates a job file composed of the A3D MAX job name and set number
and shows this name in the title of the main view.
The member is then checked and once that is completed the utilisation factors are
passed back to A3D MAX which updates its Grouping dialog, if that is open.
These last steps are repeated until all the member sets to be checked have been
calculated and then SWMD closes automatically.
Note that SWMD differentiates between ULS and SLS load combinations by detecting
when the greatest partial safety factor is less than or equal to 1.0 for the SLS cases. All
others are regarded as ULS. However, if all the combinations have partial safety factors of
1.0 or less then the assumption is made that the factors have been taken into account in
the loading and they are treated as ULS.
B.4.6 Reviewing design Results.

In A3D MAX, the Grouping dialog shows a summary of the results by reporting various
utilisation factors for each SWMD member. A design status which may be either 'Pass' or
'Fail' is shown next to this data. This is included so that the design success of a member
can be seen at a glance. This is particularly helpful with a long list. A check passes if all
appropriate utilisation factors are less than or equal to 1.0, otherwise it fails.
Figure B.4
It is also possible to show all the members which pass or fail in the main view by picking
the Show button in the Grouping dialog. This opens the Show Members Status dialog,
where you can choose whether to show all SWMD members, all which pass or all which
fail. These are highlighted as a selection in the main view.
233
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
If you wish to examine the results in more depth, then highlight the set required in the
Grouping dialog list and pick the Details button. This starts SWMD, loads the appropriate
job file and calculates the results (SWMD does not store the calculated results). Pick the
Results button in SWMD to see the principal results. The various other results available can
be accessed as described in the SWMD Manual.
Note: Picking the Details button only opens the current job file in SWMD for the member
chosen. Consequently, if any changes have been made in A3D MAX, they will not be
registered in SWMD unless the job has been re-exported using the 'Export to SW Member
Designer' facility.
B.4.7 Making changes

When looking at the detailed results in SWMD, you may make any changes to the
member you wish. Caution should be exercised to prevent the changes significantly
affecting the model. Typically, you might wish to adjust the restraints if the design fails by
a small amount. Alternatively, you might wish to investigate the effect of holes on the
member. In this way, you can refine the design of each member to whatever level you
choose.
You can also change the member itself. Minor changes, such as increasing the weight,
will probably have little effect on the analysis and you may judge that re-analysing the
model is not required. Note that changes to members made in SWMD and subsequently
Calculated are passed back to A3D MAX but it is not updated automatically. If you
make significant changes, then you have to update the analysis model yourself, reanalyse the job and re-design. This approach allows you full control to investigate
changes step by step.
You are reminded that the only way to pass new data from A3D MAX to SWMD is by
exporting using the Export to SW Member Designer facility. By default, all of the SWMD
members are re-calculated but if you make a selection in the A3D MAX main view, only
those selected will be re-calculated. This speeds up reviewing the design if only significant
members are re-checked each time a re-analysis is made.
In most cases, judicious use of the re-analysis and re-design generally, and on individual
members, will produce practical solutions without need to ensure every member
matches in every analysis and design run. However, if in doubt, it is recommended that
you ensure that the analysis members are exactly the size you require and that the
templates correctly represent the restraints before undertaking a final re-analysis and redesign of the job.
234
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
Appendix C Using DXF

C.1 Importing DXF files
Having created the DXF files the method of importing into the drafting application will
depend on its methods. However, AutoCAD LT for instance allows you to import from the
Open file browser if you set the file type to .dxf or you can simply type DXFIN at the
command line to open the browser.
In this case the DXF file will be imported into a new drawing but it can be copied to any
other drawing if you want to build up a composite from several DXF files. You may find
that you will need to select ZOOM EXTENTS to see the whole drawing.
The DXF file created consists of elementary objects so they can be recognised and
manipulated by most drafting applications as you choose.
C.2 Printing the DXF file

You could print the layout directly and the easiest method is to pick your printer type and
set the Plot scale to Scale to fit. This ensures it fits the page but the scale could be
anything. What you probably need to do is set up the drawing.
C.3 Creating a drawing

This looks at a simple procedure for setting up a drawing, importing DXF files, arranging
them on the page and printing. It is aimed at users unfamiliar with AutoCAD. Experienced
users will already have drawings set up and know about using paper space, scaling etc.
and can skip this commentary.
In AutoCAD there are a variety of methods for doing most things so the one described is
not necessarily the only one or the best in all cases. However, it is simple to follow and
should allow you to get some work done fairly easily. You can then explore the various
possibilities as you gain experience.
C.4 Setting up the drawing

In a manual drawing office there are sets of standard drawing sheets to a given size with
printed borders and title blocks, and you draw your model on those. You pick the
appropriate size paper for the extent of the model you intend to show and the scale you
want to draw it at.
You can do this electronically using Paper space as the drawing sheet with the borders,
and Model space as the working area to draw in.
When you start a new drawing, AutoCAD offers you a number of options. It is outside the
scope of this note to discuss the relative merits and methods but what you normally
would do is choose a sheet size and shape suitable for the drawing. You might either
create a new one using the wizard, create one from scratch, or most likely once you
have done this a couple of times, choose a template you created earlier.
This drawing would normally have the border, a title block, and company logo etc.
drawn in paper space on Layout 1.
235
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
You can regard the Layout as a film over your model which is opaque to start with. In
order to see your model you need to provide a Viewport. A viewport is a window on the
model and you can move and scale the model about behind the window so that you
can see just what you want.
In its simplest form you place a single viewport the size of the working area on the paper
space representation of the drawing sheet In Layout 1. See the Viewport command for
the methods of doing this.
If you double click in the viewport it becomes active which is indicated by its border
being shown heavy. In this state you can pan and zoom the model behind. If you do this
in a new drawing you wont see anything as there will be no model.
You can set up whatever viewports you require, for instance you may choose to have
one viewport to show the plan and another to show the elevation. The advantage is that
you can apply different scales to the viewports which you cannot do in the model.
We will assume that you have set up your drawing with two viewports side by side using a
plot scale of 1:1.
C.5 Getting The DXF files

Import the DXF file as described above. You will find that it will import into a new file so
the easiest thing to do is select all the objects and Copy them to the clipboard.
Select the existing drawing window, change to model space and Paste the objects into
the drawing. It does not matter much where you put them.
If you have another DXF file (say for another view) to import then repeat the procedure.
Leave plenty of room between the views as this will make setting up the viewports easier
and you have effectively no limitation on paper size in model space.
Save your newly created drawing under a suitable name and close the temporary ones,
opened to get the DXF files, without saving them. This is not essential but it saves
accidentally working on the wrong drawing!
Pick the Layout 1 tab and activate one of the viewports. Using the zoom and pan tools
manoeuvre the model in the view port to give the required view. Set the zoom factor to
the required scale using "Zoom 1/100XP" where 1/100 is the required scale and XP signifies
relative to paper space.
When this view is positioned correctly, activate the other viewport and align the required
view of the model in that. Note that this may be at a different zoom scale.
To prevent accidental changes you can lock the Viewports. Click on paper space to
close any open viewports and then pick their borders. Pick Properties and under Misc set
the Display locked property to Yes.
You can now add any suitable annotation and the drawing is ready to print.
236
A3D MAX
Function Guide
Version:3.0
Date: 01/08/03
C.6 Hints and tips

The description above is a brief outline of using DXF files particularly in AutoCAD. It is quite
likely that the output you get the first time is not exactly what you want. AutoCAD is a
powerful drafting program with a very wide range of configuration options and thus there
are many settings which control the output. Some of these can be set up in the A3D MAX
LIF files but most will depend on your setting in AutoCAD. A few words of explanation may
help.
C.6.1 Label sizing
The grids and members are labelled in model space. This means the plotted height of the
text is the size in drawing units divided by the scale of the model.
The A3D MAX LIF files allow you to specify the height of the text in the various labels. This
value is in mm and the size in drawing units will be this value x the scale thus giving the
correct plotted text height.
Consequently it is important that you create the DXF output with the scale set
appropriately to the final drawing.
If you need to change the text height once it is in AutoCAD then pick the text and use
the Properties command and you can alter the height directly. Remember the height is in
drawing units.
C.6.2 Line types
Chained lines such as Centre lines are drawn according to the LTSCALE setting in
AutoCAD. You may find the line appears to be continuous, and this is usually due to the
setting being too small. I find something like 4 gives a good effect.
If you set TILEMODE to 0 and PSLTSCALE to 1 then the line type scale will be made uniform
across all the viewports. You may have to REGENALL to see the effect.
C.6.3 Line thickness
In conventional GA drawings the member lines are usually drawn thicker than the centre
lines. This can be set using the Weightage setting in the LIF file which sets the Lineweight
property. Generally this value is used by plotters so you might find that it makes no
difference when used with a printer.
In AutoCAD line thickness is a Z direction property and LINES do not have a width
property but POLYLINES do. You can change all the members to POLYLINES and specify a
width. The width is in drawing units and a value equal to the scale setting will produce a
1mm line.
C.6.4 Dimensions
When cutting and pasting DXF files the dimensions can sometimes seem to disappear.
This is controlled by the DIM variables that may need to be reset. Typically dimension text
size and arrow size may need adjusting. Pick the dimensions and use the Properties dialog
to alter the settings as required.
237
A3D MAX Upgrade

A3D MAX Upgrade
The main improvements to A3D MAX for version v3.00 are detailed as follows. This upgrade note should be
read in conjunction with the revised Function Guide.
New Features
These facilities are described in the updated function guide but this document provides a summary and
convenient description of their use.
Panel objects to support surface loading

Uniform area loads over planes
Local point, line and patch panel loads
Rigid plane option to emulate slab diaphragms
Job file preview
Pinned base support type
Panels and panel loads
This version of A3D MAX has a number of major new features related to the modelling of slabs and walls.
In essence it introduces a new panel object and loads that can be applied to it. These panels when
taken together can constitute a slab or a wall.
A panel object type is intended to represent surfaces carrying load. Panels may be triangular or
quadrilateral, but mostly will be rectangular. A panel is defined by its corner joints but must also have
supporting members along some edges and must be plane.
Panels have properties such as thickness and material but also have a number of other properties
concerning their behaviour within the model. This makes them a very powerful element when modelling a
structure.
A further benefit is that applying loads to panels makes it much easier to set up the loads on a typical
building as the need to calculate the distribution onto individual beams is avoided.
There are two forms of panel load, area loads which are uniform over the whole panel and which can be
applied simultaneously over as many panels in a plane as required and local panels loads which are
applied to individual panels. There is also a choice of ways the uniform area loads can be distributed
onto their supporting members.
The properties of Panels and their use within the model together with the application of panel loads is
described in the following sections.
Creating panels
Panels can be applied to an area of the frame bounded by three or four edges. Generally panels are
defined by their corner joints but must be supported by members along some edges.
Triangular panels must be supported on at least two edges and quadrilateral panels must be supported
on at least three adjacent or two opposite edges. The edges may comprise more than one member
provided they are in line.
There are three tools for the creation of panels. Some require a selection to be made and they report if a
suitable selection is not available.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 1
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Create panel tool
This tool creates an individual panel and requires three or four joints to be selected. The joints must
lie in a plane. The tool opens the Create Panels dialog in which you can set the principle attributes
of the panel.
These properties are described in more detail under the Panel
properties heading later but briefly:
Thickness is the thickness of the panel.
Rigidity panels can affect the structural behaviour of the frame by
imposing constraints on the joints. Non-rigid panels do not constrain
the joints.
Material is the material of the panel.
Alignment determines the position of the panel in relation to the
plane of its joints. It can be Centre, Top, Bottom or aligned to User
offset values.
Load distribution
The way in which loads applied to a panel are distributed onto the supporting members can be
specified. This is effectively the span direction of the panel. It can be set separately for normal loads and
loads in the plane of the panel. The latter is particularly relevant to walls.
In-plane loads allows two-way and one-way distribution similar to normal loads above. They also have
two additional distributions, Bearing and Hanging, where all the in-plane load is transferred to one edge.
Normal loads allows two-way or one-way distribution. If one-way is chosen then there is a choice of solid
or ribbed panels and a direction of span.
The direction is dependant on the alignment of the first edge (called edge 1) clockwise from the joint
closest to the top left of an imaginary box enclosing the panel. More details on how the rotation and
plane of the panels affects load direction and distribution is given under the headings Panel Axes and
Panel load distribution.
Picking OK will create the panel.
Panel display
A panel is shown differently according to the current render mode in use.
Stick mode shows the panels as feint lines just inside the bounding members.
Full render mode shows the panel with semi transparent shading. The thickness is also shown although
you may have to turn the members off to see it. Ribs are indicated with slightly darker shading.
Wire frame mode shows the edges of the slab and thickness in feint line.
Hidden line mode is similar to wire frame but hidden edges are removed and the outline tends to be
fainter.
The load distribution of normal and inplane loads are also marked with symbols to indicate their direction.
The panels display can be controlled by various display toggles described later.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 2
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Auto panel tool
This tool allows a complete region of panels to be created. It requires a suitable arrangement of
members to be selected and the program will attempt to populate the region with quadrilateral or
triangular panels. Members not included in the selection will be ignored. This way bracing and other
subsidiary members can be ignored by not selecting them. All the members must lie in a plane, and the
tool will only populate regions enclosed by members. It cannot automatically create a rectangular panel
with members on just three sides for instance.
The tool will open the create panels dialog as described above but in this case the settings will apply to
all the panels to be created by the selection. Any areas which are not valid will not have panels applied
but no warning will be given. Full render mode is particularly recommended to show the coverage. In all
other respects each panel acts as an individual.
This tool is likely to be the most frequently used to create panels. The selection of planes is most easily
accomplished by setting an appropriate view and using a box selection. The partial view tool can also
be useful with complex structures.
Quick panel tool
This is the third way of creating an individual panel and works like the quick member tool which existing
users will be familiar with.
Pick the Quick Panel button and the Panel properties dialog will open as described above. Having
set the properties required pick OK and then pick the first joint forming the corner of the panel to be
created. Continue to pick the next joints in a consistent order around the panel. On the forth joint the
panel will be created. You can then continue to draw the next panel or right click to move to a new start
joint.
If you only want a triangular panel then at the third joint right click and pick Triangular panel from the
menu. You can then continue creating panels as before.
When you have created the panels double click over the background to exit Quick Panel mode.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 3
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Panel Element Properties
The properties of panels are described below with discussions on their use in the model later. The Panel
element properties dialog can be opened by right clicking on a panel, its boundary or symbol can be
used, and then picking Properties from the menu.
The properties are shown in a tabbed
dialog as follows.
Panel view
The upper area is a general view of the
panel which can be hidden if desired.
The diagram shows an outline of the
panel and the local origin used. This is
located in the top, left corner of an
imaginary box enclosing the panel. The
coordinates are positive to the right and
down relative to this origin.
The edges of the panel are numbered
clockwise from this origin and these are
referred to for the load directions and
edge conditions such as fixity and
overhangs. More of which later.
The corners show their joint numbers and
coordinates relative to the local system.
The coordinates are useful when placing
loads.
The edge fixities of a panel are shown:
Restrained green
Simply supported cyan
Free dotted
The view also shows any local panel loads and dead and imposed area loads when the Loads tab is
selected.
Properties tabs
Below the view are various tabs giving access to the properties of the panels and loading applied to it.
General
Contains the basic properties of the panel.
Panel reference This is a name given to each panel to identify it.
Panel thickness as the name suggests is the thickness of the panel. A panel has a constant thickness.
Alignment a panel may be aligned relative to its top or bottom surfaces, its mid thickness, or offset by a
specified amount. This alignment is relative to a plane through the defining joints.
If the User definedoption is set then the Offset field is enabled so it may be specified. Note that the top
and bottom faces are +ve and ve offsets of half the panel thickness respectively. Further offsets such as
to finishes would be additional to these.
At present this feature is only used visually but it will be used to determine relative positions of the panels
and members in future versions.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 4
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Rigidity panels can be ascribed a rigidity which affects how the joints displace relative to each other.
The main use for this is to allow a panel to act as a rigid diaphragm which is how many slabs do in
practice. There are two states:
Non-rigid in this condition the panels joints are free to move (unless they are supports
themselves) under the influence of the loading so the panel can deform in any way. This is the
default setting.
Rigid plane in this condition the panel joints cannot displace relative to each other in the plane
of the panel. This means the panel always maintains its original shape. The panel can however
deform normal to its plane. The panel can also be displaced and rotated bodily in respect of the
whole structure.
There are some limitations in the use of rigid panels to avoid conflicts within the mathematical model.
1. A rigid panel cannot have a supported joint.
2. Rigid panels in a different plane cannot share a common joint. For instance, you can have
layers of rigid slabs but you cannot intersect them with a rigid wall.
Material type panels may be constructed of any material as specified in the materials library.
Edge fixity The edges of a panel may be regarded as Simply supported, Restrained or Free.
Simply supported Available where there is a supporting member and assumes the edge of the
panel free to rotate.
Restrained Available where there is a supporting member and assumes the edge of the panel
is prevented from rotating.
Free The condition for edges which are not supported. This is not settable and only appears if
an edge member is not present in the model.
The edge fixity is used to in the determination of load distribution for area loads and local panel loads
such as patch, line and point depending on the configuration. This is dealt with more fully in the section
on loads. The edge is automatically set to restrained by default if an adjoining panel is detected
although this behaviour can be turned off by un-ticking the File > Configure > Preferences > Options >
Auto Edge Fixity Updateoption. Note that a restrained edge does NOT transfer moments to the
supporting beam
Load distribution allows you to specify
how loads applied to the panel are
distributed to its supports. In effect it
dictates the spanof the panel.
There are a number of aspects to this:
In-plane in-plane distribution
deals with loads in the plane of the
panel e.g. bearing loads on a wall.
The options are:
Two way where the load is assumed to distribute in two perpendicular directions
One-way where the load is distributed in a specified direction to opposite edges of
the panel.
One way distribution to If one way distribution is set then this option is
enabled. There are two choices between edges 1 & 3 and edges 2 & 4.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 5
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Edge 1 is determined according to local coordinates for the selection of
panels being created. Generally edge 1 is parallel to the X axis. If panels are
not parallel to the X axis then edge 1 is parallel to the first edge clockwise from
the joint closest to the top left of an imaginary box enclosing the panel. More
details on how the rotation and plane of the panels affects load direction and
distribution is given under the headings Panel Axes and Panel load distribution.
Bearing where the load is assumed to distribute in compression to an edge according
to the load direction set and plane of the panel. For the most common case such as
the self weight of a wall use a Vertical area load which will bear on the lowest edge.
Hanging where the load is assumed to distribute in tension to an edge according to
the load direction set. The logic for various planes is similar to Bearing above.
Normal normal distribution deals with loads normal to the panel e.g. most surface loads. The
options are:
Two way where the load is assumed to distribute in two perpendicular directions
One-way Solid where the load is distributed in a specified direction to opposite edges
of the panel.
One way distribution to If One-way Solid distribution is set then this option is
enabled. There are two choices between edges 1 & 3 and edges 2 & 4.
Edge 1 is determined according to local coordinates for the selection of
panels being created. Generally edge 1 is parallel to the X axis. If panels are
not parallel to the X axis then edge 1 is parallel to the first edge clockwise from
the joint closest to the top left of an imaginary box enclosing the panel. More
details on how the rotation and plane of the panels affects load direction and
distribution is given under the headings Panel Axes and Panel load distribution.
The distribution emulates a solid slab acting predominately in the specified
direction.
One-way Ribbed where the load is distributed in a specified direction to opposite
edges of the panel.
Ribs perpendicular to If One-way Ribbed distribution is set then this option is
enabled. There are four choices of edge to set the ribs perpendicular to. The
distribution emulates a ribbed or joisted floor with little lateral dispersion. The
edges are labelled clockwise from edge 1 which is determined as shown
above.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 6
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Loads This reports the loads applied to

the panel. A more complete description of
the various ways of applying loads to
panels is given in the next section. This part
summarises the options available from the
Properties dialog.
Area loads are not editable from here but
from the main Load Editor. Existing Patch,
Line and Point panel loads can be edited
by highlighting the load and picking the
Edit button.
New Patch, Line and Point panels loads can be added by picking the corresponding button at the foot
of the dialog. These are described in detail under Panel Loads. You can also create a new uniform area
load for an individual panel from here, but it data is edited form the main Load Editor.
Overhangs panels may extend beyond
their notional edge lines. The extent and
shape of this is defined as an overhang.
Overhangs are applied to the bounding
members of a panel.
There are three forms of overhang
available:
Rectangular this overhang
extends parallel to the notional
panel edge by a constant
specified width.
Trapezoidal this overhang has a straight edge extending differing widths from the start and end
of the notional panel edge.
Circular this overhang is a circular arc extending a maximum specified width from the notional
panel edge.
Note that these overhangs extend the full length of an edge so may extend over several members.
Overhangs cannot be applied to members which have panels in the same plane either side. If panels in
more than one plane meet at the member then you will be asked to select which panel the overhang
extends from.
Overhang loads uniform area loads may be applied to overhangs in a similar manner to panels.
Overhangs and panels may be selected together when applying loads. The loads on an overhang are
transferred directly to the supporting member. Note that overhangs do not transfer torsional moments to
their members.
Show/Hide this button extends or shrinks the dialog to show a diagram of the panel with its edges
marked including edge fixity conditions. It also shows the panel corner joint numbers and relative
coordinates.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 7
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Panel loads
There are two basic types of load that can be applied to panels.
Area loads are uniform loads applied to one or more panels in a plane simultaneously. They
are normally defined in the Load Editor. These can be distributed onto their supporting members
in two ways as controlled by the Analysis Options > Consider Edge Continuitysetting.
Bisection distribution in which the area loads are distributed onto the supporting
members in proportion to the areas formed by bisection of the panel corners for twoway or panel edges for one-way panels and are always assumed to be simply
supported around their edges, regardless of the edge fixity settings in the panel. For this
case the Consider Edge Continuitysetting is OFF which is the default setting.
Finite grillage distribution in which normal or vertical area loads are distributed via a
temporary grillage of configurable pitch and corresponding to the stiffness of the panel
onto the supporting members. This method is adopted if the Consider Edge Continuity
setting ON.
In this case the effect of the restrained edges in the distribution of load will be taken into
account. If this is not required for some panels then set all their edges to simply
supported.
This method is more intensive in terms of processing time so the performance of the
program may be slowed noticeably when used on large frames.
Local panel loads are point, line or patch loads which are applied to panels individually and
are defined via the Panel Properties dialog. These are distributed on to the supporting members
by using the finite grillage distribution described above. If used in conjunction with area loads
distributed via the bisection method then for compatibility all edges will be regarded as simply
supported regardless of the panel settings.
The following sections explain each load type in more detail.
Area (AP) is a constant load applied to the whole surface of the
panel or panels. Only the direction and intensity is specified.
Area loads can be applied in different directions.
Normal perpendicular to the plane of the panel and
positive towards the panel.
Inplane X parallel to local x axis of the panels which is generally parallel to edge 1.
Inplane Z parallel to the local z axis of the panel which is generally perpendicular to edge 1.
Vertical vertical downward load on the panel.
Horizontal horizontal load positive in global X direction.
Transverse horizontal load positive in the global Z direction.
A normal area load can also be applied to an overhang which then transfers the load to the supporting
member. Note that overhangs do not transfer torsional moments to the supporting members.
Area loads can be applied to a selection of panels simultaneously making it easy to define the general
loading on a slab or wall.
Unlike the other panel loads they are usually defined in the main load editor, although there is a facility to
define them in the Panel Properties dialog for convenience. This is to retain compatibility with the existing
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 8
A3D MAX - Upgrade
area loads and to make them easier to apply over multiple panels simultaneously. This is explained in
more detail later.
Note that area loads in existing jobs will automatically be applied to a default panel supported by the
originally specified members. If imported with the Bisection distribution method set it should not affect the
results significantly, although they will need to be re-analysed.
Local panel loads
The Point, Line and Patch panel loads are applied generally
to single panels via the Panel Properties dialog. The details of
each load will be shown later but all are applied in a similar
fashion. The fourth option allows an Area load to be applied
quickly to an individual panel.
A new panel load can be created from the main
view by selecting the panel the load is to be applied
to and then one of the panel load buttons on the Loads
toolbar. The Create load button opens the properties
dialog from which you can choose the load type or the
arrow alongside opens a drop down toolbar from which
you can select the load type directly.
This opens the Panel properties dialog showing the selected
panel and the required load input page.
If the Properties panel is already open then a new load can
be created by picking the appropriate button from the Loads
page which open the corresponding load input page.
The Panel view diagram shows the panel to be loaded and a load input page which varies according to
the type of load but each of which work in a similar way.
Panel view
The main contents are described under the Panel properties above. Of most interest for applying loads is
the local origin and corner coordinates as the will help you locate the load position.
The view can also be used to assist in placing loads graphically as explained below.
Input page
This page has a number of common inputs plus some
load specific ones. To deal with the common ones first.
Panel load reference This is generated
automatically by the program but may be
edited if desired.
Type this shows the type of panel load
chosen. It cannot be changed here. If you
made a mistake Close the Panel Load Editor
and choose another type.
Load direction This is set to Normal for this
version. You cannot apply inplane local panel loads at present.
Category This allows you to choose the load category which is used to assign the appropriate
partial safety factor in the load combinations. If you need a new load category this must be
defined in the Load Combination editor first.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 9
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Coordinate positions and values These panels vary according to the type of panel load
chosen and are described below.
Create This creates the load. It is drawn in the Panel view and is added to the panel load
spreadsheet. The inputs refresh with the default settings ready for a new load should you wish to
define it. Close returns to the load spreadsheet without creating a further load. When editing an
existing load this button is disabled.
Close This closes the Panel load editor without creating a new load. When editing an existing
load this button will update the load data to the current inputs.
Pick graphically This option allows you to place the load graphically using the Panel view. Pick the
button and you will be prompted (below the Panel view) for the first point. Move the cross hair over the
panel, the current local coordinates are shown to assist, an pick a suitable position.
Depending on the load type you will be asked for further points or when the last point required is picked
prompted to Click on Create. The coordinates will have been entered into the input fields but you will
need to specify the load value/s before you pick the Create button.
Snap toggle The Snap button below the Panel view can be used to turn the span facility On or
Off. When On it constrains the coordinates to the snap spacing.
Snap spacing this can be set by right clicking over the Snap toggle button and picking snap
spacing from the menu. It opens a dialog were the spacing can be set. By default it is 100mm.
Point (PP) is a concentrated load applied at a particular position in the panel.
A point load requires one location and a load value. The
position is in m from the local origin and the load value is in kN.
Line (LP) is a linear load applied along the panel.
A line load requires start and end locations and load values. The
positions are in m from the local origin and the load values are
in kN/m.
Different end load values are treated as a linearly varying load from
one end to the other.
Patch (TP) is a uniform load applied to a specified triangular or quadrilateral area of the panel.
A patch load requires three or four vertices to be located. The
positions are in m from the local origin. A single load value is
required in kN/m2.
Area (AL) is a convenient way to create a standard

uniform area load covering the whole of an individual
panel.
Only the load direction and intensity in kN/m2
need to be entered. When created the load will
automatically be added to the Load Editor and can be
applied to other panels in the same way as other area
loads if required.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 10
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Analysis Options
Two new options have been added to control

the distribution of load prior to the analysis
calculations.
Consider Edge Continuity
This determines whether panel edge continuity
will be considered when distributing area loads
applied to the surface of the panel, it does not
apply to inplane loads.
OFF If the option is OFF (the default) then
regardless of the panel properties the panel
edges will be considered simply supported.
In this case uniform area loads will be distributed
to the supporting members using a bisection of
corner angles or supporting side depending on
the distribution direction setting. This gives the
traditional uniform, triangular or trapezoidal
distribution on members and is fast to calculate.
Patch, line and local loads are distributed via a
temporary grillage but with its ends, at the
supporting members, taken as pinned.
ON If the option is OFF then a grillage is used for uniform area loads as well as Patch, Line and Point
loads which has its ends at the supporting members fixed or pinned according to the continuity set in the
Panel Properties.
This results in the loads being distributed onto the supporting members as a series of point loads at the
frequency of the grillage. This can result in a slowing of the calculations particularly any steel design.
Supporting edge members to be stiff
When loads are distributed via the temporary grillage each panel is treated an a sub-frame consisting of
a grillage of members bounded by the supporting members. The relative stiffnesses of these elements
affects the distribution of point loads on the supporting members.
The panel grillage is based on the panel material, its thickness and the pitch of the grillage.
The stiffness of the bounding member is taken to be that of the first member along edge 1 of the panel.
This then relates the stiffness of the panel to a reasonable approximation of the stiffness of the bounding
members. When considering 2-way slabs on steel beams then there is often a tendency for the point
loads to be concentrated towards the corners of the panel, as the slab contributes a significant stiffness.
Turning the Supporting Edge Member to be Stiffoption ON, forces a high value of stiffness to be used for
the supporting members while the load distribution is being calculated. This tends to result in load
distributions closer to that obtained by the bisection method for uniform loads. Thus for 2-way slabs the
point loads tend to concentrated towards the middle of the edge in a triangular or trapezoidal pattern.
These edge member stiffness assumptions are only made for the purposes of calculating the distributed
loads. The actual member stiffnesses are used for the analysis calculations. Changing this setting clears
the existing analysis result so a re-analysis will be necessary.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 11
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Displaying panels
A number of tools are provided to control the display of panels. These are essential as
panels can easily obscure other parts of the model so often need to be suppressed.
Toggle panel elements this turns the display of the panels on or off. The arrow alongside controls
what load distribution and axis symbols will be displayed by means of a drop down toolbar.
Toggle normal load distribution symbol turns the normal distribution symbol on or off.
Toggle inplane load distribution symbol turns the load distribution pattern indicator on or off.
Toggle panel load distribution pattern turns the area load distribution display on or off.
Toggle panel coordinate axes turns the local panel axis triad on or off.
Toggle overhangs this turns the display of panel overhangs on or off.
Toggle panel loads this turns the display of panel loads on or off. The arrow alongside controls
what aspect of the loads will be displayed by means of a drop down toolbar.
Toggle panel point loads turns the display of panel point loads on or off.
Toggle panels line loads turns the display of panel line loads on or off.
Toggle panel patch loads turns the display of panel patch loads on or off.
Toggle panel area loads turns the display of panel area loads on or off.
Using panels
Whilst this version of A3D MAX mainly deals with the analysis and design of members, panels will be of
considerable use for two aspects of frame analysis, namely loading and frame rigidity.
Quick loading
Most structures have loads applied to them via slabs and walls. The panel loads allow you to specify
these loads directly rather than having to convert them into member loads first. This should facilitate the
loading of the structure very considerably.
Uniform area loads
Slab and lateral wall area loads can be applied over several panels as follows.
1. In the main view select the panels to be loaded. You can include member and joints as well
although these will be ignored.
2. Open the Load Editor and define an Area load.
3. With the focus on the load just defined pick Apply.
4. The load will be applied to all the panels selected. Note that you can specify a number of area
loads highlighted in the editor and apply them all in one go to the selection in a similar manner to
member loads if you wish.
When the frame is calculated the area loads are first distributed onto the supporting member according
to the load distribution settings. These member loads are then used in the frame analysis. The distributed
loads are displayed in the main view like any other member load.
Depending on the distribution they will be uniform, triangular, trapezoidal or a series of point loads. If you
want detailed information on these loads then choosing the Load editor > Members tab allows you to
see what the distributed values are.
These loads cannot be edited as they are based on the specified area load and frame geometry at the
time of the analysis. If the geometry or load changes and the analysis is invalidated then these distributed
loads will be re-calculated when the analysis is next calculated.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 12
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Point, line and patch panel loads

These can be applied to multiple panels but because they are related to local panel coordinates care
needs to be exercised to ensure all the panels selected use the same relative origins. If not the loads may
not be placed where you expect. The Panel axis triads are useful to determine this. Note the Panel view is
not available for multiple panel selections.
If you are not sure of the geometry it is better to apply these loads to panels individually.
To create local panel loads select the panel you wish
to apply the load to and then pick the Create panel
loadstool. This will open the Panel Elements properties dialog
from which you can choose the load to create.
Alternatively you can choose the load directly picking the
adjacent arrow and from the drop down menu.
Point load opens the point panel loads input.
Line load opens the line panel load input.
Patch load opens the patch panel load input.

Area load opens the local area load input.
See Panel loads for details of each load type.
Frame rigidity
Many jobs have slabs which in practise provide bracing to the structure. The panel properties can be set
so that they can provide this rigidity. This means it is no longer necessary to add pseudo bracing in order
to model the action of rigid floors. There are two panel rigidity settings.
Non-rigid this is the default condition where there is no constraint on the relative positions of the panel
joints. This is used where only loading is required or the panels do not contribute significantly to any
diaphragm or bracing action.
Rigid plane this maintains the panels joints in the same relative position in the plane of the panel. This
means that a square panel will remain square although it may be displaced or rotated by the forces
applied to it. When applied to a floor it means that the floor will keep its plan shape but may be
displaced by sway forces.
Modelling floors.
Rigid panels are ideally suited to modelling floors and this is intended as their main use. In this case all the
panels in a plane are set to have the rigidity required and this will lock the joints in that plane thus
modelling a typical rigid floor such as an RC slab.
Rigid panels are less suited to modelling walls such as shear walls as their mode of action is different and
these are better dealt with by using pseudo bracing or stiffened members.
Limitations
There are a couple of limitations with the use of rigid panels due to the mathematical model used.
1. None of the joints in a rigid panel can be supported.
2. There cannot be two adjacent rigid panels in different planes. This means that if rigid panels share an
edge then they must be in the same plane.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 13
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Generally these are not severe restrictions and you can have stacks of rigid panels with no limit. If vertical
diaphragms are modelled using bracing techniques as recommended above then such a conflict should
not arise.
Updating existing jobs
This version of A3D MAX only supports area loads when applied to panels. Previous versions had a simple
area load type which was applied to members and inherited its load direction according to the member
selection when it was applied.
When these jobs are opened in this version it will automatically create a panel between the members
and apply the existing area load to it. The panel will have the default panel properties and be of a nonrigid type, and the appropriate normal load direction will be set. Thus the results will be unaffected
although the job will need to be re-calculated.
These panels can then be treated like any other panel and edited as required.
Limitation
There is one possible circumstance in which a conflict could arise. In previous versions of A3D MAX it is
possible to apply one way loads to two sets of perpendicularly opposite members (i.e. like a two-way
arrangement but using independent one-way loads to give uniform linear loads on all sides). It is difficult
to see how this form of load action can arise in practise but it is a possible model condition.
The panels cannot have two normal one-way load distributions so only one load direction can be
accommodated. When the job is first loaded a warning will be issued if this condition is detected and the
second load not applied. If you need to model this case then you will need to add equivalent linear
loads to some members.
Panel axes
We have tried as much as possible to avoid the need to understand local coordinate systems and axes
but It is necessary to know some basic rules to predict how the panels and loads will act in particular
circumstances.
Loads and properties of panels such as alignment are relative
to the local coordinate system of the panel element. The origin
of this system is located in the one corner of an imaginary box
enclosing the panel but is always aligned to the principle axes.
The local x and z axes are in the planes of the panel and the y
axis is normal to it. If multiple panels are being created then a
local coordinate system for the whole group is used.
The panel edges are labelled clockwise from the joint closest
to this origin. For one way panels x direction is always between
edges 2 and 4 and z direction between edges 1 and 3.
The above definition is a simplified form of the mathematical definition used by the program and the
following sections explain how you can specify your panel and particularly its load distribution direction
from that.
Horizontal panels
Generally the main concern about axes when placing the panel is the direction of span, or more
accurately the direction of load distribution.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 14
Rectangular and other quadrilateral panels The normal load distribution

direction assumes spanning to opposite edges of the panel.
A3D MAX - Upgrade
The illustration shows panel distribution set between edges 1 & 3, edge one being
the upper edge viewed in plan. The triad shows the local x (red) and z (green)
coordinates for the panel.
For irregular quadrilateral panels this distribution is between

the mid point of opposite edges.
Triangular panels One-way distribution is defined

perpendicular to one edge. In the illustration the
distribution is perpendicular to edge 1 as defined above.
Vertical panels
Panels placed vertically have their local origin placed towards the near, left, top
corner of an imaginary bounding box if its plane is from 0 to <90 from the XY
plane, or in the far, left, bottom corner for planes from 90 to <180.
This needs to be taken into account when applying inplane and local normal
loads but not global loads. The selected panel shown is parallel to the global X
direction. This main point to be aware of the that panels parallel to the Z axis (at
90 form X), and up to 180, are effectively inverted. See the illustration on the right.
Most analysis software exhibits similar behaviour.
Panel load distribution
The area loads and point, line and patch panel loads are distributed according to the load distribution
setting for the panel. However the method used to distribute these loads onto the supporting members
can differ between the area and the other panel loads.
Area load distribution
The area load is distributed onto the supporting members according to the type of distribution set.
Bisection distribution
If bisection distribution is set then this works on the basis of bisecting corner angles or sides. The distribution
pattern can be seen if its display is turned ON.
Two Way distributions
typically look as illustrated
on the right.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 15
A3D MAX - Upgrade
One Way distributions both solid and

ribbed distributions typically look like those
adjacent, except triangular one-way ribbed
panels which use the grillage method so are
similar to patch loads below.
The loads are defined as uniform, triangular,

trapezoidal or distributed loads on the edge members. They can be viewed, but not edited, in the Load
Editor members page.
Normal distributions
Normal loads are distributed onto the supporting members according to the distribution patterns above
and result in uniform, triangular, trapezoidal or distributed vertical and or horizontal load types on the
supporting members.
In-plane distributions
In-plane loads are distributed according to the load distribution (in-plane
span) set for the panel and the direction of the load. This results in uniform,
triangular, trapezoidal or distributed load types on the supporting members.
The resulting loads may be global vertical, horizontal, or transverse where the
direction are the parallel and axial where they are not.
In-plane load distribution to
members along
Edge 1 & 3
In-plane load distribution to

members along
Edge 2 & 4
INPLANEZ
Vertical, horizontal, transverse
Axial
INPLANEX
Axial
Vertical, horizontal, transverse
Load type direction
Global distributions
Global direction loads on one-way panels are distributed according to their relationship to the plane of
the panel. For instance a Vertical loads on a horizontal panel is similar to a normal load on the panel. A
vertical load on a vertical panel acts in the plane of that panel. If you wish to model a wall bearing on a
beam then applying a vertical load to the panel set to In-plane > bearingwill do this.
Sloping panels will have global loads resolved into normal and inplane components.
Finite grillage distribution
Only Normal and Vertical area loads may be distributed by this method by setting Analysis Options >
Consider Edge Continuityto ON . It uses a temporary grillage and distributes the load as described under
the Point line and patch panel loads below.
Point, line, and patch panel load distribution
These local panel loads are distributed using a temporary grillage within each panel that has such a
load. This grillage is generated automatically by the program when the analysis calculations are run so
they can be updated to take account of any geometric changes.
The grillage consists a members running in both directions regardless of the load distribution setting. The
fineness of the grillage is set in File>Configure>Preferences>Sizes>No. of divisions for panel load
distributionwhich defaults to 10. This value gives reasonably accurate results without unduly slowing the
calculations as each of these panels is a mini structure that has to be analysed before the main analysis.
The local panel loads are approximated by the program as distributed loads on this grillage of members.
Because these loads cannot be applied directly to the boundary members only to the grillage, if the
local loads extend to the edge then that small amount of load which would be placed on the edge
member is transferred to the first grillage line inside. This preserves the total load on the structure but may
cause slightly different results to those anticipated.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 16
A3D MAX - Upgrade
The shear forces from the grillage at the edges are then applied as point loads on the panel edge
members to simulate the local load effect. These loads can be viewed but not edited in the Load Editor
Members page.
Two Way distribution the grillage members are based on the panel thickness and material in both
directions and the panel structure uses the specified edge member as the boundary to the grillage. If the
edge consists of several members then the section of the first one is used.
One Way Solid distribution uses a similar grillage to the two way is used but in this case the unloaded
edge members are given a minimal section so have little stiffness. This simulates the behaviour of solid RC
slabs and the like where there is some lateral dispersion of load through the slab.
One Way Ribbed distribution uses a grillage but the only the grillage members in the direction of span
are set to the panel thickness and material whereas the lateral grillage members are given a minimal
section. This reduces the lateral dispersion of load and more accurately simulates a ribbed or joisted
panel.
Edge fixity in all cases the grillage members are given Pinned end fixity to simply supported edges and
Fixed end fixity to Restrained edges. This then draws more shear force towards the fixed edge. Note that
this effect is only within each panel, the program does not perform a continuous analysis on a series of
adjacent panel grillages.
Copying panels
Panels and panel loads can be copied. What is copied will depend on what is displayed when the
selection is made. A panel to be copied must include a valid arrangement of bounding members or
joints, and you cannot copy panels loads alone.
To copy panels first ensure the panels and any loads required are displayed then select the objects to be
copied using the normal selection methods.
Pick the Copy button and then Paste them to the required location.
If a panel of the same size already exists then the copied panel will replace its properties but copied
loads will be added to any existing loads.
If you try to copy over an existing panel of a different size then the panel and any loads will not be
copied.
Copying the panel preserves the load distribution
direction relative to the rotation and the local origin
remain at the same relative joint.
The illustrations show the effect of copying the selected
panel in plan and elevation.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 17
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Stretching panels
The members bounding panels may be stretched and providing the resulting geometry still allows a valid
panel they will be adjusted otherwise they are removed.
Panels may be stretched in the plane of the panel or its
slope or orientation changed provided it remains plane.
Uniform area loads will be applied to the whole panel
but local panel loads will retain their original position
relative to the local origin. You will need to edit them
separately if the stretch requires a change in their
geometry.
Stretching to a slope maintains the plan position of the loads but as they
are normal to the panels their actual direction will change.
Quite complex arrangements can be stretched and this may be

useful to consider as creating the panels in plan and then
stretching may be a quicker and easier way when modelling
structures such as roofs.
Panel area load colours
The panel area loads are coloured according to the intensity of load. You can specify the limiting colours
by setting the default in the configuration and change them within each job.
Setting default colours This is done by picking File > Configure > Preferences > Coloursand choosing
the colours for Area load start intensityand Area load end intensity. This will affect subsequent jobs but
does not affect the current one.
Setting the job colours Pick Model > Panel loads > Area loads shading schemewhich opens a dialog
in which the colours can be set. The button to the right of the colour swatch open the standard colour
picker.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 18
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Example
The following is a example of using the panel facilities in a

simple job. The example can be found in the Examples folder
as Ex3-Panels.a3m
This is similar to Ex1-SWframe except that the panels have been
used to load the frame and some rigidity added. Note the
loads from the panels are not intended to match the simplified
loading applied to the members in that example.
Whilst panels can be provided for both floors and walls often
only floors will be specified so this example will look at that first
and then add wall panels.
1.0 Consider the problem
Start by considering how best to model the structure.

1.1 The structural form
This is a simple frame consisting of UB beams and columns. The first floor will be a solid RC slab spanning
two ways onto the beams. The roof will be a lightweight one way roof using some form of proprietary joist
system, possibly of open web type.
The frame will be supported on isolated pin bases.
1.2 Modelling method
This is an obvious candidate for the 3D building frame generator which can set up the basic structure.
Surplus columns can then be deleted. Initially only the floor panels will be specified as the roof framing will
be altered. The walls can also be added later.
2.0 Start a new job
Before any modelling can commence you should start a new job.
2.1 Run A3D MAX
Run A3D MAX from the Start Menu picking the CADS > A3DMAX item, or if you have the CADS Smart
Designer desktop shortcut pick that and pick A3D MAX. Alternatively if you have A3D MAX running
already then pick New from the toolbar or File>New from the menu.
2.2 Main view
This opens A3D MAX
showing its main view as
a blank workspace
surrounded by tools and
an empty explorer panel
on the left.
Existing users will familiar
with most of the tools
but a number of panel
related ones have been
added.
Some items are disabled
(greyed) but may be
enabled as the job
progresses.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 19
A3D MAX - Upgrade
3.0 Creating the main frame
The are a number of ways of working but probably the easiest to follow is to start by creating the
geometry.
3.1 Open the 3D building frame generator.
Pick the Frame generator tool button to open the Frame
Generator options dialog.
Pick the 3D building frame generator button.
This opens the 3D Building Frame dialog.
3.2 Entering the geometry

Enter the following data into the dialog.
No.
Length
Member type
Total length
Width (x)
6.000
Accept default
Height (y)
4.000
Accept default
8.000
Depth (z)
5.000
Accept default
10.000
This sets up the basic frame geometry.
18.000
The frame generator also gives the opportunity to include

floor roof and wall panels. We will need all of these
eventually but as the modifications to be made to this
frame include the walls and roof in this instance only the
floor will be set in the frame generator. The other panels
can be added later.
Tick the Floors option and pick the Floor panel properties
button alongside.
3.3 Set the panel properties
For this floor the thickness will be 200 (mm) and because it will be
assumed to restrain the relative movement of the columns set the
rigidity to Rigid plane. The material can be left as concrete grade 35
and the alignment at Centre. In this version the alignment only affects
the slab visually in render modes.
The inplane load distribution applies to loads in the plane of the slab.
This is usually more relevant to walls but could be important if wind or
notional loads were to be applied directly to the slab. It wont be
considered in this job and can be left at the default.
The normal load distribution scheme is effectively how the slab spans.
In this case with nearly square panels a Two-way distribution is
appropriate.
Pick OK to return to the frame generator.
The last thing is to check that the Apply grouping option is off as we will apply design grouping later.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 20
3.4 Create the frame

Pick Create Frame. The main view now shows the frame
specified with the floor slab as 6 panels with their direction
symbols. This may differ if your display toggles are set
differently.
A3D MAX - Upgrade
4.0 Modifying the model
In this job there is no centre row of columns or centre row of

roof beams. So we will delete these next. They can be
selected for deletion by picking each one individually but the
selection box is a better method in this case.
4.1 Deleting centre columns
Change to a left view and use a crossing box to enclose the lower columns
and bottom joints. With CTRL pressed use another crossing box to select the
upper columns. Press the Delete key.
4.2 Deleting roof beams
To remove the centre roof members it is probably best to set an isometric view
and pick them directly. Press the CTRL key to add members after the first
selection. Press delete.
The frame should now resemble that on the right.
4.3 Possible modifications
The frame generator creates the frame with rigid joints and the columns
orientated in the X plane. In reality this job would probably consist of portal
main frames in the Z direction with pinned beams plus bracing along the front
and back. As this is a exercise in using panels these refinements will be
omitted.
5.0 Adding supports
This is a good point at which to add supports. In this case simple pin supports will be used.
With the front view still use an enclosing box to select all the lowest joints.
Pick the Quick Support tool button and then Pinned from the Quick Support palette.
Close the palette.
6.0 Roof panels
The roof is assumed to be some open web joist system spanning between the main frame. Unlike the slab
this roof will offer no resistance to deformation of the structure and the main reason for using panels is the
easy application of load to the main members.
As the roof is in one plane we can create all the panels in one go. With the
front view set use a crossing box to select all the roof members. Change to an
isometric view so you can confirm the selection and better view the panels
when they are created.
Pick the Automatic panels button to open the Panel properties dialog
which is similar to that under the frame generator.
In this case the thickness is not very relevant but one might assume 250 but what is important is the rigidity
is set to non-rigid.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 21
The inplane load distribution can be left as the default setting, as we will
change this later, but the normal load distribution should be changed to
One-way ribbed. You now need to set the direction which should be
Perpendicular to edge 2for orthogonal panels edge 1 is parallel to X and
edge 2 perpendicular.
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Pick OK and the panels will be create as shown on the right.
7.0 Applying loads
We will deal with the structure under the influence of floor and roof loading fist as this is often the initial
step in any design.
7.1 Floor loading
The first thing to do is define the basic floor loading to be used. The assumption is that the dead load of
slab and finishes etc. is 6.0 kN/m2. The imposed load will be assumed to be 4.0 kN/m2.
Pick the Load Editor button and enter the following data.
No.
Load reference
Type
Direction
Category
Positioning
End 1
size
End 1
position
End 2
size
Loaded
length
Usage
Floor dead
AL
NORMAL
Dead
Fixed
6.000
Floor imposed
AL
NORMAL
Imposed
Fixed
4.000
Select the floor plane by set a front view and using an enclosing box around the floor level objects and
change back to an isometric view the floor panels should all be selected. We dont need to select
beams and joints but their selection does no harm and it is easier to select all objects than trying to avoid
some.
Open the Load editor an highlight both loads and pick Apply. The loads are
shown applied to the panels with the pattern of distribution also. No loads are
actually created on the members until the analysis calculation are run.
7.2 Roof loading
A similar operation is carried out for the roof loading which will be 2.1 kN/m2
for the dead and 0.7 kN/m2 for the imposed.
Open the Load editor and add the loads as shown.
No.
Load reference
Type
Direction
Category
Positioning
End 1
size
End 1
position
End 2
size
Loaded
length
Usage
Floor dead
AL
NORMAL
Dead
Fixed
6.000
Floor imposed
AL
NORMAL
Imposed
Fixed
4.000
Roof dead
AL
NORMAL
Dead
Fixed
2.100
Roof imposed
AL
NORMAL
Imposed
Fixed
0.700
Highlight the two new loads and in the main view use an enclosing box to select the roof panels etc.
Pick Apply and the loads will be added, again the distribution pattern can be
seen.
Before proceed any further lets us take a quick look at the forces in the
structure now the basic loading is set up. However, we still have to set up the
load combinations.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 22
A3D MAX - Upgrade
8.0 Load combinations
We have only a very simple loading model so we will just set up typical ULS and SLS combinations.
Pick the Load combination editor button and set up the following combinations and categories.
Load combinations
Combination options
Combination reference
Limit state
uls
sls
ULS
SLS
Elastic analysis
Linear
Linear
Plastic analysis
No
No
Load categories
Reference
Dead
Imposed
Other
Type
Dead
Imposed
Other
R
R
R
uls
sls
1.400
1.000
1.600
1.000
0.000
0.000
9.0 Analysis calculations
Pick the Analysis Options button to check the

settings of the load distribution options.
Consider edge continuity allows the effects of

continuity to be considered for the load
distribution. Generally this is small and turning it on slows the calculations so accept the default of it OFF.
Supporting edge members to be stiff has an effect when local loads are applied or continuity is
considered and allows you to consider the supporting members as being very stiff when distributing loads
which makes distributions from the grillage method more closely correspond those typically obtained
from the bisection method and traditional load distribution. Leave this set ON although it has no effect in
this example.
We are now ready to run the calculations.
Pick the Calculate button. If the job has not already been saved you will be asked for a file name.
The tabular results opens showing the Displacements page.
You can review the results or to get a clearer picture Close the result dialog and pick Graphical Results.
Choose the deflection option to see how the frame behaves.
You may find the panels obscure the view of the frame particularly if the loads are showing and you can
turn the panels off using the panel and panel loads display toggles. There are a number of toggles to
control what is displayed. You will probably see loads shown on the members and these are those
calculated by the program from the panel loads.
The nature of the loads can be seen by
selecting a member and opening the
load editor and viewing the members
page. You can select more than one
member to view and you can scroll
between them in the editor. You cannot
edit these loads.
10.0 Initial Results
From the graphical results you can see that the deflection in the main beams is excessive. This is not
surprising as no attempt has been made to size them other than using the default section. However, these
results are instructive in confirming that the frame is behaving as one would expect.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 23
A3D MAX - Upgrade
11.0 Next steps
There are now a number of actions you might take depending on the purpose of you analysis. You might
choose to size the members either by trying specific sizes or using the design facilities to offer sizes for you.
Alternatively having confirmed the basis behaviour you might now add wind loads before finalising your
design.
We will do the latter and apply a simple wind pattern to the building. Traditionally wind loads are
commonly applied just to the frame joints where the effect on the members is regarded as small.
However using panels makes the application of wind loads relatively easy and we dont need to impose
that simplification, but this can mean that the panels will impose lateral loads on the supporting beams.
Where the beams are otherwise constrained from lateral deflection, perhaps by a slab, then it might be
better to revert to the application of loads on joints. In this example we will assume the beam take lateral
loading from wind.
In this model the front and back walls will be assumed to be metal sheeting on horizontal rails. The left
and right walls will be assumed to be masonry without substantial openings.
The left and right walls will need some form of support along the bottom so an RC beam will be defined
to serve as a ground beam. This will also be placed along the front an back walls as it will enable the
automatic panel tool to generate the bottom storey. At present it can only automatically include panels
if it finds an enclosed system of members.
12.0 Adding a ground beam
Open the member type editor and on the second line pick RC member from the Type list. The
default Rectangular beam is what we want and enter Ground beam into the Reference field.
Concrete Grade 35 will be satisfactory.
Change the width to 750 and in the Profile page change the depth to 500 leaving the type as Prismatic.
Pick OK and Close the Member Type editor.
Pick Quick member button and choose Ground beam and pick OK. Now pick one of the supports
(lowest joints) in isometric view and work around the frame picking the supports, the beam is added
as you go, until you are back at the first. Then double click over the background to terminate the beam
run and again to exit Quick member mode.
13.0 Adding wall panels
We are now ready to add the wall panels.

13.1 Front wall
Set a left view and use an enclosing box to select the front plane.
Pick Automatic panels, and leave the thickness, rigidity, material and
alignment as they are. The wall is not concrete but we wont be using the
material properties of the panel so this can be disregarded.
We can model the self weight of the wall panel by specifying a one way
inplane load distribution between edges 2 & 4. Set the normal load
distribution to one-way ribbed, perpendicular to edge 2.
Pick OK
13.2 Rear wall
Follow the same procedure as above but this time select the back wall plane.
The panel data is also the same as above.
13.3 Left wall
This is a brick wall and the assumption is that it bears on the ground beam and the first floor edge beam
but is supported laterally by the surrounding members.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 24
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Pick the Automatic panels button this time setting the inplane load distribution to bearing and normal
distribution to two way.
Pick OK
13.4 Right wall
Do the same as above for the right wall.
All the walls have now been defined and the main view should look similar to
the illustration.
14.0 Modifying a panel direction
Before leaving the panel creation we can

take this opportunity to look at how to
change a panel distribution direction. You
are likely to want to do this quite often until
you are accustomed to setting the
direction.
Using the roof panel as an example select
one of the roof panels by right clicking over
its rectangle or it direction symbol and
picking Properties from the menu.
This opens the panel element dialog and choose the Load distribution scheme tab. The in-plane
distribution is set to two-way and we want a one-way distribution onto long edges 2 & 4. Repeat this for
the other two panels.
15.0 Wind load combinations
Before we define and apply the wind loads we need to create a couple of additional load categories for
wind directions. In a real job you may wish to consider several directions but in this example to keep it
simple we will just consider X and Z directions, and wind blowing one way. We will also only create one
set each of wind load combinations for all loads but again a real job might have wind and dead only
combinations.
Pick the load combination editor and in the Load categories panel change the reference Otherto
Wind Xand add a reference Wind Zto the line below and set its type to Other also.
We now have a basic set of categories to work with.
Now Add the two new combinations and set their partial safety factors as shown below.
Load combinations
Combination options
Combination reference
Limit state
uls
sls
Wind x
Wind z
ULS
SLS
ULS
ULS
Elastic analysis
Linear
Linear
Linear
Linear
Plastic analysis
No
No
No
No
Load categories
Reference
Dead
Imposed
Type
Dead
Imposed
Wind X
Other
Wind Z
Other
R
R
R
R
uls
sls
1.400
1.000
1.200
Wind x
1.200
Wind z
1.600
1.000
1.200
1.200
0.000
0.000
1.200
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1.200
Pick Close
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 25
A3D MAX - Upgrade
16.0 Self weight of walls
Before adding the wind loads we will make allowance for the self weight of walls. There is no provision at
present for the automatic self weight of panels so they have to be added as a load.
16.1 Defining the wall self weight
The front and back sheeting will be assumed to be 0.18 kN/m2 and the brick left and right walls to be
brick and block of combined weight of 3.8 kN/m 2 both loads acting in the VERTICAL direction.
No.
Load reference
Type
Direction
Category
Positioning
End 1
size
End 1
position
End 2
size
Loaded
length
Usage
Floor dead
AL
NORMAL
Dead
Fixed
6.000
Floor imposed
AL
NORMAL
Imposed
Fixed
4.000
Roof dead
AL
NORMAL
Dead
Fixed
2.100
Roof imposed
AL
NORMAL
Imposed
Fixed
0.700
Side cladding
AL
VERTICAL
Dead
Fixed
0.180
Brick wall
AL
VERTICAL
Dead
Fixed
3.800
16.2 Applying the wall self weights

Setting a left view use two enclosing boxes to select the front
and rear walls and with the focus on the Side claddingload
pick Apply.
Change to a Front view and using two enclosing boxes select
the left and right end walls and with the focus on Brick wall
load pick Apply.
This should shade the wall panels as shown. The shades for
existing loads may change as they are chosen according to
the relative intensity from a palette derived from the
File>Configure>Preferences>Colours>Area load fillsettings.
17.0 Wind loads
It is assumed that a general face wind load for direction X has been determined to be 0.63 kN/m2 and
direction Z 0.51 kN/m 2. A general drag load for the roof of 0.15 kN/m2 is assumed. This is ignoring uplift and
other similar effects which are omitted to prevent the example becoming unnecessarily long winded.
17.1 Defining the wind loads
We now need to add these loads to the load editor. As the frame is orthogonal to the global axes it is
easiest to apply the wind in the global directions. If the frame had other orientation then Normal or
Inplane directions might be more appropriate but care would need to be exercised over the local axes.
Pick the load editor and add the data shown below the existing loads.
No.
Load reference
Type
Direction
Category
Positioning
End 1
size
End 1
position
End 2
size
Loaded
length
Usage
Floor dead
AL
NORMAL
Dead
Fixed
6.000
Floor imposed
AL
NORMAL
Imposed
Fixed
4.000
Roof dead
AL
NORMAL
Dead
Fixed
2.100
Roof imposed
AL
NORMAL
Imposed
Fixed
0.700
Side cladding
AL
VERTICAL
Dead
Fixed
0.180
12
Brick wall
AL
VERTICAL
Dead
Fixed
3.800
Wind X
AL
HORIZONTAL
Wind X
Fixed
0.630
Wind Z
AL
TRANSVERSE
Wind Z
Fixed
0.510
Drag X
AL
HORIZONTAL
Wind X
Fixed
0.150
10
Drag Z
AL
TRANSVERSE
Wind Z
Fixed
0.150
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 26
A3D MAX - Upgrade
17.2 Applying wind loads

Use an enclosing box to select the left panels and Apply the Wind X load to them.
Select the front panels and Apply the Wind Z load to those.
Finally select the roof panels and Apply both the Drag X and Drag Z loads to those.
18.0 Analysis Calculations and results
We are now ready to re-run the calculations with the additional loads.
Pick the Calculate button and the tabular results opens showing the Displacements page.
Inspection of the displacements reveals excessive deflections which is not surprising as we have still not
tried to find suitable sections. We will do that now.
19.0 Grouping for SW design
We will now set up some design groups so that workable section sizes can be obtained. For the purposes
of this exercise it is assumed that all columns will be of the same section and the beams will consist of
three different sizes for edge beams (front and back), first floor main and roof main.
19.1 Columns
Select all the columns and pick the Create Group button. This starts the Design grouping wizard.
Grouping wizard (page 1) Enter Columns for the group reference. Leave the notes field blank. Pick Next.
Design information (page 2) Enter SW member for the group
contents, BS5950:2000 for the design code and leave the template
and file path to the default setting. The default template only sets
restraints at the ends of the members. Pick Next.
Member joining (page 3) The columns will not be considered as
joined as we want to treat them as distinct lifts between floor even
if they might actually be one length. Leave this set to No. Pick Next.
Common design (page 4) we want the columns to be the same
size so a common design is required. Leave this set and the option
as Least depth/size. Pick Next
Finished (page 5) this reports how the group will be defined and
pick Finish to complete.
The group is now created and the
make up can be seen in the Design
results dialog.
All results are marked N/A as no design has
been carried out yet. We will do that later.
Close the Design results.
19.2 Edge beams

Select the edge beams. Do not include the ground beams or the spine beam in the first floor. Pick the
Create group button enter the following, leaving any other inputs as the default.
Group reference Edge beams.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 27
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Design information Although the first floor beams are likely to be retrained by the slab the roof beams
are not so the worst case will be considered here. Leave the template set to defaults.smd.
Member joining No.
Common design set to Least depth/size.
Finished pick Finish.
19.3 Main floor beams
Select the main floor beams at first floor level. Pick the Create group button and enter:
Group reference Floor beams
Design information change the template to Fullrest.smdeither by substituting that for the
button.
defaults.smdpart of the template name or picking that file from the browser via the
Member joining set Yes as the two analysis members should be regarded as one member from column
to column for design purposes. The members are straight and of the same orientation so the tolerance
settings can be ignored. The spine members strictly should be designed between the main cross beams
but for simplicity they are included in this set and will be joined.
Common design being joined they will be common automatically so this can be left as set.
Finished Pick Finish.
19.4 Roof beams
This is similar to the floor beams.
Group reference Roof beams
Design information change the template to Fullrest.smdeither by substituting that for the
button.
defaults.smdpart of the template name or picking that file from the browser via the
Member joining set Yes as the two analysis members should be regarded as one member from column
to column for design purposes. The tolerance settings can be ignored.
Common design being joined they will be common automatically so this can be left as set.
Finished Pick Finish.
The compacted Design results should look
as illustrated.
20.0 Designing the members
It is recommended that you carry out an analysis first to get the scale of the job and then run the Design
option before updating and re-analysing and checking the job.
20.1 Initial check
Open the design results and right click over
one of the groups and pick Select all. Pick
Check.
The results should look similar to the illustration.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 28
A3D MAX - Upgrade
20.2 Design
The sections need to be re-sized so with all still
selected pick Design.
Some sizes have been suggested which look
reasonable. Note that the deflection is not
determined as part of the Auto design.
20.3 Update model
Pick update analysis model and set select all and create new types.
We will set the latter as so far there is only one default member type and we need
to create a complete set of new ones for each group.
20.4 Updated model

We can see that the design section is now
shown as the analysis section and the status is
marked N/A as the model now needs reanalysing and checking. The previous
utilisation ratios remain shown for your .
20.5 Re-analyse and re-check
Pick Calculation to re-run the analysis and
then Check in the Design Results.
All the groups pass satisfactorily so we have a
solution.
This concludes the example.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 29
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Job file preview
This feature allows you to view a

thumbnail of a selected job. This is
particularly useful in identifying the
nature of the job if it has not been
viewed for some while.
Pick the Open tool button and
select a job to show the
thumbnail in the adjoining viewer.
The required job can then be
opened in the usual way.
The Preview button toggles the
viewer open or closed.
Pinned Base support type
A new type of support has been added called the Pinned Base. Essentially it is a
pinned support with the Y axis rotation fixed, so that it models a typical pinned base
condition.
It is particularly useful for column supports in largely pinned structures where if a simple
pinned support is used the column may spin on its axis causing a Mechanismerror in the
calculations. This option fixes that rotation.
In order to accommodate the new button on the support palette the Deletesupport button has
been removed but picking the Freesupport option shown has exactly the same effect.
Enhancements
The following minor enhancements have been made to the application.

Print Layout dialog
The Print Layout dialog no longer automatically closes following a Preview or Print. This makes it easier to
set up different print runs or use Preview as a way of reviewing the results
Bug fixes
The following corrections have been made.

RTF printout In RTF printout, if you altered the list of things to print and then do another SaveRTF, the
program did not use your new list. It remembered the original list. This is corrected.
Large differences in displacements warning Under certain circumstances a warning about there being
a large difference in displacements detected may appear in the graphical results or when viewing some
member tabular results.
It can arise when a member is subject to a comparatively large axial deflection and the effect is not
taken fully into account in the calculations. This results in the end locations of the member failing the
validation checks on the results, hence the warning. It often manifests as a break up of the deflection
diagram where the end of the errant member does not deflect to the correct displaced joint position.
The problem is often exacerbated under p-delta analysis.
The warning could be ignored for analysis, but it could also lead to end 2 effectserrors if an attempt
was made to design the member which would terminate the design. This is corrected.
Printing bitmap images a modification has been made to avoid poor rendering of graphics results and
other fills when printing diagrams in Bitmap mode under some circumstances.
Upgrd14(v3.00).doc
25/07/02
page 30
A3D MAX - Upgrade

A3D MAX - Upgrade
read in conjunction with the Function Guide.
This version requires CADS Application Supplement (AppSupp.exe) version 1.45 to be installed. Users of
the steelwork design facility need CADS Steelwork Member Designer (SWMD) version 3.42 installed.
New Feature
This new facility is not yet included in the function guide but this document provides a summary and
convenient description of its use.
Improved graphics results control
Improved Graphical Results control
There have been a number of improvements to the Graphical Results to make them easier to navigate
and view.
Results scale factors
The Graphical Results dialog Scale factor setting now has a

slider to easily set the display scale between factors of 1.0 and
1000, although you can still enter scale factors outside that
range. In addition it now acts on each results type
independently.
For instance you can set Deflection to 200, Moments to 20, etc.
according to whatever gives the clearest diagrams. Toggling
between the results will set the appropriate scale. The last
settings are saved with the job.
If you turn the results toggle off and show multiple results then
the current settings are used and the slider is disabled.
Saving a Pre-set view saves the current settings so that the printout can have separate diagrams printed
at an appropriate scale.
Load combination paging
To ease the viewing of each load combination two paging buttons, <<Comband Comb>>, have
been added which page through the load combinations in the same way as the Tabular Results. Results
for a particular load combination can still be displayed using the list.
Labelling selections only
If Graphical results labels are turned on then it is now possible to have only selected members labelled.
This reduces the clutter of labels and reduces the need to use partial views, although these can still be
used if desired.
Deflection tooltip
If the deflections are displayed then pausing the pointer over a member will report its deflection in a
tooltip. These are shown as the maximum Axial, Normal and Lateral global displacements similar to those
reported in the Tabular Results.
This compliments the existing node displacement tooltip which shows the global X, Y and Z axis
displacement.
Upgrd15(v3.02).doc
23/10/03
page 1
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Enhancements
The following minor enhancements have been made to the application.
Panels and panel loads
A few enhancements have been made to panel handling.

Panel properties picking
Panels which had uniform area loads applied could be difficult to right click and show properties. This has
been improved as simply right clicking on the area load will open the menu from which Properties can be
chosen.
Panel loads properties
Right clicking on any panel load type and choosing Properties from the menu opens the Panel properties
dialog at the loads page where the loads can be viewed or edited.
Area load tooltip
Area loads now show a tooltip giving the load reference and value if the pointer is paused over the load
patch or symbol. You may need to be careful in placing the pointer as it can pick up members etc.
behind the panel.
Corrections
The following problems have been corrected.

Plastic analysis
Too many load divisionserror in the plastic analysis has been resolved.
The warning that P-delta calculations are not done for partially fixed membersnow only appears once
instead of for every partially fixed member.
Graphical results dialog
Reducing the number of intervals shown did not always allow previous settings to be restored.
If the last load combination was set to ignored and envelope results were set in the Graphical or Tabular
results then not all the interval results were shown.
SW haunch member types
Certain combinations of haunch depth and length were being prevented in the SW Haunch member
type editor. The limitations have been eased.
SW design
'Nums Div Not Consistent' error in SW check and design. This arose occasionally due to an inconsistency
between the distribution of loads and the steelwork design tolerances.
Certain members could give rise to a wrong no. of effectserror in the Design Results check.
Design grouping
Member joining criteria regarding section was allowing members to be joined which were later rejected
by the steelwork design.
Very large jobs could crash in Design Grouping.
Printout
The joints table outputs the data in three sets of columns in the data table and the last line was not being
printed if less the three sets needed to be printed.
DXF import
Using this feature could cause the program to crash.
Upgrd15(v3.02).doc
23/10/03
page 2
A3D MAX - Upgrade

A3D MAX - Upgrade
Changes
From this version the Portal Wizard becomes a separate application called CADS SMART Portal 2D. This will
allow further development of the application. Existing users of the Portal Wizard will be upgraded to the
new application which has the same functionality as the Portal Wizard plus a SMART section estimate
facility whereby the program selects optimum weight sections which satisfy both analysis and member
check criteria. SMART Portal 2D can read existing Portal Wizard jobs directly.
The Portal Wizard option is therefore removed from A3DMAX, but SMART Portal 2D has an export to
A3DMAX option which allows it to Create a frame in A3DMAX in the same way as the Portal Wizard.
Corrections
The following minor problems have been corrected.

New SW design templates
When a new steelwork design template is created from Design Results > Properties it appeared in the
Properties dialog but did not immediately get assigned to its design object. If you failed to tab off the
field before closing the dialog it failed to update the design object. A new template is now assigned
immediately and the design object updated.
Apparent hanging of SWMD
If, when creating a new SW design template, the operation is closed before the template is created then
SWMD opens a Save As dialog which may be hidden. This gives the appearance of SWMD having hung.
This has been corrected.
Change of job name
If a job has its name changed, perhaps as a result of a Save As for the purposes of trying alternative
solutions, any Design Results > Details paths were re-set to the default path. This meant the original
assignments were lost. The original file name is now maintained. Care needs to be taken if file remains
shared with the original job, particularly as any change made to the details file will be applied to all jobs
sharing it.
Pinned Support setting
Occasionally the Joint Properties > Support > Restraint listcould become corrupted so it was impossible
to choose a Pinnedsupport type from the list. Fixed.
Upgrd16(v3.10).doc
23/10/03
page 1
A3D MAX - Upgrade

A3D MAX - Upgrade
The main improvements to A3D MAX for version v3.20 are detailed as follows. This upgrade note should
be read in conjunction with the Function Guide.
New Feature
A new product is available called SMART Portal 3D. This allows the design of single or multi-span portal
buildings. This product allows its main frames to be exported to A3DMAX in a similar manner to Portal 2D.
This export launches A3DMAX directly with the selected frame.
Enhancements
The following enhancements have been made.
Improved performance
A number of improvements have been made to increase performance particularly for large jobs.
Member Editor
When the member editor is closed the data is validated (for instance duplicate members are checked
for) and this used to take a long time on large jobs. The method of handling this has been improved so it
now only takes a few seconds.
Analysis calculations
Considerable improvement has been made to the solver so that it now completes the stiffness solution
very much more quickly. This is particularly beneficial to large jobs with many members. For instance a
job which took 15 mins 12 sec now takes 1 min 24 sec.
Displaying results
In the Tabular Results the effects used to be calculated every time a member or combination was
changed. Now this only occurs the first time the data is viewed in an editing session and the information
stored for fast retrieval if the same data is reviewed again.
Printing results
The calculations that take place prior to Previewing or Printing the job are now faster.
Split member
This feature now allows you to choose what member end fixity is applied when splitting members.
As parent this maps the end fixities for ends 1 and 2 of
the original member to the sub members created by
splitting, which is the current behaviour.
Fixed/fixed the end fixities either side of the new joints
are both Fixed which preserves the rigidity of the member.
Pinned/pinned the end fixities either side of the new
joints are both pinned. This is useful for triangulated frames
but could be a cause of Frame may be a mechanism
errors if the split member is not otherwise supported at the
internal joints.
The end fixities can be modified as before using the
Member Attributes dialog accessed by choosing
Properties from the menu having right clicked over the member in question.
Upgrd17(v3 20).doc
31/8/04
page 1
A3D MAX - Upgrade

DXF Export
The facility to create Layout groups and subsequently create DXF files is now available from the Files >
Export > DXF menu using the Create Layout Groups and Layout Group Editor options which are
identical to those provided by the Tools menu. This groups this facility with other Export facilities to make it
easier to find.
Printed output
Multiple copies Multiple copies can also be printed using the setting in the Print Manager dialog which
appears after Print Layout > Print from the toolbar or File > Print from the menu is chosen.
Large paper sizes some users have requested output to large paper sizes so this is now allowed using
the old printout method if the Print Engine is turned off. The Print Engine can be turned off by un-ticking
File > Configure > Preferences > Options > Print Engine enabled.
This allows printing to any size set by the printer/plotter as it simply scales the output. Note that of the
diagrams only the Current View is printed. If other views need to be printed make them the current view.
Corrections
Filing
In some cases on Windows 98 and Windows NT systems the program could crash when accessing the File
menu.
Opening jobs created in A3D version 2.xx converted all joints to supports.
Crash while saving due to memory violation problem.
Loading
Occasionally if area load data became corrupted on a panel the load could be duplicated each time
the analysis calculations were run.
Spurious duplicate member error message reported during distribution of Panel loads.
Automatic Self weight was being applied to a Non Dead Load category if it was the first in the Load
categories list. It is now applied to the first dead load category in the list.
Splitting members
Occasional crash when splitting members.
Shortest length now shown to 3 decimal places.
Split member function now defaults to fixed-fixed setting.
SW section library
Certain section sizes issued Invalid Ks values warnings.
Panels
Crash during initialising calculations which could arise under certain arrangements of panels.
DXF import
Sharing violation error message appearing while importing DXF file kept open in AutoCAD.
CSV import
This was not recognising some sections and occasionally failing to import any at all.
Upgrd17(v3 20).doc
31/8/04
page 2
A3D MAX - Upgrade

P-Delta analysis
Occasional crash when members with pinned and partially fixed ends under uniform loads were
calculated for P-delta analysis.
Zero deflections were incorrectly reported for linear load combinations when p-delta load combinations
were present which were correctly reported unstable due to huge deflections.
Graphical results
Repeated error messages Shear at pos. wrong etc. on opening graphical results dialog under certain
rare circumstances.
SW Design groups
An error was introduced in a previous version which prevented SW library members being joined to SW
haunch members with the same main section size. Similarly, members could fail to join if the end fixity
remote from the joint was pinned.
Crash on closing the design object properties dialog if unknown SW template paths found.
In the printout of Design Results summary, long error messages were appearing truncated.
Reset dialog
The Reset dialog command which restores the default positioning of dialogs (used if they sometimes get
placed off screen) did not work in all cases.
Upgrd17(v3 20).doc
31/8/04
page 3
A3D MAX - Upgrade

A3D MAX - Upgrade
Enhancements
Load combination design control
A new Design tab has been added to the Load combination editor which allows improved control over
the export of load combination data to CADS Design applications. The existing load combination data
now appears on the Analysis tab and is otherwise unchanged.
Combination options
The main panel shows the load combinations defined. The upper portion repeats the settings for those
combinations as defined in the Analysis tab. The lower portion lists the CADS Design applications to which
analysis data may be exported. Alongside (under each combination) are list boxes containing options for
handling the load combination data in those applications.
Typical options
Most design applications use the following options.
Active This means that the load combination will be taken into account by the importing application.
Ignore This means the load combination will be ignored by the importing application. Previously all
loads considered by the analysis would available to be used by the design. This is now under separate
control. This is particularly useful for considering cases like base design which use some combinations of
loading which are not appropriate for member design. They can be considered for one and not the
other. Note that if the Analysis is marked Ignored then all design options are set likewise.
Upgrd18(v3 21).doc
15/11/04
page 1
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Designer option settings

The Design options are set by default according to the design application and limit state. The Pad Base
Designer has different options which are described below. The versions required (or later) are also noted.
RC Beam Designer (v3.27) Active, Ignore. Defaults: ULS = Active, SLS = Ignore
RC Column Designer (v1.65) Active, Ignore. Defaults: ULS = Active, SLS = Ignore
RC Pad Base Designer (v1.57) Normal, Wind uplift, Wind down, Ignore. Defaults: ULS = Normal, SLS =
Normal
These options reflect those available in the applications Load and Combinations dialog.
Normal sets the Limit state field to the appropriate setting.
Ignore this ignores the load combination so it does not appear in the list.
Wind uplift sets the Wind load option to Yes and the partial safety factors for the additional loads from
local Beam/wall (dead & imposed), base and soil to: 1.0, 0.0, 1.0, 1.0 respectively.
Wind down sets the Wind load option to Yes and the partial safety factors for the additional loads from
local Beam/wall (dead & imposed), base and soil to: 1.2 throughout.
RC Pile Cap (v1.64) Active, Ignore. Defaults: ULS = Active, SLS = Ignore
SW Member Designer (v3.64) Active, Ignore. Defaults: ULS = Active, SLS = Active
SW Moment Connection (v1.59) Active, Ignore. Defaults: ULS = Active, SLS = Ignore
Panel Handling
Previously on jobs with many panels if one or more was deleted A3DMAX could take some while to
update its data and could give the impression that the command had failed. This operation has now
been considerably speeded so it should now only take a few seconds.
Corrections

Large differences error
An error where on reloading a calculated p-delta job with tension/compression analysis would Large
differences have been detected has been resolved.
Upgrd18(v3 21).doc
15/11/04
page 2
A3D MAX - Upgrade

A3D MAX - Upgrade
New Features
The following new features have been provided.
Error log
During the course of the analysis and design calculations events may be detected which need the
designers attention. These include limitations on the scope of the calculations, warnings if the results seem
to be outside normal expectations, or errors the program cannot cope with. In previous versions these
tended to appear as they where found, sometimes repetitively, and usually interrupted the progress of
the calculation.
This version introduces an Error log tool which
captures these events and displays them at
the end of the calculation. This avoids the
interruptions and has the added benefit that
they are stored with the job and can be
viewed or printed at any time.
Viewing the Error log
The error log is shown following any calculation that generates an error. It can also be viewed by
choosing the File > View Error Log menu item.
Any errors or warnings detected are shown under appropriate headings e.g. Analysis Limitationsand
Design Warningsetc.
Printing the Error log
The Error log can be added to any output by selecting it from the Data panel in the Print Layout dialog.
Maintaining the error log
The error log is maintained until a new calculation is carried out whereupon it is completely refreshed. Not
all errors are reported by the error log. There are two main types not handled.
Low level errors These are errors which occur deep within the calculation and which trapping would be
likely to have an adverse affect on normal performance of the calculations. These are usually rare and
will still be raised as they are detected.
Anticipated errors These are errors which are likely to occur. They normally have other means included
in the results to alert the user. For instance p-delta instability is reported in the Tabular results as it is quite
likely to arise during the design of a structure. Similarly certain limitations in Steelwork member design are
reported in the Design Results > All objectsreport but not in the Error log.
Upgrd19(v3 22).doc
15/11/04
page 1
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Job statistics
During the course of improvements to performance some tools were

devised and one Job statisticsmay be of interest to users.
This shows the number of key objects in the job and allied information. It
can be viewed by choosing the File > Job statisticsmenu item.
Enhancements
Improved performance
Some further work has been done to improve the speed of some operations. In particular the Design
results.
Design results dialog
On large jobs this could take some time to compile the data. This was mainly due to the way the design
object tree was being refreshed. This has now been optimised and the dialog now opens and refreshes
must faster.
Design results calculations
Large jobs could also take some time to complete the check or design calculations. These have been
increased in speed very considerably.
Panel load distribution
The speed of distribution of panels loads onto the supporting members has also been increased
significantly particularly where local loads or grillage options are set.
Main view tree sort
An improvement similar to the Design Results tree as been made to the Sort operation for the Main View
tree.
Corrections

End 2 effects errors
This error can be generated by a number of situations. Improvements have been made to deal with
these cases. The following items indicate cases where the error could have arisen previously.
1. When the internal validation finds that the integration of results along a member do not agree at end 2
with the results from the main matrix. These can arise due to progressive small inaccuracies in integration
along non-prismatic members or as a consequence of the application of p-delta effects. Improvements
have been made to the algorithms to reduce the incidence of these occurring.
2. If certain joined members where not in a straight line.
3. With plastic analysis and point load at zero or full length of a member.
4. For a distributed load with zero length. A warning message is shown when a zero length load is
detected and the load will be ignored.
Upgrd19(v3 22).doc
15/11/04
page 2
A3D MAX - Upgrade

5. For a few pinned/pinned members and partial fixity members in p-delta analysis.
6. For a few members with a hinge formed at the member ends in p-delta analysis.
Panel load distribution errors
Error message 'Fatal Error - Member has internal joints" displayed during the panel load distribution when
the slope of a side of a panel is very small.
While distributing panel loads like point, line and patch loads, load categories other than the first two
were ignored.
The One-way solidwhen multiple panels were selected caused crash when viewing panel load
distribution pattern on triangular panels. The One-way ribbedoption is now set instead if triangular
panels are selected.
Load combinations
A crash occurred on opening the 'Load Combinations' page with 'Display Selection ON'.
A problem which occurred in refreshing scroll positions between Load Combinations and Load
Categories panels, in the Load Combination Editor was resolved.
Print/Output
The Current viewin the view output list was replaced by preceding view in the preview if it was not the
first in the diagram list.
In RTF output spurious cells in loads tables are now removed. In addition a line feed is introduced
between any two tables to improve appearance.
Various Editor problems
Joint editor A crash with 'New Support' when no joints are selected. Now the 'New Support' option in the
Support page is de-activated when no joint are selected to avoid a program crash.
Member Attributes In the Plastic Limit dialog for the Connection resistance moment option, the
minimum range for 'Proportion of member resistance moment' is changed from 0.001 to 0.01 ,to avoid
problems in plastic analysis.
Panel Editor The dialog was not refreshed after creating a panel. Also manual entry of joint numbers
while creating a panel was not accepted.
Layout grouping
A crash could occur when DXF file creation with layout style Plan->Projected view is selected.
The 'Complete Model' layout group could not be deleted from the Layout Group Editor.
Steelwork design
A spurious Restraints Errorwas reported for certain steel members when running Design>Check because
the Nonerestraints setting was not recognised.
A Restraints erroroccurred for certain steel members when running Design>Details with template files
created with 'Range' restraints and when the actual length of the member was greater than the
template member length.
The values of minor axis effective length factors originally specified in the Templates file were changed to
default values when applied to members having different lengths to Template.
Sundry other matters
Lambda critical analysis results were not invalidated for data change.
Upgrd19(v3 22).doc
15/11/04
page 3
A3D MAX - Upgrade
An error could occur while using SW Haunched member with negative slope angle greater than 30
degrees.
Duplicate joints and spurious members were created when importing DXF files.
Upgrd19(v3 22).doc
15/11/04
page 4
A3D MAX - Upgrade

A3D MAX - Upgrade
the steelwork design facility need CADS Steelwork Member Designer (SWMD) version 3.48 installed. Users
of the new base design feature need CADS Pad Base Designer (RCPBD) version 2.02 installed.
New Features
The following new features and enhancements have been provided.
Integrated pad base design

P-delta behaviour control
Perspective view
Extended Member labelling
Extended graphical results labelling
View background colour options
Enhanced design results
Output improvements
Improved access to 'readme'
Pad Base Design facility

This version allows integrated design of isolated pad bases where the CADS RC Pad Base Designer
application has been installed. This feature allows you to:
Specify which supports are to have pad bases.
Specify different geometric and soil properties for groups of bases.
Specify whether the bases in a group are to be mass or reinforced concrete.
Design the bases to obtain a common size or individual sizes.
Check the suitability of known bases.
Import base data from Smart Portal 2D and 3D main frames.
Defining bases
Bases are defined as belonging to a group. Groups allow common properties and parameters to be
applied to bases and you can choose whether each base is to be treated individually or to be designed
in common across the group. Common design implies bases of the same size, thickness and
reinforcement where applicable.
If you have a good idea of which bases will be of a similar size then create a group for each size. If not
you can always design all the bases individually and break the groups up later. Conversely separate
groups can be combined.
Users of the steel member design grouping will find these processes familiar.
To define a group of bases:
1. Select the supports to apply the group of bases to.
2. Pick Design > Create Base Groups from the menu to start the Base grouping wizard.
3. Enter the brief data required by the wizard and pick finish.
4. The base group will be created and listed in the Design Results dialog.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 1
A3D MAX - Upgrade

The Base Grouping Wizard
This works in a similar to way to the steel Member design grouping.
The opening page allows you to enter the base group name.
Pick Next to continue.
Design information
This page confirms that supports have been selected and allows
the design code to be specified. In this version only BS8110:1997 is
supported.
Common design
This page allows you to choose whether the bases in the group are
to be designed with individual sizes or a common size and
reinforcements arrangement applied to all.
You can turn the common design setting on or off from the Design
Results dialog if you wish to examine alternative solutions.
Finished
The final page shows the list of bases created within the group.
Pick Finish to complete the wizard and create the base group.
The group and its bases will be shown in the Design Results dialog.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 2
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Design Result dialog
Open the Design Result dialog by
picking Design Results from the
toolbar or Design > Design Results
from the menu.
The Design results dialog will open
and change the Current object
type list to show RC bases if
necessary.
This lists the bases showing the
default size.
At this point no design or check has been carried out so their status is N/A. Before doing so it is necessary
for analysis results to be available. The current analysis run number is shown below the list or Re-analysis
required if not. For base design it is necessary to have specified at least one ULS and one SLS load
combination.
Designing bases
There are two main options for designing bases.
Check This uses the specified data and reports the base status. It is used when the base size is
known and the impact of changes in the model need to be verified.
Design This attempts to find a suitable base size and for reinforced bases a suitable
arrangement of reinforcement. If the group is marked for common design then a size suitable for
the worse loading condition in the group will be offered. If it cannot find a suitable size then an
Error is reported.
Selecting bases
Before checking or designing bases you need to select which bases to process. This can be done by
picking them individually, or as a block using normal Windows selection techniques.
You can also pick the group name to select a whole group, and by right clicking over the base explorer
tree choose Select all for the whole job.
This is identical to the SW design member selection methods.
Checking bases
Select the bases to check and pick
Check. There will be a pause while
the bases are calculated and the
design results will be updated.
If you pick a base in a common
design group then all the bases in
that group will be checked.
The status is shown for each base
together with its critical utilisation
ratio, the load combination causing
it and the critical mode.
The status of the worst case is also shown alongside the group name so with the list collapsed it is easy to
see the state of the groups at a glance.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 3
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Designing bases
Select the bases to design and pick
Design. There will be a pause while
the bases are calculated and the
design results will be updated.
If you pick a base in a common
design group then all the bases in
that group will be designed.
If the group is marked for common
design then all the bases will be of
the same size.
The status is shown for each base together with its critical utilisation ratio, the load combination causing it
and the critical mode.
For the simple mass bases illustrated the critical one has a utilisation ratio of 0.982 for bearing pressure. It
can be seen that others have as little as 0.489 so some could be reduced in size. This can be done by
breaking the group into smaller groups (which is described below) or by redesigning on an individual
basis.
With the required bases selected
right click over the base explorer
tree and un-tick common design.
Pick Design and they will be recalculated.
The utilisation ratios now range from
0.982 to 0.848 but with quite a mix of
sizes. This result can help you decide
what grouping to use finally.
The illustration so far assumes mass bases and also certain parameters controlling the sizing of the bases.
Changing the bases to Reinforced
type (as described in the next
section) and picking Design gives a
new set of results. The larger bases
are smaller in area and are all
thinner.
In this case the utilisation ratios vary
from 0.984 to 0.936 and the critical
mode varies between the
reinforcement design criteria and
the bearing pressure.
The Details option gives more information on these results (as described below) but this only shows an
individual base. Alternatively the Print Layout Preview is a useful option to review a range of results across
the bases.
Changing base properties
The various parameters defining a base and controlling its design may be changed. Those which can be
changed for individual or groups of bases are accessed via the Properties button and apply to the bases
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 4
A3D MAX - Upgrade

currently selected. Some parameters and general Safety criteria can be changed on a job wide basis.
These are discussed below.
To change base properties select a single base, several, a group or groups. Pick Properties and
depending on the selection different parameters become available for changing.
Concrete & Reinforcement
These dialogs allow you to
choose grade strength,
partial safety factors and
covers for the base.
Soil This dialog allows you to set the soil properties including an
allowance for depth to water and the choice of including passive
resistance in the stability checks.
Dimensions This dialog allows you to change the basic size and
type properties of the base. This is the part most likely to be used
during the design of bases.
Construction type When a group is selected this allows
you to choose whether the bases are to be designed as
Mass or Reinforced concrete.
Base dimension Allows you to change the size of the
base. This is mostly used when checking a particular base
size.
Column/base plate dimensions These default to the size
of any RC column or steel column plus an allowance for
base plate projection but can be modified if required.
Column positions By default columns are assumed to be concentric to the base but you may
specify an offset from the centre or an edge in either direction. A positive value is in the same
direction as the local axes of the base and this depends on the orientation of the column. For 0
orientation positive X is towards the right, for a 180 it is towards the left. You may also fix the
column position relative to the edges.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 5
A3D MAX - Upgrade

The base stick and rendered diagrams reflect any offset and orientation in the main view.
Bar arrangement This dialog is enabled if a Reinforced base type
is chosen. This defines the bar arrangement to be used for
checking an existing reinforced base but may be modified if the
base is designed.
Auto design controls This allows you to set various parameters for
the design of bases. It allows you to specify the maximum and
minimum size of the bases and the increment by which each
dimension is to be rounded.
For rectangular bases you can control the length to width ratio.
You can also fix one or more of the dimensions if the base is in a
confined space for instance. The top and bottom bar sizes can be
set or the program left to find an optimum solution.
Finally you can specify a maximum percentage area of steel.
Design options
These allow control across the whole job and when you pick this option you are warned of this in
advance.
A small dialog is opened that shows the current design and detailing code
settings. The latter can be modified.
There are also two buttons which give access to other parameters.
Design criteria
This opens a dialog in which the base parameters may be set.
These are the same as the parameters described above except
that they are applied across the whole job, and will update all
groups defined.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 6
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Safety criteria
This opens a dialog showing the safety criteria for the job. These are
applied to all the groups defined in the job.
Details
This button allows access to the detailed design check results on
which the design results status is based. It shows the various
utilisation factors, bearing pressure and reinforcement
performance where provided.
Results Summary The first page gives an overview of the results
with the utilisation ratios for the principal checks. It also shows
the maximum bearing pressure under the base.
The summary page also lists any errors or warnings that may be
relevant. The Base design results will only show one warning so it
is advisable to use Details to view any others before deciding
what action to take to avoid them.
Pressure Shows a 3D diagram of the bearing pressures across
the base for the various load combinations. Only the
serviceability load combinations are checked against maximum
bearing pressure.
Stability Reports data concerning the stability for each of the serviceability limit states.
Section capacities Is only active for reinforced bases and shows the moment, shear and punching
shear effects and capacities of the base for each of the ultimate load combinations.
Reinforcement / unreinforced Shows the bar arrangement in reinforced bases or the h/a ratio for mass
concrete bases.
Base loads
If a base or selection of bases is
made this allows additional loads
to be applied to the bases
themselves without affecting the
remainder of the analysis. Presently
these are added in two parts via
the Base loads and combination
dialog.
Floor loads Are specified for each of the load combinations. If a multiple selection of bases is made
then the total factored loads N, Hx, Hy, Mx, My, will be blank but the floor load may still be entered.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 7
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Beam, Wall & Partial loads These are specified by
picking the button so marked and choosing the
appropriate tab in the dialog which appears.
Beam loads Allows you to specify which
quadrant the beam is in, its offset from the
column and the load distance along the
beam and its dead and imposed load
reactions to the base.
More information can be found in the CADS RC Pad
Base Designers Help and User Guide.
Wall loads Allows you to specify which
quadrant the wall is in, its offset from the
column and the dead and imposed loads
applied to the base in kN/m.
Partial floor load Allows you to indicate
whether the floor load specified in the load
and combinations table is to be applied in full
across the whole base or a partial area
bounded by the walls.
More information can be found in the CADS Pad Base
Designer Help and User Guide.
Editing base groups
The parameters of the bases may be edited via the Properties and Design options as described above.
The content of the groups may also be changed, which is particularly appropriate if you wish to reallocate commonly designed bases to new groups to optimise their sizes.
Merge Allows two or more groups to be merged into one. You can then give the resulting
group a new name.
Move to Allows you to move a selection of bases from one group to another. It opens a dialog
from which you pick the group to move the selection to.
Break Allows you to break a selection of bases away from their group and into a new group
which you can name.
Base orientation
This button opens a dialog listing the bases, their orientation and the
associated column orientation relative to the global axes.
By default the base has the same orientation as its column. For bases without
a column the orientation defaults to 0 and may be modified to suit the
alignment of the supported members.
If a base is offset care is needed with the orientation as the combination of
the two determines the direction in which the base is displaced. For instance
a base of 0 with a negative YY offset is moved in the positive global X direction. Whereas a base with
180 orientation and negative YY offset will move in the negative global X direction.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 8
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Base output
The facilities in the Print Layout tool have been
extended to allow a choice of input and result
data to be output. The data is divided into three
parts.
Base input data This consists of Base Properties,
Base Concrete Properties, Base Reinforcement
Parameters, Base Soil Parameters, Base Column
Geometry and Base Dimensions.
Base load data This consists of Base Load
Summary, Base Design Loads and Base Additional
Loads.
Base results data This consists of the Base Results Summary. At present it does not allow fully detailed
printout of individual base results but the direct Export to Pad Designer option does allow this, see Spot
base design below.
Spot base design
Whilst the Base grouping and design is quick and easy, sometimes users just want a quick design for a
particular base. This can be done using the Export To Designer menu option which is retained from earlier
versions for this very reason. Its use will be familiar to seasoned users although there has been a subtle
modification when used with bases.
1. Select a support or a base.
2. Pick Export to designer from the tool bar or File > Export to Designer from the menu and
then RC Base Designer from the sub-menu.
3. This opens the RC Pad Base designer with the necessary data transferred ready for the design
to be completed.
If a support is selected then the export assumes the base is orientated parallel to the global axes
and will warn if the column has a different orientation (as in previous versions).
If a base is selected then the export assumes the base orientation is the same as the associated
column.
4. Save the base design as a separate RC Base Designer (.rcb) file.
Any changes made to the base parameters using this facility will NOT be passed back to the bases or
groups defined in A3DMAX.
This option also allows a fully detailed set of results to be output for a particular base using the native
RCPBD Print Layout facilities.
Design consideration load combination design settings.
Pad base design has particular requirements regarding the behaviour under the influence of wind. The
A3DMAX load combination editor has a Design page which allows you to specify how the combinations
are to be treated by the Base designer.
Normal Sets the Wind load status field in the Base design loads and combinations page to
Normal i.e. not a wind load combination.
Ignore This causes the Base designer to ignore the load combination.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 9
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Wind uplift Sets the Wind load option to Wind up and the partial safety factors for the
additional loads from local Beam/wall (dead & imposed), base and soil to: 1.0, 0.0, 1.0, 1.0
respectively.
Wind down Sets the Wind load option to Wind down and the partial safety factors for the
additional loads from local Beam/wall (dead & imposed), base and soil to: 1.2 throughout.
The default setting for both ULS and SLS load combinations is Normal so if you require a load
combination to be treated otherwise you must select accordingly, unless the frame has been imported
from SMART Portal, in which case the settings will be defaulted to the known wind status.
Importing from portal
Both SMART Portal applications SP2D and SP3D (for 2D and 3D structures respectively) can export a
typical main frame to A3DMAX. They have been upgraded so that any bases defined together with
additional loads can be exported also. It will be necessary to re-calculate the bases in A3DMAX to
obtain the results.
As frames imported from SP3D now include loads applied directly to the base, transverse loads from the
side wall bracing may be included automatically. If present these will cause the frame to be designed as
a 3D frame whereas previously it would have been treated as a 2D frame. This means that props for the Z
direction eaves level are provided automatically to maintain stability. Also, in order that unwanted pdelta effects are not considered, for both 2D and 3D frames, the members are set with the p-delta
behaviour applied to the major axis only. Thus the results obtained by A3DMAX should be similar to those
in SP3D.
The imported loads on the bases do not include any fire collapse loads.
If it is intended to create a full 3D model in A3DMAX by copying, joining and bracing a frame exported
from SP3D then consideration should be given to which frame best suits the purpose.
Any frame which has bracing attached will include loads due to that bracing. These may be applied to
the rafter or column members depending on the bracing arrangement. If bracing is to be added to the
full model then these loads will need to be removed to avoid duplication.
If a frame loaded by bracing is critical then it might be easier to choose the most similar frame without
bracing. Note: the position of the frame chosen to export may be significant as the loading is applied to
the frame according to the bay widths and its position in the building and the loads may require
modifying.
P-Delta behaviour control

Examining a structures behaviour when subject to second order (P-delta) effects is becoming
increasingly important. However, care needs to be exercised in modelling such structures as there are a
number of pitfalls which may report unrealistically poor stability. Where a frame is adequately stiff against
sway, or well braced, problems can still arise due to apparent instability within the members themselves.
A new P-Delta behaviour control has been introduced to overcome this.
Modelling strategies
In order to get realistic cr results and to avoid spurious unstable load combinations for 3D building
structures it will generally be necessary to model the restraint effects of secondary members, floor slabs
and wall panels. This can be done in three ways:A: Adding real or equivalent members to represent the missing restraint and bracing effects.
The disadvantages of this method are the considerably increased effort in setting up the
model and the implications for computation time and handling of data.
Potential advantage is that the original primary steel member sections are retained and
can be readily checked using the Design dialog or by simple export to CADS SWMD.
B: Modifying the properties of the restrained primary members to model their lateral restraints indirectly.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 10
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Using the current software this entails changing the section type from an SW library
Section to a section defined by Properties so that the relevant property (usually Iy) can
be factored up. Unfortunately SWMD then fails to recognise the section and is unable to
carry out the steel design checks. This means that the user has to keep two versions of
the model one with the SW Library sections and one with the modified Properties with
consequent updating problems.
C: Modifying the stiffness properties of the restrained primary members to model their lateral restraints
indirectly.
This has the same effect as option B but instead of modifying the section properties they
are left intact for steelwork design checking and instead a factor is applied to Iy (or
exceptionally Ix) at calculation time. This is the purpose of the P-delta behaviour options.
P-Delta behaviour control options
A new control has been provided in the Member Attributes dialog reached from Edit > Properties or
Right click menu > Properties for selected members. This control is in the tab General under panel PDelta behaviour and is labelled P-Delta applied to:. It has the following options:
Both axes This applies normal P-Delta
analysis to the member and is the default
state.
Major axis only This applies P-Delta analysis
to the major axis only of the member - in
effect stiffening the minor axis against
buckling about the minor axis. This is a typical
setting for a beam stiffened by slabs or purlins.
Minor axis only This applies P-Delta analysis
to the minor axis only of the member - in
effect stiffening the major axis against buckling about the major axis. This might arise with a
column embedded in a wall built up to the flanges.
Suppressed This suppresses the application of P-Delta analysis to the member. This may be
because the member is adequately stiffened in both axes. Alternatively you can use this option
to test whether a member or group of members is controlling the frame stability, i.e. as a
diagnostic aid.
Points to note:- The P-delta controls only apply to analysis. The information is not currently passed to the
steel member designer module (SWMD). This is intended for a later development.
Buckling of individual pin ended members (e.g. bracings) is not currently detected by Pdelta analysis or
by the Elastic critical load calculator. This is because the criterion for frame instability is loss of rotational
stiffness at any frame node. As pin ended members do not contribute to the rotational stiffness of nodes
to which they are attached, the node stiffness is unaffected by Pdelta reductions in the stiffness of the
pin ended member. Pin ended member stability should be checked using SWMD.
Perspective view
This tool button and menu item
View > View > Perspective allows
you to toggle the current view to show a
perspective view of the model. This can
make the model easier to visualise and is
particularly useful as it gives depth to
elevations.
The figure shows a front view in normal and perspective view.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 11
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Member labelling
The Member labels tool button and menu item View > Toggle labels > Member now offers a
number of data items that can be displayed in the label. They are:
Toggle Reference which is the
normal member number
Toggle Member type which
shows the member type
Toggle Orientation which shows
the member orientation
Toggle Handing which shows
the member handing
Toggle Section reference
which shows the section label
These can be combined as
desired
Graphical Results Labelling

Two additional controls for labelling have been provided.
Deflection labelling
When Deflection results are chosen and the Labelling toggle is ON deflection values are now shown
depending on which objects are visible.
Members If members are displayed then the maximum displacement along the member is shown.
Typically this will tend to be near the centre of sagging beams and at the top of swaying columns. The
format of the label is <member ref>, (dx, dy, dx)mm e.g. 9, (0,-21,0)mm.
Joints If joints are displayed then the displacement at the joints is shown. The format of the label is
<joint ref>: (dx, dy, dx)mm e.g. 6: (17,4,0)mm.
Selected results labelling
When result labelling is on, the view can become very congested and nearly impossible to read. There is
now an option Label selected only which is enabled if labelling is ON. Turning this option on then only
shows labels for objects that are selected. Note that selecting a member also includes its end joints if
appropriate. This improves clarity without the need for a partial view.
View background colour options

A number of customers have requested control over the background colour for the views. We now offer
two settings Light and Dark. The settings can be found in File > Configure > Preferences > Colours.
Light Is the default setting and uses a White
background by default. The object colours are
chosen for clarity against this background although
all can be modified as desired.
Dark Is the new option and offers a black
background with a different palette of colours.
Again these may be changed as desired.
Note that in both cases the printout uses a white
background so care is needed with the Dark colour
range so that the objects still show clearly when
printed. It does compensate to some degree by
printing white objects and labels as black but it may
not detect other pale shades.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 12
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Enhancements
Design results tension only members

In the design of steel members currently even tension only members are checked against the maximum
slenderness ratio setting. This is normally 500 but can be raised to 5000 but still needs a suitably defined
template to be applied to a design object for it to take effect. This is easily overlooked resulting in
numerous instances of too onerous limits being applied.
This version now automatically suppresses the lateral buckling check (which used the maximum
slenderness ratio) for members marked as tension only.
Design results selected member highlighting

Previously when groups or design objects in the Design Results dialog are selected they were highlighted
in the main view, but the converse was not true.
Highlight The Design Results dialog now has a button that does the converse so that if any members are
selected in the main view picking this button will highlight them in the Design Results. Note that the
design object containing the members will also be highlighted.
Output Improvements
Improvements have been made to the Print Engine module, now version 3, which drives the output for
CADS Smart Designer applications. The content of the output remains the same but there are several
additional features for formatting the output and a direct Export to Word option.
Print Layout
This dialog is essentially the same as before but
with a few small changes.
Print Order This panel which shows the topics
selected to output now has a Restore default
print order button which re-arranges the contents
in the programs default order. The buttons to
change the order of the items remain available.
Cads Page Setup This replaces the Edit Header button and
opens the Page set up dialog. This is similar to the previous
header dialog but has some additional features, including a Tab
to access margin settings.
Header/Footer This contains the same data as before which is
included in the calculation page header block. The additional
features are:
Suppress page number on printouts Which does as it says and
leaves the page number field in the header blank.
Footer At the request of many customers a footer may be added to the bottom of each page. This has
options for the text it contains and the location of that text.
Page footer options The following options are available:
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 13
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Filename this is the filename of the job.
Filename and path this is the full path name for the job including the filename.
Page no this shows the page number.
Page X of Y this shows the current page number and the total number of pages in the print
run.
Date (DD/MM/YY) this shows the current date in the two digit, day/month/year format.
User test this enables a further input in which the Page footer user text may be entered.
None this suppresses the footer.
Page footer alignments The text is aligned by the options, Left, Centre, or Right.
Margins This allows the page size and margins to be set.
Page size allows A4 or US letter sizes to be chosen.
Top and Left these are the principle settings as they determine how all pages are set out and
set the position of the header.
Bottom determines the position of the top of the footer text. Any variable length output will
stop approximately 6mm above this. Fixed page layouts ignore this setting.
Right is only used for free text and the width of the footer line. All other tables and diagrams
are of fixed width.
Restore defaults allows the program default margin settings to be restored.
Export to Word This is an improved version of the previous Save rtf feature. The main addition is that
after specifying the file location for the rtf output it then automatically opens Microsoft Word, if it is
installed, with the document ready to view. The layout of the rtf (rich text format) file has been improved
so that it closely resembles the native printout.
Preview
The Preview display now has a navigator tree
which enables particular topics to be found
quickly. This makes preview a useful alternative
way of viewing the results.
Print marked items This facility also allows you
to mark items to print so the selection made in
the Print Layout dialog can be further refined.
Right click on the item and pick from the
menu.
The marking works at page level so if an item is
marked for printing the whole page on which it
appears will be printed, not just the item.
The marking is only active while the Preview is
open.
To print the marked items pick Print from the Preview tool bar and
then set the Marked Pages option in the Print dialog. Note that the
printing of marked pages only works from the Preview > Print button
not from the Print Layout > Print button.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 14
A3D MAX - Upgrade

View options
The Preview has two view options
View Which offers a number of page arrangements
some preset zooms and a thumbnail option.
Split window Which divides the view area into two
horizontally and allows different pages to be shown
simultaneously. This can be useful when reviewing
results.
Printer choice
Printout can now be directed to any printer available, via the Print dialog, not just the default printer as
previously.
Access to ReadMe file

The readme.txt file which outlines improvements and changes is
displayed during the installation or upgrade of each version.
Users have requested easy access to this at other times and a
button has now been added to the About dialog opened by
the Help > About CADS A3DMAX menu option.
This Read Me button opens the readme file in Notepad.
Corrections
Calculation
The calculation of critical load factor was carrying out unnecessary iterations under some circumstances
causing the results to take longer to appear than desirable.
A message during the analysis of panels was interrupting the calculations as it was not being trapped by
the error log.
Crashing of a particular customers job in plastic analysis. Error message 'Fatal error' is displayed while
doing the plastic analysis.
Output
When printing diagrams of views at full extents sometimes the labels at edges were clipped.
Preset views showing results were not retaining the load combination settings current when they were
saved.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 15
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Deflected joints were not displayed according to joint toggle setting.
Transparent label option reactivated in File->Configuration->Option->Transparent labels on/off with
default off.
Panel creation
Under rare circumstance panel loads were not being distributed to the edges indicated by the load
direction.
The Create panel tool was not creating some panels from the selected joints when other methods
would.
Panel labels were displaced from their centres when viewed perpendicular to the panel.
Problem in recovering or saving a job which contains corrupt panels.
Error in panel line load distribution calculation. Particular job was crashing when panel line loads were
present.
Modelling
The load combination dialog was not retaining its Display settings during an editing session.
Certain arrangements of members were not being joined correctly in SW member grouping.
Deleting the whole model followed by Undo would crash the program.
Corrupt user sections table showing wrong sections. Problem in recovering the rest of the table.
Incorrect splitting of members and negative shortest and longest length.
Crash due to null member type data in a particular job.
Error in opening the model for a customer job.
Design object toggle was not showing results for members belonging to design objects which were
added to groups via the Explorer right click menu.
Load combinations and categories dialog were not retaining the display selection of categories for a
combination while reopening the dialog.
Crash while deleting all geometry followed by undo command.
Upgrd20(v3 30).doc
10/10/05
page 16
A3D MAX - Upgrade

A3D MAX - Upgrade
The main improvements to A3D MAX for version v3.32 are detailed as follows. This upgrade note should
be read in conjunction with the Function Guide.
This version requires CADS Application Supplement (AppSupp.exe) version 1.53 to be installed.
New Features
The following new features and enhancements have been provided.
Deflection limit reporting

Instability reporting
Deflection limit reporting

A new feature has been added which allows you to specify particular members and/or joints that you
wish to monitor for the control of deflection for all or part of the structure.
Joints You may wish to monitor the deflection of a particular joint for vertical displacement as part of a
truss or for horizontal displacement to assess sway, for example. In both cases you may wish to compare
this displacement against an absolute value of movement or a ratio to some distance e.g. span or
height. The Joint limits tool allows you to do this.
Members The deflection of certain members may be critical in your structure and the Member limits
tool helps you to monitor these deflections either in absolute terms or as a ratio to the member span or
length.
Setting Limits
Defaults for the limits can be set up under File>Configure>Preferences (see below). Individual limits can
then be applied to joints and members as required via the Properties option.
Joint deflection limits

The Joint deflection limits relate to the global displacement of
the frame. You specify which joints to use as controls, the
remainder being ignored. This avoids the reporting of irrelevant
joint displacements. They can be set individually or by selection
via the Joint Properties dialog. This is accessed by selecting one
or more joints, clicking the right mouse button over a joint and
picking Properties from the Pop Up menu.
Joint - The top field shows the joint number or multiple
selection.
Joint deflection limits The joint deflection limits allows you to
set which direction to check the deflection for and the value to
be checked against. By default the settings are OFF so that the
joint is ignored. This avoids a lot of irrelevant tests being
reported and causing confusion.
Sway (X or Z direction) This will check the horizontal displacement of the joint parallel to the global X or
Z axes relative to the vertical distance of the joint above the sway reference joint.
Vertical (Y direction) This will check the vertical displacement of the joint parallel to the global Y axis
relative to the horizontal distance of the joint from the vertical reference joint.
Any given joint cannot be compared to more than one reference joint position. It can be used to check
more than one direction compared to that reference joint.
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
page 1
A3D MAX - Upgrade

A selection of joints can be compared to one reference joint.
Note that if a selection is made and the entries are not the same for all then the input value fields should
show Multiple. Changing the entries will set all in the selection to that setting or value.
Proportion of joint distance Allows you to set the limit as a proportion of joint distance from the
reference joint. The joint distance is measured vertically from the specified reference joint for the X and Z
sway or the horizontal distance for the Vertical displacement. It is expressed as integer of inverse ratio in
value field e.g. H/200 would show as 200. Units field to be blank. Choosing this option disables the input
for the Absolute value and enables the appropriate reference joint fields.
Absolute Allows you to set the displacement in absolute terms relative to the original position of the
joint. Units field to show mm or ins according to Unit setting. Choosing this option disables the option
for the Proportion of joint distance, and reference joint fields.
The fields are disabled if the Sway option is not set, and the joint ignored in respect of that check. If the
settings relate to joints which share a common distance then setting one will report the equivalent value
for the other, otherwise the term Varies will be shown.
Reference joint sway This sets the joint chosen to relate the sway displacement checks to. The following
choices are available.
Lowest sets the lowest joint (least Y coordinate) in the frame as the Reference joint. This is
determined at run time. The adjacent joint field is disabled.
Specified sets the joint specified in the adjacent input field as the reference joint.
Origin Uses the origin (0,0,0) as the reference joint even if no joint is located at that position.
The adjacent field is disabled. This is the default setting.
Reference joint vertical This sets the joint chosen to relate the vertical displacement check to. The
following choices are available.
Specified sets the joint specified in the adjacent input field as the reference joint. This is the
default setting.
Origin Uses the origin (0,0,0) as the reference joint even if no joint is located at that position.
The adjacent field is disabled.
Note that each limit check may use a different reference joint. Generally it wont be appropriate to
choose an individual joint to monitor both the sway and the vertical displacement. Normally it is most
likely that different joints will be chosen.
Member deflection limits

The Member deflection limits
relate the local bowing of the
member or deformation at
the ends to the specified
deflection limits. They can be
set individually or by selection
via the Member Attributes
dialog.
Add a Member deflection
limits panel to the Properties
page, below the Member
ends panel.
Member deflection limits
Members may deflect either
by bowing so the maximum
deflection is near the mid
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
page 2
A3D MAX - Upgrade

point or by bending such that one end is deflected relative to the other. Limits for these deflections may
be set either as a span/deflection ratio (e.g. 1/200) or as an absolute deflection.
Note that if a selection is made and the entries are not the same for all then the combo box and value
field should show Multiple. Changing the entries will set all in the selection to that setting or value.
Ignore This setting instructs the program to ignore the member when checking deflection limits.
By default all members are set to Ignore so the user only specifies those members of interest.
This avoids a lot of irrelevant tests being reported and causing confusion.
Length/deflection ratio This sets the limit to be based on length/deflection ratio. The ratio is
inverted for this input so a recognisable number such as 200 is entered. Expressed as an integer
in value field, units field blank. Default for value field is as set in the Configuration.
Relative deflection This sets the limit to be based on the actual deflection value of the bow or
end deflection to 2 decimal places in mm (metric) or ins (English) units. Units field to show mm
or ins according to Unit setting. Default value is as set in the Configuration.
Configuration
This defines the default settings to be used when
applying limits to joints and members.
Add a page to the Configuration dialog titled
Limits. Suggest a layout similar to that shown.
Deflection limits To allow the following types of
limit to be configured.
Joint - Proportion of joint height Represents the
global displacement and is the proportion of joint
distance from a reference joint, or the lowest.
Expressed as integer of inverse ratio in value field
e.g. H/200 would show as 200. Units field to be
blank. Default for value field is 200.
Joint - Absolute Represents a global displacement and means the amount of displacement relative to
the original position of the joint. Units field to show mm or ins according to Unit setting. Default value is
50.
Member - Length/deflection ratio This is normally referred to by a fractional ratio of the member length
i.e. 1/200. The ratio is inverted for this input so a recognisable number such as 200 is entered. Expressed as
an integer in value field, units field blank. Default for value field is 200.
Member - Relative deflection Means the maximum displacement within the member. Default value is
15. The member deflection limit may be reached either by local bowing where the mid point of the
member exceeds the criteria or by local sway where the deflection of one end relative to the other
exceeds the criteria.
Deflection results for U ratio greater than This allows you to set the value of the utilisation ratio at which
items Over limit will be shown in the printed results.
Results
The results are presented in tabular or graphical form highlighting violations. The table will show a
utilisation ratio to indicate the degree of violation or compliance. The tabular results can be filtered to
reduce extraneous data.
Tabular Results
There are two changes to the Tabular Results dialog, a new Limits page and a Relative deflection report.
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
page 3
A3D MAX - Upgrade

New Limits page
Only applies to SLS combinations. Add new page to Tabular Results dialog titled Limits.
Deflection limits This panel displays the results for the various limit conditions. The fields are updated
according to the current limit setting in the combo box and associated Limit buttons.
Joint Deflections This text changes
depending on the current limit setting
below.
Joint This shows a list of joints according to
the filter settings. Joints with a limit type of
Ignore for a particular direction are not
shown. If all joints for this limit are set to
Ignore then the message No limits set all
joints are ignored is displayed in the panel.
Status Reports Passed or Failed
whether the joint complies with or exceeds
the limit.
Proportion of joint dist. Shows the limiting ratio set and the actual value. This ratio is the sway/height
from the reference joint for horizontal deflections and displacement/horizontal distance from reference
joint for vertical displacements.
Absolute Shows the limiting and actual displacements for the joint.
Member Deflections This text changes
according to the current limit setting below.
Member This shows a list of members
according to the filter settings. Members
with a limit type of Ignore for a particular
direction are not shown. If all members for
this limit are set to Ignore then the
message No limits set all members are
ignored is displayed in the panel.
Status Reports Passed or Failed
whether the member complies with or
exceeds the limit.
Length/deflection Shows the limiting and actual value for the member. The ratio is the local deflection
of the member/ its length.
Relative deflection Shows the limiting and actual relative deflection of the member.
Posn Shows the position of the maximum deflection, either End 1, End 2 or Mid.
U ratio Reports the utilisation ratio of the actual displacement to the limit value. If the U ratio exceeds 10
then it is reported as > 10.
Combination Reports the combination producing the most critical displacement. Shows both the
combination number followed by a hyphen and the combination reference. The reference will be
truncated if it exceeds the field width. The number ensures the combination can be identified even if the
significant part of the reference is truncated.
Control buttons
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
page 4
A3D MAX - Upgrade

<<Limit, Limit>> Allows paging through deflection directions. Should page though list in either
direction. Options are as shown in deflection direction combo box below.
Direction Combo box List allowing immediate access to the deflection direction options. They are
Joints Sway X direction, Joints Sway Z direction, Joints Vertical Y direction, Members Normal
deflection, Members Lateral deflection.
Display options
The following display options are proposed.
Show
All Shows all joints or members in list that are not set as Ignore.
Over limit Shows only those members over the limit i.e. with a U ratio more than the value set in the
configuration.
List by
Number Show joints or members in reference number order, lowest first.
U ratio Show joints or members in utilisation ratio order, highest first. This has the effect of putting the
worst at the top of the list.
Relative deflection report
The Deflection page of the Tabular Results
will have an option to show the deflections
relative to the member. The following
changes are proposed.
The Deflections page main panel title
should be changed to Member
Deflections (Global). It should have a
button marked Relative added adjacent
to the Apply button.
Picking the Relative button changes the
page display as shown below. Main panel
is titled Member Deflections (Relative)
and new button now shows Global for return to main display.
Upper results panel shows the following data:
Intervals This is the normal member interval count and distance.
Local bowing This shows the Normal and Lateral deflections relative to an imaginary chord between
end 1 and end 2 of the member. This effectively reports the deflections as if the member is a normal
beam.
Relative to end 1/2 Shows the Normal and Lateral deflections relative to a line parallel to the original
member position through the displaced end 1 or end 2. This effectively reports the deflections as if the
member is a cantilever.
Original position
Maximum deflections This panel shows similar results
end 1
end 2
to those above, but the maximum value along the
g
parallel thro end 1
member with the relevant position shown below.
Note that Axial relative deflections are omitted as for
all normal frames these are very small.
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
s1
Deflected shape
s2
chord
parallel thro end 2

g: global deflection
page 5
b: deflection relative to local bow
deflection
relative
to
local
sway
end
1
s1:
s2:deflection relative to local sway end 2
A3D MAX - Upgrade

The diagram, showing a member in isolation, should clarify the values for normal deflection. Lateral
deflection is similar but not shown for clarity.
Graphical Results
Deflection labelling
When displaying the deflection results the deflected position of the joints are now shown according to
the joints display toggle.
Printout
The printout takes the form of a summary showing those which exceed the deflection limits (as set in the
configuration). The options Excess Joint Deflection and Excess Member Deflection produces tables for
each joint/member direction showing similar data to the Tabular Results.
Excess Joint Deflection (All)
Joint
Deflection
Criteria
Control
ref
limit
Sway x
Prop. of joint distance
Sway z
Absolute
Sway x
Limit
Actual
joint
Deflectn.
U ratio
Distance
Combination
Ratio
200.00
22.225
4000.00
179.98
1.111
1 - Comb1
n/a
20.00
92.749
n/a
n/a
4.637
1 - Comb1
200.00
22.225
4000.00
179.98
1.111
1 - Comb1
If a joint is checked in more than one direction it will appear in the list 2 or 3 times.
Excess Member Deflection (All)
Deflection
Member
Limit
Criteria
Actual
U ratio
Combination
ref
limit
Normal
L/d ratio
200.00
178.94
1.118
1 - Comb1
Lateral
L/d ratio
200.00
43.13
4.637
1 - Comb1
Normal
L/d ratio
200.00
169.02
1.183
1 - Comb1
The above tables show either All or Max results.

All shows the joint/member relative deflection results having U ratios greater than 1 for all the load
combinations.
Max shows the joint/member relative deflection results having the maximum U ratio among all the load
combinations.
Note that where the joint/member is set to Ignore the joint/member is not shown.
Jnt. defln. above specified URatio (0.9)
Joint
Deflection
ref
limit
Criteria
Control
Sway x
Sway z
Absolute
n/a
Sway x
Limit
joint
Actual
U ratio
Combination
Deflectn.
Distance
Ratio
200.00
22.225
4000.00
179.98
1.111
20.00
92.749
n/a
n/a
4.637
1 - Comb1
200.00
22.225
4000.00
179.98
1.111
1 - Comb1
1 - Comb1
Mem. defln. above specified URatio (0.9)

Member
Deflection
ref
limit
Criteria
Limit
Actual
U ratio
Combination
Normal
L/d ratio
200.00
178.94
1.118
Lateral
L/d ratio
200.00
43.13
4.637
1 - Comb1
Normal
L/d ratio
200.00
169.02
1.183
1 - Comb1
1 - Comb1
These tables display the results for joint or member deflections which exceed the configured setting (as
shown in brackets in the table title).
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
page 6
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Only SLS combinations are included.
Relative deflection
The printout offers the option to output the relative deflection values. The existing output option Member
deflections is re-named Member deflections (Global) and the printed title changed to Member
Deflections (Global) for combination Comb xxx
A new output option has been added named Member deflections (Relative). This will output a table
similar to that shown below.
Member Deflections (Relative) for combination Comb1
Interval
Interval
Relative Deflections (mm)

Local bow
No
pos. (m)
Normal
Local sway relative to end1
Lateral
Normal
Lateral
Local sway relative to end2

Normal
Lateral
Member 1
0
0.000
0.00
0.00
1.000
5.68
-15.30
2.000
9.60
-17.63
3.000
8.72
-11.14
4.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
22.22
-92.75
0.13
7.88
22.35
-84.87
-1.51
28.74
20.72
-64.00
-7.95
58.42
14.28
-34.33
-22.22
92.75
0.00
0.00
-92.75
Member 2
0
0.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
21.01
1.000
0.27
-15.30
-4.98
7.88
16.03
-84.87
2.000
-4.53
-17.63
-15.04
28.74
5.97
-64.00
3.000
-7.07
-11.14
-22.83
58.42
-1.82
-34.33
4.000
0.00
0.00
-21.01
92.75
0.00
0.00
Instability reporting
It is not uncommon for frames to be found to be unstable either due to a mechanism forming under
elastic analysis or due to excessive movement under p-delta effects. These problems can be quite tricky
to resolve particularly in large complex frames.
This version provides some assistance in finding the causes of instability. In both cases problems
encountered and possible locations are reported in the Error Log. This can be saved with the job so you
can interrupt and resume investigations with data for the last calculated state being retained.
Elastic analysis mechanism

A mechanism failure occurs when one or more joints have too many degrees of freedom so that their
position and rotation cannot be determined. A common problem is when too many pins are specified
and a section of the frame collapses because it is not adequately triangulated. Alternatively
members may be able to spin about their axes. Such failures were characterised in previous versions by
a message:
Analysis Warnings:
Frame is a mechanism See Results/options
This is now replaced by a message such as:
Analysis Warnings:
Linear Analysis suspected mechanism:
Unstable joint 9 rotation about Z direction
This may not be the only joint which needs attention but it indicates a possible source of trouble. The
following scenario illustrates one approach to a solution.
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
page 7
A3D MAX - Upgrade

In this instance the problem is a pin ended member split with two joints (9 & 10) which also have a pin at
the end of one connecting sub member thus forming hinges. Fixing the pin next to joint 9 and re-running
the analysis might solve the problem or as in this instance give a further warning:
Analysis Warnings:
Load Combination 1 - Comb1 :
Suspect instability - huge displacements
Joint 9
Max Dy = -106813515752373970.00 mm
This indicates the other internal pin also needs to be fixed, and although with one fixed it no longer
collapses it does deflect excessively and the program has detected that. In this case the excessive
deflection may be detected in specific load combinations so the first which arises is reported.
Most designers would have picked this situation up in the first instance but it illustrates that difficult
problems can be solved by successive elimination. Member fixity is often the source of the problems and
the instability direction can be helpful in determining which of several members at a joint might be worth
considering first.
P-delta Analysis instability

A frame becomes unstable under second order analysis when the effect of the load on the displaced
frame continues to increase the displacement and no equilibrium state can be found. Only certain load
combinations may be unstable.
Messages are typically of the form:
Analysis Warnings:
Load combination 1 - Comb1 :
Pdelta Analysis - Frame is unstable
Unstable Joint 13 - Rotation about Y direction
Load combination 2 - Comb2 :
Pdelta Analysis - Frame is unstable
Unstable Joint 13 - Rotation about Y direction
In this instance the warning indicates a twisting about the vertical axis. Instability might arise due to
inadequate stiffness of the structure as a whole but it may also be due to instability in individual
members. Typical instances are floor beams and light bracing.
Floor beams may be detected as unstable in their lateral direction because no account is taken of any
restraining effect of the floor in the analysis. This can be dealt with by setting their P-delta behaviour to
be applied to the Major axis only via the Member Attributes > General dialog. Thus it is ignored for the
minor axis resisting lateral bending.
Light bracing can be disregarded by setting its P-delta behaviour to Suppressed. Thus it is ignored in
both axes.
Otherwise increasing the stiffness of the structure or providing some external restraint is required to
improve the stability.
Enhancements
BS8500 concrete grades

The Materials editor now has the concrete grades from BS8500 added. They range from C16/20 to
C40/50. These will only appear in New jobs, the materials list for existing jobs is unaffected.
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
page 8
A3D MAX - Upgrade

Help and demonstrations
The Help menu has been extended to allow easier access to various help and documentation available
from the installation CD and on-line.
Manual
This opens the A3DMAX Function Guide (in pdf format) which is now installed with A3DMAX. Previously this
was only available on the CD.
Demonstrations
This opens a browser page to give access to demonstrations of various features of the program. These
are installed with the application and it is not necessary to be connected to the internet to view these.
CADS Online
This gives you two options:
Check for updates This takes you to the CADS Online web page where updates may be available for
A3DMAX.
Configure where you can set how frequently you wish to be alerted about updates.
Corrections
1)
The member results for a SW group having Tension/compression only members were not
updated correctly and this has now been corrected.
2)
The DXF output for in plane view for plan layout was shown inverted but this has now been
corrected.
3)
There was a crash in the base grouping wizard due to the wrong placement of the message
conveying the duplication of bases. The message has now been shown correctly.
4)
Calculations were getting updated for any changes in the preset views. As the changes in the
preset views should not affect the calculations it is retained.
5)
The range used to check the validity of the joint coordinates was wrongly shown, now this has
been corrected.
6)
The preset views were not registered correctly through the right click menu. This has now been
corrected.
7)
Back to back channels and angles with zero spacing were wrongly treated as single sections. This
has been corrected and these will henceforth be treated as double sections.
8)
SW group name in the SW grouping wizard was not accepted unless the wizard was navigated till
the end, but this has now been corrected.
9)
The edge of a panel when split was not treated as a straight edge. This has now been corrected
by adjusting the tolerance set for checking the straightness.
10)
Two adjacent panels on a plane were not treated as rigid. This has now been corrected.
11)
Creation of panels was restricted to some sequence of selection of joints. Now panels can be
created by selecting joints in any sequence.
12)
Triangular panels were drawn distorted in some jobs, this has now been corrected.
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
page 9
A3D MAX - Upgrade
Upgrd21(v3 32).doc
25/05/06
page 10

A3D MAX Function Guide

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

A3D MAX Function Guide

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Computer And Design Services Ltd.

CADS Software India (P) Ltd.

Upgrade Notes Record

Computer and Design Services Ltd.,

Tel. (Sales): +44 (0) 1202 603031

Open Recovery File ...............................................................................12

Save Bitmap ..............................................................................13

Save Template ..........................................................................13

Save Metafile ............................................................................13

RC Beam Designer ...................................................................18

RC Base Designer .....................................................................18

RC Pile Cap Designer...............................................................18

SW Member Designer ..............................................................18

SW Moment Connections .......................................................19

1.10 Audit Database ......................................................................................19

2.0 Edit Menu ..................................................................................46

Dragging the objects...............................................................47

Incorporating the objects.......................................................49

Copying across jobs.................................................................49

Copy Bitmap ...........................................................................................50

Panel Properties ........................................................................57

Load Properties .........................................................................64

3.0 View Menu................................................................................66

Status bar .................................................................................................67

Explorer control .........................................................................68

Object menu .............................................................................69

Zoom Extents .............................................................................71

Zoom Manual ............................................................................71

Zoom Previous ...........................................................................71

Info Mode ................................................................................................72

Stick model ................................................................................72

High quality full render.............................................................73

Low quality full render..............................................................73

High quality full wire frame .....................................................74

Low quality full wire frame ......................................................74

High quality hidden wire frame .............................................74

Low quality hidden wire frame ..............................................75

3.10 Restore Full view .....................................................................................75

4.0 Selection Menu ........................................................................80

Clearing the selection .............................................................81

Detach on Transform ...............................................................84

Toggle Snaps ...........................................................................................85

Set snaps ....................................................................................85

5.0 Model Menu .............................................................................86

Outline of the model .............................................................................86

Panels and Overhangs ............................................................87

Loads and Moments ................................................................88

Load combinations ..................................................................88

3D Building Frame Generator.................................................89

Girder Frame Generator .........................................................91

2D Grillage Generator .............................................................95

2D Truss Frame Generator.......................................................97

Portal Frame Generator ..........................................................100

Joint Editor .................................................................................107

Support Types ......................................................................................108

Member Editor ..........................................................................108

Create Panel .......................................................................................111

5.10 Overhangs ...........................................................................................112

5.16.1 Load combinations ..................................................................142

6.0 Tools Menu................................................................................145

Mirror Selection .......................................................................................145

Quick Panel .............................................................................................147

Quick Support .........................................................................................148

Split Selected Members ........................................................................149